Professional Documents
Culture Documents
Bizhub Pro 950 Field Service 1
Bizhub Pro 950 Field Service 1
950
2009.09
Ver. 2.0
Revision history
After publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for
improvement of their performance.
Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.
When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be
issued with a revision mark added as required.
Revision mark:
• To indicate clearly a section revised, 1 is shown at the left margin of the revised section.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, 1 is shown near the page number of the
corresponding page.
The number inside 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.
NOTE
Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.
• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:
The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.
CONTENTS
OUTLINE
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.1 Main body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.2 DF-616 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.3 LU-407/408 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.4 FS-528/611 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.5 PI-506. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.6 PK-504/505 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.7 ZU-607 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.8 TU-502 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.9 RC-501. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.10 IC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.11 GP-501/MK-724 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.11.1 GP-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2.11.2 MK-724 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
MAINTENANCE
3. PERIODIC CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.1 Maintenance item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.1.1 Main body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.1.2 DF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.1.3 LU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3.1.4 FS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3.1.5 PI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
3.1.6 PK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.1.7 ZU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.1.8 TU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
3.1.9 RC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
3.1.10 GP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
3.2 Replacement parts list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
3.2.1 Periodically replacement parts list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
i
CONTENTS Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING
6. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT/SETTING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
6.1 Checking before starting work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
6.2 Checkpoints when conducting on-site service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
7. UTILITY MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
7.1 List of utility mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
7.2 Display/Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
7.2.1 Display method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
ii
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 CONTENTS
iii
CONTENTS Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
iv
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 CONTENTS
v
CONTENTS Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
TROUBLESHOOTING
12. JAM CODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
12.1 Jam code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
13. MALFUNCTION CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
13.1 Malfunction code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
14. TROUBLES THAT DO NOT DISPLAY THE MALFUNCTION CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
14.1 The power of main body does not turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
14.1.1 Turn ON the main power switch but the power LED of the operation panel
does not light up in red. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
14.1.2 Turn ON the main power switch and the sub power switch,
but the touch panel does not display anything. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
14.1.3 Turn ON the sub power switch but the power LED does not switch from red to green. . . . . . 468
14.2 The power is not supplied to DF-616. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
14.3 The power is not supplied to the paper feed option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
14.3.1 LU-407/408 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
14.4 The power is not supplied to the finisher option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
vi
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 CONTENTS
vii
CONTENTS Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
APPENDIX
18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
18.1 Main body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
18.1.1 Switch/sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
18.1.2 Load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
18.1.3 Boards and others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
18.2 DF-616 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
18.3 LU-407/408. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
18.4 FS-528/611. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
18.5 PI-506 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
18.6 PK-504/505 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
18.6.1 PK-504. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
18.6.2 PK-505. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
18.7 ZU-607 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
18.8 TU-502 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
18.9 GP-501 / MK-724 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
18.9.1 GP-501 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
18.9.2 MK-724 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
19. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
19.1 Main body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
19.1.1 Connector in the board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
19.2 DF-616 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
19.2.1 Connector in the board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
19.3 LU-407/408. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
19.4 FS-528/611. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
19.5 PI-506 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
19.6 PK-504/505 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
19.7 ZU-607 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
19.8 TU-502 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
19.8.1 Connector in the board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
19.9 GP-501/MK-724 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
19.9.1 Connector in the board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
20. RELAY CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
20.1 Main body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
21. TIMING CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
21.1 Main body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
21.1.1 Timing chart when the sub power switch (SW2) is turned ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
21.1.2 Timing chart in single-sided copy mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
21.1.3 Timing chart in double-sided copy mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
21.2 DF-616 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
21.2.1 Timing chart in single-sided mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
21.2.2 Timing chart in double-sided mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
21.3 LU-407/408. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
21.3.1 Timing chart in single-sided mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
21.4 FS-528/611. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
21.4.1 Timing chart of the staple mode (FS-528) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
viii
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 CONTENTS
ix
CONTENTS Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
bizhub PRO 950
Blank page
x
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this product as well as
the risk of damage to the product, Konica Minolta Business Technologies, INC. (hereafter
called the KMBT) strongly recommends that all servicing be performed only by KMBT-
trained service technicians.
Changes may have been made to this product to improve its performance after this Service
Manual was printed. Accordingly, KMBT does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that
the information contained in this Service Manual is complete and accurate.
The user of this Service Manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to
the product while servicing the product for which this Service Manual is intended.
Therefore, this Service Manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the
course of technical training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of
the product properly.
Keep this Service Manual also for future service.
Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:
S-1
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
SAFETY WARNINGS
[1] MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA
BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Konica Minolta brand products are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is
achieved through high-quality design and a solid service network.
Product design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical,
physical, and electrical aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving
at proper tolerances and safety factors. For this reason, unauthorized modifications involve
a high risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such modifications are therefore
strictly prohibited. The points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the reason-
ing behind this policy.
Prohibited Actions
DANGER
• Using any cables or power cord not specified by KMBT.
S-2
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
WARNING
• Use power supply cord set which meets the following
criteria:
AC230V
- provided with a plug having configuration intended for
the connection to wall outlet appropriate for the prod-
uct's rated voltage and current, and
- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and
- provided with three-conductor cable having enough cur-
rent capacity, and
AC208V 240V
- the cord set meets regulatory requirements for the area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to fire or electric shock.
• Attach power plug which meets the following criteria:
- having configuration intended for the connection to wall
outlet appropriate for the product's rated voltage and
current, and
- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and
- meets regulatory requirements for the area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to the product connect-
ing to inadequate power supply (voltage, current capac-
ity, grounding), and may result in fire or electric shock.
S-3
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
1. Power Supply
WARNING
• Check that mains voltage is as specified.
Connection to wrong voltage supply may result in fire or
electric shock. ?V
• Plug the power cord into the dedicated wall outlet with a
capacity greater than the maximum power consumption.
If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may
result.
S-4
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
WARNING
• Check whether the product is grounded properly.
If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded product, you
may suffer electric shock while operating the product.
Connect power plug to grounded wall outlet.
WARNING
• When using the power cord set (outlet type) that came
with this product, make sure the connector is securely
inserted in the outlet of the product.
When securing measure is provided, secure the cord with
the fixture properly.
If the power cord (outlet type) is not connected to the
product securely, a contact problem may lead to
increased resistance, overheating, and risk of fire.
S-5
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
WARNING
• Check whether dust is collected around the power plug
and wall outlet.
Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing
dust may result in fire.
• Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet
hand.
The risk of electric shock exists.
• When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the
cable.
The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and
electric shock.
Wiring
WARNING
• Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power
cords in the same outlet.
If used, the risk of fire exists.
S-6
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
2. Installation Requirements
WARNING
• Do not place the product near flammable materials or vol-
atile materials that may catch fire.
A risk of fire exists.
WARNING
• When the product is not used over an extended period of
time (holidays, etc.), switch it off and unplug the power
cord.
Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may
cause fire.
Ventilation
CAUTION
• The product generates ozone gas during operation, but it
will not be harmful to the human body.
If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases,
ventilate the room.
a. When the product is used in a poorly ventilated room
b. When taking a lot of copies
c. When using multiple products at the same time
Fixing
CAUTION
• Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.
In case of an earthquake and so on, the product may
slide, leading to a injury.
S-7
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
3. Servicing
CAUTION
• Before conducting an inspection, read all relevant docu-
mentation (service manual, technical notices, etc.) and
proceed with the inspection following the prescribed pro-
cedure in safety clothes, using only the prescribed tools.
Do not make any adjustment not described in the docu-
mentation.
If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used, the prod-
uct may break and a risk of injury or fire exists.
WARNING
• Take every care when making adjustments or performing
an operation check with the product powered.
If you make adjustments or perform an operation check
with the external cover detached, you may touch live or
high-voltage parts or you may be caught in moving gears
or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury.
S-8
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
• When taking a report of problems from a user, check each
part and repair properly.
A risk of product trouble, injury, and fire exists.
• Check the exterior and frame for edges, burrs, and other
damages.
The user or CE may be injured.
• Do not allow any metal parts such as clips, staples, and
screws to fall into the product.
They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock
or fire.
S-9
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
• When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lith-
ium battery specified in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose
of the used lithium battery using the method specified by
local authority.
Improper replacement can cause explosion.
• Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp
edges, burrs, or other pointed parts.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or
fire.
• Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connec-
tors, etc. that were removed for safety check and mainte-
nance have been reinstalled in the original location. (Pay
special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables,
forgotten screws, etc.)
A risk of product trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.
Handling of Consumables
WARNING
• Toner and developer are not harmful substances, but care
must be taken not to breathe excessive amounts or let the
substances come into contact with eyes, etc. It may be
stimulative.
If the substances get in the eye, rinse with plenty of water
immediately. When symptoms are noticeable, consult a
physician.
S-10
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
Handling of Consumables
WARNING
• Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire.
You may be burned due to dust explosion.
CAUTION
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.
Isopropyl alcohol and acetone are highly flammable and
must be handled with care. A risk of fire exists.
S-11
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
4. Fuse
Fuse
CAUTION
• CAUTION
Double pole / neutral fusing
• ATTENTION
Double pôle / Fusible sur le neutre
S-12
SAFETY INFORMATION
SAFETY INFORMATION
IMPORTANT NOTICE
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Admin-
istration implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976.
Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States.
This copier is certified as a "Class 1" laser product under the U.S.
Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard
according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emit-
ted inside this copier is completely confined within protective housings and external covers,
the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation.
S-13
SAFETY INFORMATION
57gap0e001nb
S-14
SAFETY INFORMATION
For Europe:
57gap0e002nb
S-15
SAFETY INFORMATION
57gap0e003nb
S-16
SAFETY INFORMATION
57gap0e004na
WARNING
<TU-502>
57gap0e005na
S-17
SAFETY INFORMATION
FS-528
FS-611
57gap0e005nb
S-18
SAFETY INFORMATION
WARNING
This safety message you could
get an electrical shock because
disconnecting power from this
section does not cut off power
from adjacent sections of the
machine.
WARNING
This safety message means
that you might get seriously
hurt or killed if you open the
product and expose yourself to
hazardous voltage. NEVER
remove the screwed on covers.
ALWAYS refer service
requirements to qualified
service personnel.
a0g6m0e004ca
CAUTION:
• You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised by any
caution label to keep yourself away from. Do not remove caution labels. And also,
when the caution label is peeled off or soiled and cannot be seen clearly, replace
it with a new caution label.
S-19
MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT
S-20
Legal restrictions on copying
Certain types of originals must never be copied with the purpose or intent to pass copies of
such originals off as the originals.
The following is not a complete list, but is meant to be used as a guide to responsible copy-
ing.
<Financial Instruments>
• Personal checks
• Traveler’s checks
• Money orders
• Certificates of deposit
• Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness
• Stock certificates
<Legal Originals>
• Food stamps
• Postage stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
• Checks or drafts drawn by government agencies
• Internal revenue stamps (canceled or uncanceled)
• Passports
• Immigration papers
• Motor vehicle licenses and titles
• House and property titles and deeds
<General>
• Identification cards, badges, or insignias
• Copyrighted works without permission of the copyright owner
Detail
In order to prohibit the illegal reproduction of certain originals, such as paper currency, this
machine is equipped with a counterfeit prevention feature.
Due to the counterfeit prevention feature that this machine is equipped with, images may
be distorted.
C-1
Composition of the service manual
This service manual consists of the following sections and chapters:
This section gives, as information for the CE to get a full understanding of the product, a
rough outline of the object and role of each function, the relationship between the electrical
system and the mechanical system, and the timing of operation of each part. This section
also explains the procedure of maintenance.
This section gives, as information required by the CE at the site (or at the customer's
premise), a rough outline of the service schedule and its details, the object and role of each
adjustment, error codes and supplementary information.
C-2
Notation of the service manual
A. Product name
In this manual, each of the products is described as follows:
B. Brand name
The company names and product names mentioned in this manual are the brand name or
the registered trademark of each company.
C-3
Classification Load symbol Ex. of signal name Description
24V Power to drive the motor
CONT Drive signal
DRV1
Motor M
DRV2
Drive signals of two kinds
D1
D2
_U
_V
_W
Drive signals (control signals) of three kinds
DRV1
DRV2
DRV3
D1
D2
D3
D4
DRV A
DRV A
DRV B Drive signals (control signals) of four kinds
DRV B Motor, phases A and B control signals
A
Motor M /A
B
/B
AB
BB
CLK, PLL PLL control signal
LCK, Lock, LD PLL lock signal
FR Forward/reverse rotation signal
EM, Lock, LCK, LD Motor lock abnormality
BLK Drive brake signal
P/S Power/stop
S/S
Operating load start/stop signal
SS
CW/CCW, F/R Rotational direction switching signal
ENB Effective signal
TEMP_ER Motor temperature abnormality detection signal
24V Power to drive the fan motor
CONT, DRIVE Drive signal
Fan FM
HL Speed control signal (2 speeds)
EM, Lock, LCK, FEM Detection signal
Others TH1.S, ANG Analog signal
C-4
Classification Load symbol Ex. of signal name Description
SG, S.GND, S_GND Signal ground
Ground
PG, P.GND Power ground
DCD Data carrier detection
SIN Serial input
SOUT Serial output
DTR Data terminal operation available
GND Signal ground (earth)
Serial com-
DSR, DSET Data set ready
munication
RTS Transmission request signal
CTS Consent transmission signal
RI Ring indicator
TXD Serial transmission data
RXD Serial reception data
<Example>
C-5
Blank Page
C-6
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
OUTLINE
[8]
[9]
[10]
[17]
[5] [15]
[11]
[1]
[16]
[2]
[3]
[6]
[8]
[12]
[10]
[4]
[14]
[11]
[13]
[7]
57gat1c001nd
1 1
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Model Paper size The number Shape of pin Model Paper size The number Shape of pin
of pins of pins
DS-501 81/2 x 11 3 Round DS-510 A4 34 Round
DS-502 81/2 x 11 19 Rectangle DS-511 A4 23 Round
DS-503 81/2 x 11 32 Square DS-512 A4 47 Round
DS-504 81/2 x 11 21 Rectangle DS-513 A4 12 Round
DS-505 81/2 x 11 44 Round DS-514 To be determined
DS-506 81/2 x 11 11 Round DS-515 A4 2 Round
DS-507 To be determined DS-516 A4 20 Rectangle
DS-508 A4 4 Round DS-517 A4 23 Square
DS-509 A4 21 Rectangle DS-518 A4 34 Square
1 2
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
3 1
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
bizhub PRO 950
4
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
C. Type of paper
Plain paper *2 All trays High quality paper, plain paper and recycled paper of 62 to 91 g/m2
Special paper Manual paper feed only OHP film, label paper *3, blueprint master paper *3, Tab paper
All trays Thin paper: 40g/m2 to 61g/m2
Thick paper: 92g/m2 to 216g/m2
Manual paper feed only Thick paper: 217g/m2 to 244g/m2
*2 Recommended paper
Plain paper Inch: Hammermill Tidal MP (20lb)
Hammermill Fore MP (20lb)
Domtar Microprint Laser (90g/m2)
Metric: Original (80g/m2)
Profi (80g/m2)
BIO TOP 3 extra (80g/m2)
Color Copy 80 (80g/m2)
Recycled paper Inch: Hammermill Great White Copy (30%Post-Consumer Fiber) (75g/m2)
Metric: NAUTILUS SuperWhite (80g/m2)
*3 Label paper and blueprint master are loaded and fed one sheet at a time.
D. Materials
*1 A4 original at 6% coverage.
5
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
E. Maintenance
bizhub PRO 950
80
70
A
Humidity (%RH)
60
B Q
40
30
20 C
10
10 18 20 23 30
Temperature (°C)
a03ut1c004ca
6
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
F. Machine data
*1 This value does not include the power consumption for ZU-607, TU-502 and GP-501 which have self
power supply.
G. Operating environment
Note
• The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice.
7 1
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
2.2 DF-616
bizhub PRO 950
A. Type
B. Functions
Original size A3, B4, ISOB4, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S, A5, A5S, B6S
11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2, 51/2 x 81/2S, Foolscap
Maximum original size: 297 x 431.8 mm
Minimum original size: 128 x 139.7 mm
Original stacking capacity 100 sheets, max. (80g/m2 or 20 lbs)
Original read speed (A4 Single sided copy mode: 95 sheets/min.
size) Double sided copy mode: 68 faces/min.
Original feed layout Set with the front side up, at center as standard
Original image read position Dedicated slit glass section
Resolution 600 dpi
C. Original
a
15sat1c001na
a Curling: 10mm or less
[1] 5 sheets of original
Originals other than those With the following originals, no severe problems are found such as frequent jams
that paper feed and and major damage to the originals, although it is not possible to obtain a numeric
throughput can be guaran- value indicating reliability that can be specified in product guarantee terms:
teed Recycled paper, rough paper, heat sensitive paper, punched paper originals
fed in the mixed original mode, plain paper of 35g/m2 to 50g/m2, custom-
sized originals (such as CF originals), coated paper, originals with a rough
surface (such as letterhead), folded originals (Z-folded or folded in two)
Originals not allowed to be The following originals are not allowed to be used:
fed OHP film, blueprint master, label paper, offset master, bonded original,
high-quality paper of less than 35g/m2 or more than 201g/m2
1 8
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
Combination of mixed origi- Combinations of the same and different size originals is available. The following
For Inch
Note
• The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice.
D. Maintenance
E. Machine data
F. Operating environment
9
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
2.3 LU-407/408
bizhub PRO 950
A. Type
B. Functions
Maximum tray capacity LU-407 4,500 sheets (for paper of 80g/m2 or 20 lbs)
LU-408 4,000 sheets (for paper of 80g/m2 or 20 lbs)
C. Type of paper
Paper size LU-407 A4, B5, ISOB5, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 11, *16K
Wide Paper (up to 314 x 223mm), Custom (Max. 314 x 229mm,
Min. 250 x 176mm)
* Only for China and Taiwan destinations.
LU-408 A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, 11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11,
81/2 x 11S, Foolscap, *8K, *16K
Wide Paper (up to 314 x 460 mm), Custom (Max. 314 x 460mm,
Min. 203 x 195mm)
* Only for China and Taiwan destinations.
D. Maintenance
E. Machine data
Power source 24V/5V DC, 24V AC (supplied from the main body)
Maximum power LU-407 82 W or less
consumption LU-408 100 W or less
Weight LU-407 Approx. 30kg
LU-408 Approx. 42kg
Dimensions LU-407 430 (W) x 639 (D) x 690 (H) mm
LU-408 670 (W) x 639 (D) x 695 (H) mm
F. Operating environment
Note
• The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice.
10
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
2.4 FS-528/611
Name Finisher
Type Flat-stapling device (FS-528)
Saddle stitching device (FS-611)
Stapling method Inline clinch (staple-cut) method (FS-528)
Inline clinch method (FS-611)
Shifting method Exit paper shifting method
B. Functions
(1) Functions
11
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
(2) Stapling
bizhub PRO 950
Max. flat-stapling capacity* : FS-528 100 sheets (30 sheets) of 50g/m2 to 80g/m2 paper
Plain paper, high-quality 60 sheets (15 sheets) of 81g/m2 to 91g/m2 paper
paper 50 sheets (10 sheets) of 92g/m2 to 105g/m2 paper
Number shown in parenthe- 50 sheets (10 sheets) (2-staple)/30 sheets (10 sheets) (1-staple) of
ses is for rough paper 106g/m2 to 130g/m2 paper
40 sheets (5 sheets) (2-staple)/10 sheets (5 sheets) (1-staple) of
131g/m2 to 161g/m2 paper
25 sheets (Disable) (2-staple)/10 sheets (Disable) (1-staple) of
162g/m2 to 244g/m2 paper
For the large size (400mm or more in the sub scan direction), it is the
half of the above number.
However, it is 7 sheets for 81g/m2 to 91g/m2 rough paper and 5
sheets for 131g/m2 to 161g/m2 rough paper.
FS-611 50 sheets of 50g/m2 to 80g/m2 paper
30 sheets of 81g/m2 to 105g/m2 paper
Max. saddle stitching FS-611 20 sheets of 64g/m2 to 105g/m2 paper
capacity 19 sheets of 64g/m2 to 105g/m2 paper + 1 sheet of 200g/m2 paper
12
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
13 1
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Main tray FS-611 Non-sort mode, 2500 sheets: A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S,
bizhub PRO 950
C. Type of paper
(1) Non-sort mode, sort/group mode and sub tray mode
Paper size A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S, A4, A4S, B5, ISOB5, B5S, ISOB5S, A5,
A5S*1, B6S*1, ISOB6S*1, A6S*1,
11 x 17, 9 x 11, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2
51/2 x 81/2S*1, Foolscap, 8K*2, 16K*2
Custom: Max. 314 x 460mm, Min. 100 x 148mm
Wide Paper: Max. 314 x 460mm
Tab Paper*3
Applicable paper Same as the main body
Paper weight 40g/m2 to 300g/m2 (sub tray)
50g/m2 to 300g/m2 (main tray)
1 14
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
D. Maintenance
E. Machine data
F. Operating environment
Note
• The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice.
15
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
2.5 PI-506
bizhub PRO 950
A. Type
B. Functions
Auto sheet feeding Feeds the sheet to FS automatically under the instruction from the main body.
(online operation)
Manual sheet feeding Feeds the sheet to FS under the instruction from the operation panel of PI.
(offline operation) You can select the following 5 post processing modes:
• 1 staple/back mode
• 2 staples (flat-stapling) mode
• Punch mode (when PK is installed on FS)
• Saddle stitching mode (when FS supports saddle stitching mode)
• Tri-folding mode (when FS supports tri-folding mode)
NOTE
• The tray /Lw only supports the manual sheet feeding.
C. Type of paper
15jft1c001na
16
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
D. Maintenance
E. Machine data
F. Operating environment
Note
• The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice.
17
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
2.6 PK-504/505
bizhub PRO 950
A. Type
B. Functions
c
b d b d
c
[1] [2]
a a
b b
d b d
b b
[3] [4]
15ktt1e001na
18
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
C. Type of paper
15knt1c001na
D. Maintenance
E. Machine data
F. Operating environment
NOTE
• The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice.
19
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
2.7 ZU-607
bizhub PRO 950
A. Type
B. Functions
b
b d d
b
[1] [2]
a
b
b d
b
[3]
15ktt1e001nb
*1 Adjustable of ±5mm
*2 Adjustable of ±0.5mm
20
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
Z-folding Z-folding method Buckle folding method with the roller pair
L
[1]
L
[2]
15ktt1e002na
Folding precision
a a
[1] [2]
[3] 15ktt1e003na
a: 2mm or less
[1] 1st folding
[2] 2nd folding
[3] Folding (81/2 x 14 paper)
21
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Maximum tray capacity The maximum number of sheets for the FS main tray at the
(80g/m2)
bizhub PRO 950
Z-folding operation
• Z folding continuous: Max. 30 sheets
• Z-folding/stapling: See the table below
C. Type of paper
22
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
Paper curling
15kvt1c001na
D. Maintenance
E. Machine data
F. Operational environment
NOTE
• The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice.
23
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
2.8 TU-502
bizhub PRO 950
A. Type
Type Upper blade reciprocating type fore-edge trimming device with large capacity
stacker
Applicable type of machine FS-611 (When equipped, optional MK-721 is required.)
B. Functions
Number of sheets trimmed 40 sheets, maxi- • 20 sheets of 80g/m2 (before saddle stitching)
*1 mum • 19 sheets of 80g/m2 + 1 cover sheet of 200g/m2
(before saddle stitching)
32 sheets, maxi- • 16 sheets of 81g/m2 to 105g/m2 (before saddle stitching)
mum • 15 sheets of 81g/m2 to 105g/m2 + 1 cover sheet of
200g/m2 (before saddle stitching)
Parallelism between the Parallelism |A - B| = 1mm or less
folding edge and the trim-
ming edge
B
[1] [2]
A
15smt1c001na
[1]
[2]
A
15smt1c002na
*1 The trimming number is the number of sheets after saddle stitching. For example, it is counted as 2 if 1
sheet of paper has been folded.
24
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
Stacking capacity The stacking capacities shown below are applicable only for the same size.
A
B
[1]
C
[2]
15smt1c003na
*1 The saddle stitching number is the number of sheets before the saddle stitching. For example, the folding
number of sheet is counted as 1 when 1 sheet of paper is folded.
25
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
C. Type of paper
bizhub PRO 950
Paper size Fixed size Equivalent to the paper sizes corresponding to the saddle
stitching/ folding mode of the FS (A3, B4, ISOB4, SRA4S,
A4S, 8K*1, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S)
Wide paper Equivalent to the paper sizes corresponding to the FS
Amount of curling Maximum h with 5 sheets overlapped one another = 10mm or less
15smt1c004na
D. Maintenance
E. Machine data
Power source 5V DC (supplied from the main body through the FS)
24V DC (supplied from the main body equipped power source; Equipped
power source is corresponding to 100V to 240V AC)
Maximum power consump- 100 W or less
tion
Dimensions 1280*1 (W) x 610 (D) x 562 (H) mm
Weight Approx. 73kg
*1 This is the size when connected to FS611 (when equipped with MK-721). The size of the machine alone is
1144mm.
F. Operating environment
Note
• The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice.
26
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
2.9 RC-501
B. Functions
C. Capacity
D. Maintenance
E. Machine data
F. Operating environment
27
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
2.10 IC
bizhub PRO 950
A. Type
Type: Built-in box type for the KONICA MINOLTA main body
B. Functions
1 28
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
Network Function
C. Paper
E. Machine Data
F. Operating Environment
29 1
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
2.11 GP-501/MK-724
bizhub PRO 950
2.11.1 GP-501
The GP-501 In-Line punch system is compatible with copiers and finishing devices and is used for punching a
variety of die set patterns.There are two base units configured to punch Letter (81/2 x 11) and A4 (210mm x
297mm) document sizes, both configurations are similar but different to accommodate power & edge registra-
tion.
A. Type
B. Modes of Operation
Bypass mode The paper moves straight from the printer to the finisher without passing
through the punch module. In this mode the paper in not punched.
Punch mode with Punch The paper moves from printer to the punch module where it gets punched and
then is routed to the finisher.
C. Machine Data
D. Software
1 30
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
E. Electronic
F. Inputs
1) For Punching
2) For Bypass
(2) Power
Machine Market Voltage (V) Current (A) Frequency (Hz) Paper size
1 US, Canada 115 +10/-15 % 3 60 81/2 x 11
2 Europe, Australia 220-240 +10/-15 % 1.8 50 A4
31 1
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
G. Outputs
bizhub PRO 950
H. Performance
(1) Reliability
J. Safety /Regulatory
1 32
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
K. Appendix A
33 1
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
bizhub PRO 950
1 34
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
L. Appendix B
No. Model Die set type # Pins Pin Hole size Paper size Label artwork
35 1
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
No. Model Die set type # Pins Pin Hole size Paper size Label artwork
shape (WxH or D)
bizhub PRO 950
M. Appendix C
80
70
A
Humidity (%RH)
60
B Q
40
30
20 C
10
10 18 20 23 30
Temperature (°C)
a03ut1c004ca
1 36
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
N. Glossary of Terms
Cerlox The trade name GBC uses for its Plastic Binding
Color coil A plastic coil that looks like a spring which is threaded through round
holes punched in the document then the ends are cut off and
crimped. The holes are either 4:1 or 5:1 (4 holes per inch or 5 holes
per inch). This type of bind lays flat and even folds around for easy
handling of the document.
Flush-cut covers Covers stock that is the same size as the paper contents and has
round corners.
Plastic binding The name used to describe GBC's most common binding method.
The 19 and 21 rectangular hole, Plastic Comb type.
ProClick A plastic element that snaps together. This style requires holes that
appear to be the same as Twin Loop but are actually slightly larger.
The larger holes enable correct operation of the ProClick Pronto fin-
ishing devise.
Tabbing Tabbing or hanging chad is when a hole is not punched cleanly
(hanging chad) through the material leaving a piece of paper hanging from the edge.
This condition occurs when a die set is worn and will usually result in
miss-feeds.
Twin loop Looped wire element that is feed into square or round holes in the
document in a similar fashion to Plastic Binding. The holes are either
2:1 or 3:1 (2 holes per inch or 3 holes per inch). It is then squeezed
together or crimped to create an attractive bind that lays flat.
Velobind A heat seal plastic bind that is best known for it's security and it's
attractive look. The one draw-back for VeloBind is that it is not a lay-
flat bind style. It is most often used in the Legal market for it's security
feature.
2.11.2 MK-724
A. Type
B. Functions
Function It enables to exchange the interfaces between the main body and GP-501.
(Install to FS-528/611)
Configuration • Board
• Connector/Mounting bracket
37 1
2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
bizhub PRO 950
Blank page
38
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 3. PERIODIC CHECK
MAINTENANCE
Note
• For the replacement procedure of periodically replaced parts, refer to Theory of Operation of the
main body "30.1 External section" to "30.14 Paper exit section."
• The alcohol described in this section represents the isopropyl alcohol.
39
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
40
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 3. PERIODIC CHECK
41
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
42
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 3. PERIODIC CHECK
43
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
44
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 3. PERIODIC CHECK
45
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
46
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 3. PERIODIC CHECK
3.1.2 DF
A. Maintenance 1 (Every 500,000 prints)
47
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
3.1.3 LU
A. Maintenance 1 (Every 500,000 prints)
48
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 3. PERIODIC CHECK
49
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
3.1.4 FS
A. FS-528
bizhub PRO 950
50
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 3. PERIODIC CHECK
B. FS-611
(1) Maintenance 1 (Every 500,000 prints)
51
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
3.1.5 PI
A. Maintenance 1 (Every 500,000 prints)
bizhub PRO 950
52
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 3. PERIODIC CHECK
3.1.6 PK
A. Maintenance 1 (Every 500,000 prints)
3.1.7 ZU
A. Maintenance 1 (Every 500,000 prints)
53
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
3.1.8 TU
A. Maintenance 1 (Every 500,000 prints)
54
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 3. PERIODIC CHECK
3.1.9 RC
A. Maintenance 1 (Every 500,000 prints)
3.1.10 GP
A. Maintenance1 (Every 200,000 prints)
55 1
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
1 56
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 3. PERIODIC CHECK
57 1
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Note
• For the replacement procedure of periodically replaced parts, refer to Theory of Operation of the
main body "30.1 External section" to "30.14 Paper exit section."
• The parts count No. given in the table below represents the number of the fixed parts number in
the service mode.
A. Main body
No. Classification Part name Part number Qt. Actual replace- Parts count
ment cycle No.
1 External Ozone filter /1 57GA1128# 2 3,000,000 37
2 section Ozone filter /2 57GA1129# 1 3,000,000
3 Ozone filter /3 A0Y51122## 1 3,000,000
4 Dust-proof filter /1 57GA1231# 1 3,000,000
5 Dust-proof filter /2 57GA1232# 1 3,000,000
6 Dust-proof filter /3 57GA1233# 1 3,000,000
7 Photo con- Cleaning blade 57GA5601# 2 500,000 2
8 ductor section Toner guide brush assembly 57GA-574# 1 1,000,000 13
9 Scattering prevention felt 55VA5568# 1 1,000,000
10 Drum claw 57GA2919# 3 500,000 10
11 Drum fixing spring 55FU2014# 1 1,000,000
12 Drum positioning collar 25SA2015# 1 1,000,000
13 Drum temperature sensor (TH5) 56GA-209# 1 3,000,000 27
14 Drum DR910 1 * 1,000,000
or 250 hours
15 Seal plate /Fr 56UA-559# 1 1,000,000 15
16 Seal plate /Rr 56UA-558# 1 1,000,000 14
17 Toner seal plate assembly 57GA-568# 1 3,000,000 30
18 Toner guide plate assembly 56GA-561# 1 3,000,000 31
19 Cleaning gear /A assembly 56GA-556# 1 6,000,000 76
20 Cleaning gear /B 55VA7921# 1 15,000,000
21 Toner supply Toner supply sleeve /1 55VA-334# 1 3,000,000 28
22 section Toner supply sleeve /2 55VA-335# 1 3,000,000 29
23 Charge Charge wire 55VA2509# 2 500,000 3
24 section Vibration-proof rubber 55VA2527# 2 500,000
25 Charge control plate 57GA2508# 1 500,000 4
26 Charge cleaning unit 55VA-255# 2 500,000 5
27 C-clip 45AA2040# 2 500,000
28 Charge unit A0Y5R704## 1 6,000,000 38
29 Developing Developing unit A0Y5R703## 1 6,000,000 40
30 section Developing suction assembly 57GA-215# 1 6,000,000 41
58
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 3. PERIODIC CHECK
No. Classification Part name Part number Qt. Actual replace- Parts count
59
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
No. Classification Part name Part number Qt. Actual replace- Parts count
bizhub PRO 950
* The actual replacement cycle of the drum and developer is 1,000,000 prints or 250 hours of use, whichever
is earlier.
60
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 3. PERIODIC CHECK
B. Option
61 1
3. PERIODIC CHECK Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
A. Option
Two parts shown below are not periodically replaced parts.
However, be sure to replace them when they get to the actual replacement cycle.
No. Classification Part name Part number Qt. Actual replace- Parts count
ment cycle No.
1 FS Stapler unit /Fr (FS-528) A10UA727# 1 500,000 94
2 Stapler unit /Rr (FS-528) A10UA728# 1 500,000 95
3 Stapler unit (FS-611) 15JM-501# 2 200,000 92
Reference: Relationship between the number of prints and the drive time
250 hours drive at A4 continuous output of 9 sheets per job is equivalent to 1,000,000 prints.
Note
• Developer/drum replacement icon is generated only by print count or running time. The trigger
can be switched between print count and running time by setting of the DIPSW 15-7 in the service
mode.
62
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 4. SERVICE TOOLS
4. SERVICE TOOLS
63 1
4. SERVICE TOOLS Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
56UAPJG0## Multimeter 1
64
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 4. SERVICE TOOLS
65
4. SERVICE TOOLS Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
4.3.1 Outline
"Mail remote notification system" is a system that allows you to obtain a list print which can be output by the
main body using the Internet mail (E-mail).
Using this system dispenses not only with printing the list on paper but also visiting the users.
Sending a mail filled-in with a simple keyword to the main body allows you to receive by mail all sorts of list print
information of the main body.
(1) The main body has a server that can receive a mail using POP3 or IMAP protocol.
(2) The main body has a mail server that can send a mail using SMTP protocol.
(3) In the following 4 cases, "Mail remote notification system" does not operate in the main body.
• When the main power switch (SW1) is turned off.
• When the sub power switch (SW2) is turned off.
• While the main body is in auto shut-off.
• When the "Enhance Security Mode" is set to ON (the use of the main body NIC is not allowed.)
(1) The list print information of the main body you want to obtain can be received by mail.
List prints that can be obtained are the following 11 lists.
Mode memory list
User setting list
Font pattern list
Management list
Adjustment list
Parameter list
Use management list
Counter list
Coverage data list
Communication log list
Audit log report
(2) The counter list can be checked by cellular phone.
(3) A password used for certification of a mail can be changed.
(4) Directions for use of "Mail remote notification system" can be received by mail.
To make use of the above functions, it is necessary to send a mail to the main body with a simple
keyword (command).
For particulars of the command, Refer to "4.3.5 Usage of the mail remote notification system."
66
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 4. SERVICE TOOLS
(1) Procedure
Step Operation
1 Select [Utility/Counter] on the operation panel.
2 Press [06 Administrator Setting].
3 Press [04 Network Setting].
4 Press [01 Machine NIC Setting].
5 Press [01 TCP/IP Setting].
6 Enter "IP Address," "Subnet Mask," and "Gateway Address."
7 Restart the main body.
Note
• The IP address of the main body is normally assigned by the system administrator. For particulars,
contact the system administrator.
Note
• No space is available in all items to be set. The following characters cannot be used for setting an
E-mail address.
()<>;:“[]
When an improper entry or setting is made on the Web browser, be sure to make corrections fol-
lowing the error massage. When no correction is made, a down load error of the program may
result.
(1) Procedure
Step Operation
1 Start the Web browser.
When a proxy is set on the Web browser, the main body Web may not be accessible. For particulars,
contact the network administrator. For Web browser, Internet Explorer 6.02 or Firefox 1.0 is recom-
mended. However, no setting should be made from two or more browsers simultaneously.
67
4. SERVICE TOOLS Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Step Operation
bizhub PRO 950
2 Specify the IP address of the main body that is entered from "A. Setting from the operating panel."
"Main page" is displayed when an access is made to the Web Utilities of the main body.
68
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 4. SERVICE TOOLS
Step Operation
69
4. SERVICE TOOLS Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Step Operation
bizhub PRO 950
Sending test A mail sending test is made on the SMTP server. A test mail is sent to "E-
mail address of this copy machine" set in Step 6.
Receiving test A receiving test is made on the receiving mail server. A test mail is received
from "E-mail address of this copy machine" set in Step 6.
70
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 4. SERVICE TOOLS
Note
• Mail software can be used without discrimination by OS and a hand-held device or a free mail
using browser.
• Use the mail software in the text mode. A mail in the HTML mode cannot be used.
• For the mail software, as a condition for reception, 128 characters or more are recommended as
the maximum number of characters displayed in a line.
• There are one or more spaces or TAB required between a command and an option that are written
in the mail. However, a line feed is not allowed.
• Enter all the commands that are written in the mail in alphanumeric characters (ASCII characters).
When any other characters are used, an error message "Command Not Found" is sent back.
• Start a command written in the mail from the line head without space.
When there is a space or TAB found at the line head, the line is ignored.
• The maximum number of commands available in a mail is ten. Commands exceeding ten are
ignored.
• Do not paste an attached file to a mail sent to the main body. This may be treated as an illegal mail
according to the size of the attached file.
71
4. SERVICE TOOLS Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
• Do not enter a signature to a mail sent to the main body. A signature may be treated as a com-
mand and sent back as an error mail.
bizhub PRO 950
• When the power is shut off while the main body is sending/receiving a mail or when the main body
is printing the list print, the same mail may be sent back twice.
• The maximum number of mails that can be received by the main body at a time is five. When more
mails than 5 is being receive by the mail server, they will be handled while in the next reception.
72
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 4. SERVICE TOOLS
Note
• The counter related data cannot be written in the NRB.
• The data of other main body (with a different serial number) cannot be written.
• When replacing NRB, be sure to contact the service manager of the authorized distributor for
details.
A. Export of data
(1) Procedure
Step Operation
1 Enter the service mode.
Note
• The use of this function is available only when you enter the service mode.
2 Access the "Extension for maintenance" function from Web Utilities of the main body.
4 Click [Submit...] of the export and then click [Save (S)] in the file download screen to specify the stor-
age place of the PC into which the data is back upped.
73
4. SERVICE TOOLS Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
B. Import of data
bizhub PRO 950
Note
• When replacing the NVRAM board (NRB), be sure set the serial number (refer to "9.9.3 M/C Serial
Number Setting") and the address (refer to "4.3.4 Initial setting") of the main body before importing
data.
(1) Procedure
Step Operation
1 Enter the service mode.
Note
• The use of this function is available only when you enter the service mode.
2 Access the "Extension for maintenance" function from Web Utilities of the main body and enter the
[Machine setting data Import/Export] mode.
3 "Machine setting data Import/Export screen"
Click NVRAM of [Import datatype change] - [NVRAM]. Click [Browse...] of the import, specify the
folder of the PC into which the backup data is stored and press the [Submit...] key.
4 Make sure that the data has been written correctly and turn OFF and ON the main power switch
(SW1).
74
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 4. SERVICE TOOLS
Note
• The history data displayed on the output history list of the main body when the job is completed is
stored in HDD1. Therefore the data is not stored in case the job is stopped, proof is output or jam
is caused.
• Sending history of the scanned information (Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to SMB, and so on)
is not saved.
The following are the display items of job history in the initialization
• No
• JobId
• Mode
• Date
75
4. SERVICE TOOLS Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
When this setting has been already made, proceed to "B. Setting from the Web browser."
(1) Procedure
Proce- Operations
dure
1 Select [Utility/Counter] button on the touch panel.
2 Press [06 Machine Manager Setting].
3 Press [04 Network Setting].
4 Press [01 Machine NIC Setting].
5 Press [01 TCP/IP Setting].
6 Enter "IP address," "Subnet mask," and "Gateway Address."
7 Restart the main body.
Note
• The system administrator normally assigns the IP address of the copier. For details, contact the
system administrator.
(1) Procedure
Proce- Operations
dure
1 Start up the Web browser.
• When the proxy is set on the Web browser, it becomes unavailable to access the main body
Web. For particulars, contact the network administrator. For Web browser, Internet Explorer is
recommended. However, be sure to avoid setting from 2 or more browsers at a time.
2 Specify the IP address of the copier main body that is entered thorough "A. Setting from the opera-
tion panel".
When you access the Web Utilities of the copier main body, "Main page" is displayed.
76
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 4. SERVICE TOOLS
Note
• When the copier is not in service mode, the setting of [Machine setting data Import/
Export] is unavailable.
6 "Extension for maintenance screen"
Click [Machine setting data Import/Export].
77
4. SERVICE TOOLS Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Note
• The setting file imported to A is displayed on "Machine Admin. Setting screen" in default
setting, therefore selecting A is recommended.
8 "Machine setting data Import/Export screen"
When the preparation of the setting file is completed, the following message is displayed. Click
[Browse] key, and specify the setting file.
Note
• The setting file does not need to be named [joblogA.html]. The settings are saved in the
main body with names of joblogA.html to joblogJ.html.
9 "Machine setting data Import/Export screen"
Click [Submit...].
78
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 4. SERVICE TOOLS
Note
• To enable the setting data, turn the SW2 OFF and ON again and initialize the HDD1.
• Access the Web Utility after the initialization of main body/options is completed. The
imported setting files may not take effect when accessing the Web Utility soon after the
OFF/ON of SW2.
11 "Main page screen"
Click [Administrator Setting].
12 Enter the user name and the administrator password on "administrator setting log in" page, and click
"OK".
Note
• They differ from the login user name and the password for the Extension for mainte-
nance
13 "Machine Admin. Setting screen"
Click [Job History List].
14 "Job History List screen"
Change the URL in the address bar to the letter from A to J that has imported the customized file to
update the page.
Example
Before: http://X.X.X.X/goform/joblog.cgi?viw=A
After: http://X.X.X.X/goform/joblog.cgi?viw=B
Note
• In case the customized file is imported to "B".
79
4. SERVICE TOOLS Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Note
• This operation sets the customized item number in order.
• The address bar displays "http://X.X.X.X/goform/joblog.cgi" after the click.
1 Conduct the step1 to step10 of the procedure (1) to see if the import of the setting file is normally
completed. When the import of the setting file fails after conducting these processes, conduct the
step4 and the following steps.
2 Enter the Service mode.
[Service mode menu screen]
[04 Machine Condition]
Press [01. I/O check mode].
3 [I/O check mode screen]
Enter "99" with the numeric keys. Confirm that "99-00" is displayed on the message display area.
4 Press the Access button.
5 Enter "03" with the numeric keys. Confirm that "99-03" is displayed on the message display area.
6 Press the Start button.
Press the Start button to perform the HDD bad sectors check and recovery again when "NG" is dis-
played.
When "OK" appears, conduct the step1 - step10 of the procedure (1) to see if the import of the set-
ting file is normally completed. If the writing of the setting file fails after conducting these processes,
the trouble of the hard disk /1 (HDD1) is considerable. Replace it with new one.
80
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 4. SERVICE TOOLS
81 1
4. SERVICE TOOLS Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Step Operation
1 Store the key file for acquisition of the controller defective log (showalllog) in the USB memory with
empty space.
NOTE
• A key file cannot be created. So, be sure to obtain one from KMBT.
2 Connect the USB memory to the USB port provided on the IC board (ICB).
3 Wait until the "Data" lamp on the operation panel of the main body stops flashing. Or, wait until the
access lamp of the USB memory stops flashing.
The data acquisition is normally completed in about 15 seconds after the lamp stops flashing.
NOTE
• The "Data" lamp on the operation panel normally flashes while the defective log is being
collected. However, the lamp will not flash when there occurs a communication error
between the controller and the main body.
• When there occurs a communication error, check the access lamp of the USB memory.
4 Check to see if the name of a log file obtained is shown in the upper left section of the screen when
the following buttons are pressed down on the operation panel: [MACHINE]-[Controller]-[98 log file].
(IPLog_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.log)
NOTE
• You cannot check when there occurs a communication error between the controller and
the main body.
5 Remove the USB memory from the USB port provided on the IC board (ICB).
6 Check to see if there is an IPLog_yyyymmddhhmmss.log file obtained on the day in the USB mem-
ory, and then copy all of the files stored to the PC.
<Files to be obtained>
• IPLog_yyyymmddhhmmss.log: Controller log
• XXXXX.spl: Print data
NOTE
• Several files other than the above are stored depending on the condition.
• Be sure to turn the main power switch (SW1) OFF and ON after removing the USB mem-
ory from the USB port. If it is not turned OFF and ON, there will be no guarantee for its
proper operation after the log acquisition is completed.
7 Compress the files copied to the PC to be sent to KMBT.
82
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 4. SERVICE TOOLS
83 1
4. SERVICE TOOLS Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Step Operation
bizhub PRO 950
7 Check to see if there are files obtained on the day in the USB memory, and then copy all of the files
stored to the PC.
<Files to be obtained with switch=ON>
• MIO_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.txt
• NET_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.txt
• RIP_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.txt
• PDL_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.txt
• TIF_yyyymmdd_hhmmss.txt
84
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 5. REWRITING FIRMWARE
5. REWRITING FIRMWARE
Note
• Depending on the board, there are 2 types of firmware; G00-xxxx, G80-xxxx.
• When the rewrite is executed with the type that does not match the current firmware type, the
rewrite does not complete normally and an error code or malfunction code occurs.
• Contact the service manager of the authorized distributor for the method to identify the board.
B. Target board
Control board that has different types
• Main body: Printer control board (PRCB)
A. NG screen display
"ISW system error <E2>"
B. Recovery procedure
1. ISW did not complete normally and ISW error is displayed. "ISW system error <E2>"
2. Turn OFF the sub power switch (SW2).
3. While pressing the "Utility/Counter" button, turn ON the SW2 to enter the service mode.
4. Execute ISW with a proper firmware.
Note
• A malfunction code C-C109 is displayed by turning OFF/ON the sub power switch (SW2).
• Be sure to turn OFF the sub power switch (SW2) once, and then turn ON the SW2 again while
pressing the "Utility/Counter" button to enter the service mode.
• After executing ISW with wrong type of firmware, the previous firmware version is displayed in the
service mode.
• For the printer controls C1, C2, C3 and C4, ISW cannot be executed individually.
85
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 5. REWRITING FIRMWARE
5. REWRITING FIRMWARE
(1) ISWTrns
This is a software for Windows to rewrite flash ROM of the main body and rewrites firmware with the main body
and the PC locally connected with UBS cable.
Note
• When upgrading the ISWTrns version, be sure to uninstall the old version of ISWTrns before install-
ing the new version of ISWTrns. When installed by overwriting, this may result in the installation by
the USB driver unavailable.
• When the main body uses the USB to conduct the ISW, it is necessary to install the USB driver of
the ISWTrns. For procedure for installation, refer to "5.2.3 Usage of the ISWTrns A. Installation of
the USB driver (Windows2000/XP)."
85
5. REWRITING FIRMWARE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
PC Overall control board (OACB) Printer control board (PRCB) FS control board (FSCB)
DF control board (DFCB) MK-724 (I/F board)
IC board (ICB) GP (punch control PCB)
When executing the ISW over the entire system, be sure to execute it in the order given below. (To minimize the
occurrence of troubles resulting from the mismatch of the firmware version)
Note
• When OACB is replaced, be absolutely sure to execute first the ISW of the overall control (I1 to I4).
With OACB provided with no firmware of the overall control, the power source of the main body
will not be turned on.
• When updating the firmware of the options, be sure to update the FS (N) first and then turn OFF
and ON the main body. Next, update the firmware of MK-724 (E) and turn OFF and ON the main
body. Finally, update the firmware of GP-501 (G) and turn OFF and ON the main body.
A. When writing firmware newly (when replacing the board or when the rewrite of firmware fails)
Subject board Displayed when starting up Method for the ISW transmission
Overall control board Power save LED flashing Power ON mode
No display on operation panel
Other boards Error code display Service mode
For the overall control board (OACB), when something is wrong with firmware or no firmware is written, it is not
possible to start up normally. In this condition, when the power switch is turned on, the power save LED turns
on with firmware put in the standby condition.
For other boards, when the overall control firmware is in the normal condition with other firmware in the abnor-
mal condition, error code is displayed on the operation panel when the power is turned ON.
Subject board Displayed when starting up Method for the ISW transmission
Overall control board Normal Service mode
Other boards Normal Service mode
1 86
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 5. REWRITING FIRMWARE
5.2 ISWTrns
Note
• Do not turn OFF the power of the main body until the rewriting completes entirely since the time to
complete depends on the target firmware.
Item Specifications
Board to be rewritten Overall control board, Printer control board, DF control board, FS control board,
IC board
Rewritable firmware Image control I1 to I4 ALL, I1 to I4
Printer control C1 to C4 ALL, C1 to C4
Finisher N
Multi puncher G
Multi puncher IF converter E
ADF F
IC control P
Note
• For boards other than the above, ROM replacement is required.
87 1
5. REWRITING FIRMWARE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
(1) Procedure
Step Operation
1 Start the PC.
2 Copy the setup files to the PC and double click the [Setup.exe] icon to start the install program.
Note
• When there remains the ISWTrns of the old version, uninstall the old version first, and
then install the new version.
3 "ISWTrns setup screen"
Following the instructions on the screen, check the folder to which an installation is made, and then
click [Next].
Note
• For default, "C:\Program Files\KONICA MINOLTA\ISWTrns" is set as a folder to which an
installation is made.
• When changing the folder to which an installation is made, click [Browse] and specify
the folder.
4 Following the instructions on the screen, check the folder to which the ISWTrns program is stored
and then click [Next].
Note
• For default, "ISWTrns" is set as a folder to which an installation is made.
• When changing the folder to which an installation is made, enter the folder name
directly, or select one from the existing folder displayed.
5 Following the instructions on the screen, click [Finish].
6 The installation of the ISWTrns program is automatically completed.
7 Select [ISWTrns] from the start menu or double-click the [ISWTrns] icon on the desk top to start up
the ISWTrns program.
88
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 5. REWRITING FIRMWARE
Step Operation
Note
• This screen is shown only when the program is started for the first time after installing
the ISWTrns.
9 "Option screen"
Click [Make Folder]
Note
• A folder (C\Program Files\KONICA MINOLTA\ISWTrns) into which the ISWTrns program
is installed as a storage folder is set by default.
• When changing the storage folder, click [Browse] to specify it arbitrarily or enter it
directly in the editor box in full path.
• Clicking [Make Folder] creates hierarchical folders with the storage folder set above as
a route.
10 "Option screen"
Click [OK].
Note
• This operation allows the data folder created in step 9 to be stored in the INI file of the
ISWTrns program.
89
5. REWRITING FIRMWARE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
When a connection is made between the PC and the main body with a USB cable, the installation of the USB
driver is automatically started by the plug-and-play. However, this may result in the installation of the Windows
USB driver (USBPRINT.SYS) and be sure to set the USB driver following the steps given below.
Note
• Connect PC and the main body with USB cable while the main body is OFF, turn it ON again, and
then conduct the following settings. If the main body is connected while it is ON, it may not be rec-
ognized by PC.
(1) Procedure
Step Operation
1 From the screen below, select "Install from a list or specific location," and then click [Next].
2 In the "Please choose your search and installation options" screen, select "Don't search. I will choose
the driver to install," and then click [Next].
3 Select the UBS driver in the driver selection screen and click "Next" to start installation.
Driver name: KONICA MINOLTA 1050/1050P/920/950 USB Driver for ISW
4 When the "Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard" screen is displayed, click [Finish] to exit the
installation.
90
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 5. REWRITING FIRMWARE
Step Operation
B. Firmware copy
By using the ISWTrns, firmware that transfers it to the main body is copied into the specified folder.
1) Procedure
Step Operation
1 Start the PC.
2 Select "ISWTrns" from the start menu or double click the "ISWTrns" icon on the desktop to start up
the "ISWTrns."
3 Click [Option (O)] from the menu and then click [Option (O)].
4 "Option screen"
Click [Data Copy].
91
5. REWRITING FIRMWARE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Step Operation
bizhub PRO 950
Note
• The folder selected is shown in the upper display section of the "Original Files."
• In the lower display section of the "Original Files," the firmware related files stored in the
folder are shown.
6 Select a file you want to copy from the lower display section of the "Original Files."
Note
• The plural transferred files (rewritten data) can be selected.
• When copying all of the files that are displayed, skip this step and proceed to the step 7.
7 Click [Copy] automatically copies the selected file into the specified folder created by installing the
ISWTrns.
Note
• When copying all of the files that are displayed in the lower display section of the "Original
Files", click [Copy All] instead of [Copy].
• In the upper display section of the "Copied Files", a folder name created at the setup of the
ISWTrns is displayed.
• In the list shown in the lower display section of the "Copied Files," files the copy of which
has been successfully completed are listed in full path. In the "Failed to Copy Files", files
the copy of which have been failed are listed. As the causes of failure, following are consid-
ered.
A. There exists a file of the same name and "O/W" is not checked.
B. A folder into which a file is stored is not found.
C. An overwrite is made on an overwrite-prohibited file.
• When changing a file that is currently stored into a new data, click the overwrite check box
to make a check mark.
8 After completion of copy, click [Refresh].
9 Click [Cancel] to get back to "option screen."
10 "Option screen"
Click [OK].
92
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 5. REWRITING FIRMWARE
Step Operation
1 Press [Firmware Version] in [Service mode screen].
2 Press [Firmware Version] in the sub menu shown to the right of the screen.
3 "Indication of Firmware Version screen"
Step Operation
1 Press [ISW] in "Service mode screen."
2 Press [ISW] in the sub menu shown to the right of the screen.
3 "ISW mode screen"
93 1
5. REWRITING FIRMWARE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
94
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 5. REWRITING FIRMWARE
1) Procedure
Step Operation
1 Turn OFF the power of the main body.
2 Turn OFF the power of the PC.
3 Connect the UBS cable [2] to the USB port [1] of the PC.
[1]
[2]
57gaf2c278na
4 Connect the UBS cable of the PC to the ISW connector of the main body.
95
5. REWRITING FIRMWARE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
1) Procedure
Step Operation
1 Unplug the power cords of the main body and the optional equipment.
2 After loosening the 2 screws at the lower section of the ZU rear cover, remove the 2 screws at the
upper section and then remove the ZU rear cover.
[1]
[2]
[3] 57gaf2c276na
3 Remove the connector (CN6) [2] of the ZU control board (ZUCB) [1].
4 Connect the connector removed at step 3 to the short-circuit connector [3] that is hooked to the wire
saddle provided at the lower section of ZUCB.
5 After completion of the rewrite of firmware, remove the short-circuit connector and connect the con-
nector to CN6 of ZUCB.
6 Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
96
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 5. REWRITING FIRMWARE
E. Rewriting of firmware
(1) Relationship between the ISW and the display of the operation panel
[2] [3]
[1] [4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8] [9]
[10]
97
5. REWRITING FIRMWARE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
[9] [FileCheck]
With a transmission file displayed in "SendFile info" of [8], press this key to calculate the file checksum
bizhub PRO 950
(checksum of the entire file) of the displayed transmission file and show a result beside the transmission file.
And also, compare the result of the checksum with the checksum file attached to the firmware and display
the obtained result in the form shown below.
"OK": Accord
"NG": Not accord
"??": Checksum file (*.sum) not found
[10] [FileSend]
The transmission of the transferred file is started.
(2) Procedure
e.g.: When the overall control program (ALL) is written.
Step Operation
1 Start the ISWTrns program.
2 Click [Set-up (S)] from the menu and then click [Communication setting (C)].
3 "Set Communication screen"
Select USB and click [OK].
4 Select the machine type, the destination and the board types.
• Machine type: 950, Country: EU, Board type: I1 to I4 collectively
5 The data to be used is displayed in the version selection frame and the send file information frame.
98
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 5. REWRITING FIRMWARE
Step Operation
8 Press first [Start] on the operation panel and then click [FileSend] of the ISWTrns.
9 The following window is displayed on the PC while in the data transfer.
"Operation panel"
99
5. REWRITING FIRMWARE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Step Operation
bizhub PRO 950
11 "ISWTrns"
Click [OK].
"Operation panel"
When sending data in succession, press the [Yes].
When terminating the rewrite, press the [No].
When pressing the [No], the main body starts up automatically.
12 After restart of the main body, check "Firmware version screen" to see if the firmware is normally
updated.
100
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 5. REWRITING FIRMWARE
101
5. REWRITING FIRMWARE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Unable to copy several files 1. The destination folder does not exist.
2. When the overwrite check box is not checked, an attempt is made to
copy to a file having the same file name.
3. An attempt is made to overwrite a protected file.
4. Any other cause (such as a file being used by another application or
OS problem)
Send file not found, or invalid file The number of divisions of a send file recorded in the checksum file and
name in the folder. Check. the number of files actually existing do not match.
1. A file having an invalid file name exists in the data folder. Delete possi-
bly invalid file names from the folder list.
2. The number of files in a divided file is wanting. Identify the wanting
files in the folder list and recopy them.
1 102
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 5. REWRITING FIRMWARE
Note
• When rewriting the IC firmware, the execution of the ISW is inhibited if the initialization of the IC is
D. ISWTrms troubleshooting
When an error occurs while in the execution of the ISWTrns program.
103
5. REWRITING FIRMWARE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
5.3.1 Outline
"Internet ISW" is a system in which the Web browser, the main body operation panel, or the Internet mail (E-mail)
is used to give an ISW instruction, and the main body automatically obtains the firmware from the program
server and conducts ISW. Using the Internet ISW that uses the main body operation panel or the Web browser
allows the execution of ISW at the customer facility with no program brought with. And, the Internet ISW using a
mail remote notification system also allows the execution of ISW from the remote place.
Note
• It operates while in the jam, the error code and lower power mode.
(1) Procedure
Step Operation
1 Press [Utility/Counter] on the operation panel.
2 Press [06 Administrator Setting].
3 Press [04 Network Setting].
4 Press [01 Machine NIC Setting].
5 Press [01 TCP/IP Setting].
6 Enter "IP Address," "Subnet Mask," and "Gateway Address."
7 Turn OFF and ON the sub power switch (SW2) to restart the main body.
Note
• The IP address etc. of the main body is normally assigned by the system administrator. For partic-
ulars, contact the system administrator.
104
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 5. REWRITING FIRMWARE
Note
• No "space" is allowed in all set items.
• When an incorrect setting is made on the Web browser, be sure to correct it following the error
message. Correcting no input error may result in the download error of the program.
(1) Procedure
Step Operation
1 Start up the Web browser.
When the proxy is set on the Web browser, the main body Web may not be accessed.
For particulars, contact the network administrator. For Web browser, Internet Explorer 6.02 or Firefox
1.0 is recommended. However, be sure to avoid setting from two or more browsers at a time.
2 Specify the IP address of the main body that is entered thorough "A. Setting from the operation
panel."
When you access the Web Utilities of the main body, "Main page screen" is displayed.
"Main page screen"
105
5. REWRITING FIRMWARE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Step Operation
bizhub PRO 950
106
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 5. REWRITING FIRMWARE
Step Operation
Note
• For types 2, 3 and 4, no guarantee is made.
• For authentication of proxy server, refer to "5.3.6
Authentication of the proxy server in the Internet ISW."
Proxy Server IP Address When using the proxy server, set the IP address of the proxy
server.
Port Number When using the proxy server, set the number of the port that
uses the proxy server.
User name on the Proxy When selecting the type 1 or type 2 in "Proxy Server Type" above
Server set the account of the proxy server.
Password for the Proxy Server When selecting the type 1 or type 2 in "Proxy Server Type" above
set the password of the proxy server.
8 After completion of entry, click [Next] and then after checking the set items in the setting check
screen, click [Next]. However, if there is an input error, click [Back] following the message shown in
red and then re-set the item.
107
5. REWRITING FIRMWARE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Step Operation
bizhub PRO 950
Program Server Address Set the address of the server into which the program to be down
loaded is stored. Select the protocol to be used from the pull-
down menu left and enter the address after that in the text box
on the right. In the case of ftp, it is a relative path from the home
directory.
User name on the program Enter the account name of the program server.
server
Password for the program Enter the password of the program server.
server
Receiving time out Set the receiving time out of the program. When the time is out,
the down load of the program forcibly comes to an end, and the
system returns to the normal mode without conducting the ISW.
10 After completion of entry, click [Next]. Then after checking the set items in the setting check screen,
click [Finish]. However, if there is an input error, click [Back] following the message shown in red and
then re-set the item.
11 Set the program server (Proxy is not used).
12 After completion of entry, click [Next]. Then after checking the set items in the setting check screen,
click [Finish]. However, if there is an input error, click [Back] following the message shown in red and
then re-set the item.
108
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 5. REWRITING FIRMWARE
Step Operation
• When the down load test failed, the response error code from the server is display as shown
below. Since there may be a setting error, re-check the initialization.
109
5. REWRITING FIRMWARE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
to download the programs from the program server automatically for rewriting.
(1) Procedure
Step Operation
1 Proceed to "Internet ISW" on the Web Utilities.
"Internet ISW screen"The firmware version of the board is displayed beside each of the board types.
2 Select one ISW intended board at the item of "ISW." When specifying a file name to be download,
enter it in the [File name] text box.
When specifying no firmware name, the rewrite is conducted in the following files in which the pro-
gram server is stored.
Note
• bootN1.bin is intended for FS-528 and bootN2.bin is for FS-611.
3 After completion of entry, click the [ISW].
If there is an input error, click [Back] following the message displayed in red and then enter the item
again.
1 110
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 5. REWRITING FIRMWARE
Step Operation
111
5. REWRITING FIRMWARE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
body can download the program from the program server to conduct the rewrite automatically.
(1) Procedure
e.g.: When rewrite the overall control board (OACB) firmware (ALL).
Step Operation
1 Display "ISW mode screen."
2 Press the [Internet ISW] on the screen and then press the [Download ALL] of <Image control>.
1 112
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 5. REWRITING FIRMWARE
Step Operation
In a case in which the download of an old version firmware is required, press the [File Name Input]
and enter the file name manually.
4 When ISW is completed normally, the main body automatically restarts and completes ISW.
5 After restart of the main body, check "Firmware version screen" to see if the firmware is normally
updated.
113
5. REWRITING FIRMWARE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
panel.
The following shows error codes.
* Error codes for FTP and HTTP are errors stipulated by usual protocols.
Command
Command Parameter Reply Code Description
USER user@host 331 Transmit the user name of the program server and the
program server address
PASS password 230 Transmit the password for the user name above
Command
Command Parameter Reply Code Description
OPEN host ftp expanded function, Transmit the program server address
defined for each server
USER user 331 Transmit the user name of the program server
PASS password 230 Transmit the password for the user name above
114
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 5. REWRITING FIRMWARE
Command
Command Parameter Reply Code Description
USER FW user 331 Transmit the user name of the proxy server
PASS FW password 230 Transmit the password for the user name above
SITE host ftp expanded function, Transmit the program server address
defined for each server
USER user 331 Transmit the user name of the program server
PASS password 230 Transmit the password for the user name above
Command
Command Parameter Reply Code Description
USER FW user 331 Transmit the user name of the proxy server
PASS FW password 230 Transmit the password for the user name above
USER user@host 331 Transmit the user name of the program server and the
program server address
PASS password 230 Transmit the password for the user name above
D. Remarks
For fwtk2.1 (for Unix) and Black Jumbo Dog (for Windows), the type 1 authentication is used. For most of the
proxy servers, the type 1 authentication is used. When the authentication type of the proxy server is not known,
you are recommended to make settings in type 1 authentication as a temporary measure.
115
5. REWRITING FIRMWARE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
bizhub PRO 950
Blank page
116
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 6. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT/SETTING SECTION
ADJUSTMENT/SETTING
117
7. UTILITY MENU Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
7. UTILITY MENU
bizhub PRO 950
* "6 User Paper Selection" appears as menu item 05 when the machine is not set up for the tandem mode.
118
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 7. UTILITY MENU
119 1
7. UTILITY MENU Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
7.2 Display/Exit
This machine is provided with setting menu for various adjustments/settings. Data adjusted/set in this mode is
stored in the NVRAM board (NRB).
120
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 8. ADJUSTMENT ITEM LIST
Note
• When visiting the customer for installation or maintenance purpose, it is recommended to use
"Machine setting data Import/Export" function of the main body Web Utilities to back up various
types of datas such as adjustment data and set-tray data stored in the NVRAM board (NRB) in the
PC.
• When replacing the NRB due to the OACB being damaged, use the NRB installed in the damaged
OACB on the new OACB. When it is considered that something is wrong with the data of the NRB,
use the "Machine setting data Import/Export" function of the main body Web Utilities to overwrite
data backed up in advance in the NRB. Contact the service manager of the authorized distributor
if it is considered that the NRB is also damaged.
• The NRB stores various datas such as adjustment data, setting data, and counter data. Therefore,
when replacing the NRB, perform all adjustments and setting, and be sure to replace the parts of
which adjustments are controlled by the counter (Drum, developer, cleaning blade, fusing web).
For details, contact the service manager or the authorized distributor.
121
8. ADJUSTMENT ITEM LIST Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
122
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 8. ADJUSTMENT ITEM LIST
123
8. ADJUSTMENT ITEM LIST Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
ZU control board Paper edge sensor sensitivity adjustment (ZUCB or PDB) P.384
(ZUCB)
Punch drive board Paper edge sensor sensitivity adjustment (ZUCB or PDB) P.384
(PDB)
Paper edge sensor Paper edge sensor sensitivity adjustment (ZUCB or PDB) P.384
board (PESB)
124
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
9. SERVICE MODE
125
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
126
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
127
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
9.2 Display/Exit
bizhub PRO 950
This machine is provided with a service mode for various adjustments/settings. Data adjusted/set in this mode is
stored in the NVRAM board (NRB).
1. While pressing [Utility/Counter] button, turn ON the sub power switch (SW2).
When the CE password has been set, entering the password is required to enter the service mode.
2. "Service mode menu screen"
The service mode appears.
128
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
B. Usage
• This adjustment is needed when a paper size is not detected properly.
C. Procedure
Note
• Be sure to select "1" of the tray you adjust.
4. Pull out the tray selected. Expand once the paper
guide [1] to the limit and move it slowly in the direc-
tion in which the width is narrowed, and then use a
scale to make the distance between the paper
guides [2] equal to the standard value.
Note
• Be sure to select "2" of the tray you want to adjust.
8. Pull out the tray. Expand once the paper guide to the limit and move it slowly in the direction in which the
width is narrowed to make the distance between the paper guides equal to 279.4mm (81/2 x 11).
9. Set the tray.
10. "Tray adjustment screen"
Press [Start].
The current position of the selected tray is read in. When the adjustment is done, the message "Complete"
appears.
11. To adjust other trays, repeat steps 3 to 10.
129
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
• Change the line speed of the registration roller to match the line speed of the drum.
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when replacing the registration roller and when the transfer jitter occurs at the
position 150mm from the paper trailing edge.
Note
• This adjustment changes the line speed of the registration roller only. Unless properly adjusted, it
may cause a transfer jitter at a position 150mm from the paper trailing edge.
• Usually, do not use this adjustment in the field. Use this only when replacing the registration roller
and when a transfer jitter occurs at a position 150mm from the paper trailing edge.
• Conduct "Printer S1 FD-Mag. Adj.", "Printer S2 FD-Mag. Adj." to adjust the magnification in the
sub scan direction.
C. Procedure
Note
• For the paper type in the tray, be sure to set [high-quality paper] or [106 to 130g/m2].
6. Check the magnification in the sub scan direction.
• Standard value [1]:within 102.8 0 mm
-0.5 [1]
(when in life-size: Metric)
• Standard value [1]:within 108.7 0 mm
-0.5
(when in life-size: Inch)
57gaf3c002nb
7. When the value is not within the standard value, press [SERVICE].
8. "Registration Line Speed Adjustment screen"
Enter a value through the numeric keys and press [Set].
Setting range: -40 (shorter) to +55 (longer) 1 step = 0.05%
9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the standard value can be obtained.
130
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
Note
• The density of "Test pattern density setting" is reflected. So, be sure to check the set value of
"Test pattern density setting" to ensure it is "255."
11. Set A3 or 11 x 17 paper (130g/m2 or 35 lb Bond) in the tray. Press the Start button to output the test pat-
tern (No.9).
12. Press [SERVICE] to return to the [Registration Line Speed Adjustment] screen.
13. Repeat steps 10 to 12 to output test patterns for two steps before and after the value you entered in step
9.
e.g.: When the adjusted value is "-1," output 5 test patterns for -3, -2, -1, 0, 1.
14. Check the transfer jitter around 150mm from the paper trailing edge, and find an output with the least
transfer jitter (Density of half-tone is even with surrounding area).
15. Press [SERVICE].
16. "Registration Line Speed Adjustment screen"
Through the numeric keys, enter the adjusted step number of the output paper you selected in step 15,
and press [Set].
Setting range: -40 (shorter) to +55 (longer) 1 step = 0.05%
131
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
• Adjust the magnification in the sub scan direction of the printer system front side only. (Change the line
speed of the drum and the registration roller evenly.)
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when the transfer jitter occurs at the position about 303mm from the paper trailing
edge on the front side to reduce the transfer jitter by adjusting the magnification in the sub scan direction.
• Conduct this adjustment when the magnification in the sub scan direction of the printer system front side
only is not within the standard value.
C. Procedure
57gaf3c003na
7. When the value is not within the standard value, press [SERVICE].
8. "Printer Drum Clock Adjustment (Side 1) screen"
Enter a value through the numeric keys and press [Set].
Setting range: -10 (shorter) to +10 (longer) 1 step = 0.05%
9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the standard value can be obtained.
132
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when the transfer jitter occurs at the position about 303mm from the paper trailing
edge on the back side in order to reduce the transfer jitter by adjusting the magnification in the sub scan
direction.
• Conduct this adjustment when the magnification in the sub scan direction of the printer system back side
only is not within the standard value.
C. Procedure
57gaf3c003na
7. When the value is not within the standard value, press [SERVICE].
8. "Printer Drum Clock Adj. (Side 2) screen"
Enter a value through the numeric keys and press [Set].
Setting range: -10 (shorter) to 0 (longer) 1 step = 0.05%
9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the standard value can be obtained.
133 1
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
• Adjust the magnification in the main scan direction of the printer system front side only. (Change the magni-
fication in image-processing before the laser exposure.)
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when the magnification in the main scan direction of the printer system front side
only is not within the standard value.
C. Procedure
190
57gaf3c004na
7. When the value is not within the standard value, press [SERVICE].
8. "Printer Horizontal Adjustment (Side1) screen"
Enter a value through the numeric keys and press [Set].
Setting range: -10 (shorter) to +10 (longer) 1 step = 0.1%
9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the standard value can be obtained.
134
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when the magnification in the main scan direction of the printer system back side
only is not within the standard value.
C. Procedure
190
57gaf3c004na
7. When the value is not within the standard value, press [SERVICE].
8. "Printer Horizontal Adj. (Side2) (Tray1) screen"
Enter a value through the numeric keys and press [Set].
Setting range: -10 (shorter) to 0 (longer) 1 step = 0.1%
9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the standard value can be obtained.
135 1
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
• Adjust the magnification in the sub scan direction of the scanner system (the scanning speed of the expo-
sure unit).
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when the magnification in the sub scan direction of the printer back side only is
not within the standard value.
C. Procedure
200
57gaf3c005na
7. When the value is not within the standard value, press [SERVICE].
8. "Scanner (Orig. Glass) drum clock adj. screen"
Enter a value through the numeric keys and press [Set].
Setting range: -40 (shorter) to +40 (longer) 1 step = 0.05%
9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the standard value can be obtained.
136
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when the magnification in the sub scan direction of the printer back side only is
not within the standard value.
C. Procedure
[1] 57gaf3c006nb
7. When the value is not within the standard value, press [SERVICE].
8. "Scanner (ADF) drum clock adj. (100%) screen"
Enter a value through the numeric keys and press [Set].
Setting range: -40 (shorter) to +40 (longer) 1 step = 0.05%
9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the standard value can be obtained.
137
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
• Adjust the image leading edge timing of front side by changing the laser writing start timing.
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when the leading edge on the front side is lacking or too much in printing.
Note
• Be sure "9.3.3 Printer S1 FD-Mag. Adj. (Magnification Adjustment)" has been adjusted.
C. Procedure
57gaf3c007nb
7. When the value is not within the standard value, press [SERVICE].
8. "Printer Restart Timing Adjustment (Side 1) screen"
Enter a value through the numeric keys and press [Set].
Setting range: -30 (shorter) to +30 (longer) 1 step = 0.1mm
9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the standard value can be obtained.
138
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when the leading edge on the back side is lacking or too much in printing.
Note
• Be sure "9.3.3 Printer S1 FD-Mag. Adj. (Magnification Adjustment)" has been adjusted.
C. Procedure
57gaf3c007nb
7. When the value is not within the standard value, press [SERVICE].
8. "Printer Restart Timing (S2) (Tray1 Offset) screen"
Enter a value through the numeric keys and press [Set].
Setting range: -30 (shorter) to +30 (longer) 1 step = 0.1mm
9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the standard value can be obtained.
139
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when the paper skew, crease, or jamming occurs in the registration roller section.
C. Procedure
1 140
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when the paper skew, crease, or jamming occurs in the pre-registration roller sec-
tion.
C. Procedure
141
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when the image erasure amount of the leading edge is not within the standard
value.
C. Procedure
57gaf3c029na
7. When the value is not within the standard value, press [SERVICE].
8. "Printer lead edge timing adjustment screen"
Enter a value through the numeric keys and press [Set].
Setting range: -20 (smaller) to +40 (larger) 1 step = 0.1mm
9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the standard value can be obtained.
142
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when transfer error (such as missing image portions) occurs under the condition
of operating the transfer assist sheet.
C. Preparation
• Select the appropriate paper setting beforehand so that the transfer assist sheet can be fed through.
Note
• Perform "Transfer Assist Pressure Level adj." properly, or the photoconductor may get damaged.
• Only perform this adjustment when the transfer error still occurs after performing "Transfer Assist
Push Position adjustment" and "Transfer Assist Release Position adj."
• Always perform "Transfer Assist Push Position adjustment" and "Transfer Assist Release Position
adj." after performing "Transfer Assist Pressure Level adj."
• This adjustment is disable in the default. Change DIPSW3-2 Transfer Assist Timing to "Enable" to
conduct the adjustment.
(1) Procedure
143
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
7. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press [Set].
bizhub PRO 950
Note
• The following table shows the relation among pressure amount, pressure point, release point,
and limit step of the adjustment. If the adjustment value exceeds the limit steps, the transfer
assist sheet may contact and damage the photoconductor. (Note that the steps described below
are only used as a guide.)
144
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when the leading edge is lacking or too much in scanning.
C. Procedure
145
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
• Adjust the image leading edge timing of DF original scanning (the starting position for reading while in the
original scanning mode).
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when the leading edge is lacking or too much in scanning DF.
C. Procedure
146
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when the paper skew, crease, or jamming occurs in the DF registration roller sec-
tion.
C. Procedure
147
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
• Adjust the image mis-centering of the main scan direction on the printer.
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when the image mis-centering of the main scan direction occurs while in printing.
Note
• Be sure the printer paper feed cross adjustment have been adjusted.
C. Procedure
148
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when the image mis-centering of the main scan direction occurs while in scan-
ning.
Note
• Be sure "9.3.18 Printer Centering Adj. (Centering Adjustment)" has been adjusted.
C. Procedure
149
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
• Adjust the image mis-centering of the main scan direction when scanning from the DF.
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when the image mis-centering of the main scan direction occurs while in original
scanning from DF.
Note
• Be sure "9.3.18 Printer Centering Adj. (Centering Adjustment)" has been adjusted.
C. Procedure
Note
• "Small" represents paper which is smaller than 300 mm in the sub-scan direction.
• "Large" represents paper which is larger than 300 mm in the sub-scan direction.
5. Select paper according to the adjusted item. Set the "adjustment chart" on the DF and press the Start
button.
6. Fold the outputted paper in half in the main scan direction and check the amount of centering error.
Standard value: within 0 ± 2mm
7. When the value is not within the standard value, press [SERVICE].
8. "Scanner (ADF) Left Image"
Enter a value through the numeric keys and press [Set].
Setting range: -30 (image in front) to +30 (image in back) 1 step = 0.1mm
9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the standard value can be obtained.
150
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when the image distortion occurs in scanning.
C. Procedure
151
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
• Check the non-image area erase function and automatically adjust the sensitivity to detect the non-image
area.
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when installing the copier, moving its installation location, or when the non-image
area erase function does not work satisfactorily.
C. Preparation
• Open fully the DF.
• There should not be anything on the original glass.
• Clean the original glass.
D. Procedure
If any other message appears, refer to "B. Error message and Handling", and perform the Non image Area
Erase Check again.
152
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
Handling 1
When the non-image area erase function is not used very frequently, or when copy originals that have a dark
background are not copied very frequently in non-image area erase, the copier can be used in the current instal-
lation location. However, when copy originals that have a dark background are frequently copied, install the
copier in a location where less external light gets in (darker) than the present location, and check the non-image
area erase check mode again.
Handling 2
When the non-image area erase function is not used very frequently, the copier can be used in the current instal-
lation location. However, if the non-image area erase function is frequently used, install the copier in a location
where less external light gets in (darker) than the present location, and check the non-image area erase check
mode again. At this time, when there is a bright light source such as a fluorescent light installed directly above
the copier, reconsider the installation location, or take some measures to shield the light source and check the
mode again.
153
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
A. Function
• Adjust the sensitivity for ADF reading.
B. Usage
• Since the slit glass of the scanning section is coated with electrical conductive material, The way it refracts
light from the exposure lamp is different from that of the original glass. Thus, perform this adjustment when
replacing the slit glass.
C. Preparation
• Clean the slit glass.
• Make sure the white chart is not dirty. (Partial dirt can be ignored)
D. Procedure
Note
• Set the "white chart" in the A4-direction.
5. Press [Start].
The white chart is scanned, and density is automatically adjusted.
6. When an error message appears, turn OFF/ON the sub power switch (SW2) of the main body. Repeat
steps 1 to 5 until it is completed properly.
154
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when the original size detection does not work properly.
C. Procedure
155
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when a malfunction (JAM display does not disappear despite no paper JAM)
occurs in the reflective type sensors.
C. Preparation
• Clean each of the DF reflective sensors.
D. Procedure
156
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when the image skew occurs in the DF scanning mode.
Note
• This adjustment is reflected to the auto skew adjustment control in DF scanning mode.
C. Procedure
b
57gaf3c008na
7. When the value is not within the standard value, press [SERVICE].
8. "ADF Skew Offset Adjustment screen"
Enter a value through the numeric keys and press [Set].
Setting range: -60 (counterclockwise) to +60 (clockwise) 1 step = 0.05%
9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the standard value can be obtained.
10. Press [Return] to return to the "ADF adjustment mode menu screen."
157
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
• Adjust the sampling timing of the CCD output to adjust the density gap between backward and forward (in
the main scan direction) against the optical axis of lens.
B. Usage
• Because of the variations of parts accuracy of the CCD unit, the image density against the optical axis of
lens may differ between backward and forward (in the main scan direction).
Therefore, perform this adjustment when there is a density gap between backward and forward at the
center of the main scan direction on the copied paper after replacing the CCD unit.
C. Procedure
1. "Service mode menu screen"
Press [01 Machine Adjustment].
2. "Machine Adjustment menu screen"
Press [08 Quality Adjustment].
3. "Quality Adjustment menu screen"
Press [01 CCD Right-Left Quality].
4. "CCD Right-Left Quality Adj. screen"
Press [Next] or [Back] to select the item you adjust, and press [COPY].
The item changes as follows:
CD-Back o CD-Front
5. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper. Set the test chart to the original grass and press the start button.
6. Fold the output paper at the center of the main scan direction, and check that there is no density gap
between backward and forward.
7. If there is a density gap, press [Service Mode].
8. "CCD Right-Left Quality Adj. screen"
Enter a value through the numeric keys and press [Set].
Setting range: -16 to +16
9. Repeat the steps 4 to 8 until an appropriate value is obtained.
B. Usage
• The same adjustment table is changed since some parts of the machine adjustment can be changed by the
user. Therefore, conduct this adjustment when the adjustment values cannot be initialized because of the
erroneous operation by the user.
C. Procedure
1. "Service mode menu screen"
Press [01 Machine Adjustment].
2. "Machine Adjustment menu screen"
Press [09 Recall Standard Data].
3. "Recall standard data:Machine adjustment screen"
Press [Factory Initial Data] or the [Installation Initial Data].
Note
• Selecting [Factory Initial Data] recalls the factory initial data.
• Selecting [Installation Initial Data] recalls the adjustment values stored when code "91" of the I/
O check mode was conducted.
158
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when replacing the high voltage unit /1, /2 (HV /1, /2).
C. Preparation
• The photo conductor section must be set.
D. Procedure
Note
• When an error message appears during the adjustment, check to see if the error unit is properly
installed and cleaned. Conduct the adjustment again.
159
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
• Apply toner to the cleaning blade and drum to prevent the damage.
B. Usage
• Perform this adjustment when changing the cleaning blade.
Note
• Perform this only when changing the cleaning blade. Otherwise, the cleaning blade special parts
counter is reset, thus making it impossible to implement the auto blade change in the right timing.
• Apply setting powder to the cleaning blade and drum.
C. Procedure
160
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when replacing the drum, developer, and write unit.
C. Procedure
Note
• When the following error messages appear, check to see if the drum potential sensor (DPS) is
properly installed and cleaned. Conduct the adjustment again.
1) Error 1
In the 0V check of the DPS, voltage over 100V is detected 5 times or more.
2) Error 2
The drum potential after laser exposure is detected to be over 350V, and it is determined that
control patch detect signal is not outputted.
3) Error 3
Drum potential has been corrected 10 or more times, but it does not converge.
161
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
• Automatically adjust the maximum density that is suitable for the drum.
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when replacing the drum, developer, and write unit.
C. Procedure
Note
• When the following error messages appear, check to see if the IDC sensor board (IDCB) is prop-
erly installed and cleaned. Conduct the adjustment again.
1) Error 1
The IDC sensor (IDCS) on the IDCB dirt correction has been corrected 10 or more times, but it
does not converge.
2) Error 2
The auto maximum density adjustment is not completed, when the developing roller rotation
speed reaches the specified value.
3) Error 3
No signal is outputted from the IDCS. Control patch detect signal is not outputted.
162
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when replacing the drum, developer, and write unit.
C. Procedure
Note
• When the following error messages appear, check to see if the IDC sensor board (IDCB) is prop-
erly installed and cleaned. Conduct the adjustment again.
1) Error 1
The IDC sensor (IDCS) dirt correction on the IDCB has been conducted 10 or more times, but it
does not converge.
2) Error 2
The auto dot diameter adjustment completed with an abnormal value.
163
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when replacing the drum, developer, and write unit.
• Conduct this adjustment when the print density is not even.
C. Procedure
57gaf3c009na
7. When the value is not within the standard value, press [SERVICE].
8. "LD offset adjustment screen"
Press [460mm] for the laser you want to adjust (LD1 offset or LD2 offset). Enter a value through the
numeric keys and press [Set] and then the [COPY].
Setting range: -128 (lighter) to +127 (darker)
9. Select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and press the Start button to output a test pattern.
10. When the value is not within the standard value, press [SERVICE] to repeat steps 5 to 9 until the standard
value can be obtained.
11. Adjust the line speed 290mm likewise as well.
164
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when replacing the drum, developer, and write unit.
C. Procedure
Note
• When the following error messages appear, check to see if the IDC sensor board (IDCB) is prop-
erly installed and cleaned. Conduct the adjustment again.
1) Error 1
The IDC sensor (IDCS) dirt correction on the IDCB has been conducted 10 or more times, but it
does not converge.
2) Error 2
No signal is outputted from the IDCS. Control patch detect signal is not outputted.
3) Error 3
Regression error during the gamma curve calculation.
165
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
• Agitate the recycle toner that is back to the developer to prevent the overflow toner to the conveyance sec-
tion.
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when black spots (toner) appear on the print-out after removing/inserting the
photo conductor section.
C. Procedure
166
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
B. Usage
This setting is applied when you select [User] as the paper type.
By default, the following data are inputted.
• Fusing temperature for Japan: High quality paper of 62 to 71 g/m2
• Fusing temperature for the other countries: High quality paper of 72 to 80 g/m2
Note
• Input data according to instructions of KMBT field support section.
C. Procedure
167 1
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
• Reset the adjustment values of the process adjustment to the factory initial data or the installation initial
data.
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when the initialization cannot be done because of the various change by CE.
C. Procedure
Note
• Selecting [Factory Initial Data] recalls the factory initial data.
• Selecting [Installation Initial Data] recalls the adjustment values stored when code "91" of the I/
O check mode was conducted.
168
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
9.5 Counter
Note
• The PM count is different in the count condition depending on the setting of DIPSW8-6.
When set to "0": 1 count for a single side of each large paper exit, and 2 counts for a double side.
When set to "1": 2 counts for a single side of each large paper exit (the definition of large size
paper is set by DIPSW10-3 and 4), and 4 counts for a double side. For those other
than the large size, the count is same as when set to "0."
• The developer count and the sensitive drum count are made at all times 1 count for a single side
and 2 counts for a double side for a small size paper, 2 counts for a single count and 4 counts for a
double count for a large size paper.
A. Count reset
Display or reset the PM count, the developer count and the sensitive drum count.
Note
• Be sure to reset the PM count after implementing a periodic check (every 500,000 prints).
Otherwise, the periodic check alert message and icon on the user screen do not disappear.
• Be sure to reset the developer count after replacing a developer. Otherwise, gray background
image and toner scatter may occur. Also, the consumable icon on the user screen does not disap-
pear.
• Be sure to reset the sensitive drum count after replacing a drum. Otherwise, image gray back-
ground and toner scatter may occur. Also, the “Drum/Deve” icon on the user screen does not dis-
appear. Also, the consumable icon on the user screen does not disappear.
(1) Procedure
169
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
B. PM cycle setting
Configure settings of the PM count, developer count and sensitive drum count.
bizhub PRO 950
Note
• The PM cycle, developer cycle and drum cycle are already inputted in the initial settings. Usually,
do not change these settings.
(1) Procedure
170
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
9.5.2 Counter/Data
It is possible to confirm various data held in the machine.
*1 When setting DIPSW 30-1 from "0" to "1", these data can be confirmed.
A. Procedure
Note
• The [Count Clear] is shown in the individual data confirmation screen of the [JAM Count Individ-
ual Sec.] and the [SC Count Individual Sec.].
When pressing the [Count Clear], "Count reset confirmation screen" is shown, and when press-
ing the [Yes], the section data is reset. Pressing the [No] returns to "Individual data confirmation
screen" with the interval data not reset.
Reset these data when you visit the customer of the PM implementation etc. to confirm the jam
or SC occurrence count after it was visited last time.
171
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Note
• Maximum count: 99,999,999
• 1 count is made for paper of all types regardless of the paper size.
1 172
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
D. ADF counter
Confirm the number of originals fed in each DF mode.
Note
• Maximum count: 99,999,999
• No.1, 2 are not counted as No.3 to 8.
173
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
displayed.
Note
• The coverage data is a calculated value based on the colored area and the transfer paper area of
the image data. Therefore, it is different from the toner consumption when actually printed.
• Up to 30 latest coverage data are maintained with the older ones deleted in sequence.
NO. CSRC Print count Coverage NO. CSRC Print count Coverage
parameter (V0) data (%) parameter (V0) data (%)
1 00 Total (00.0 to 17 10 Print count 16 (00.0 to
2 01 Print count 1 99.9%) 18 11 Print count 17 99.9%)
3 02 Print count 2 19 12 Print count 18
4 03 Print count 3 20 13 Print count 19
5 04 Print count 4 21 14 Print count 20
6 05 Print count 5 22 15 Print count 21
7 06 Print count 6 23 16 Print count 22
8 07 Print count 7 24 17 Print count 23
9 08 Print count 8 25 18 Print count 24
10 09 Print count 9 26 19 Print count 25
11 0A Print count 10 27 1A Print count 26
12 0B Print count 11 28 1B Print count 27
13 0C Print count 12 29 1C Print count 28
14 0D Print count 13 30 1D Print count 29
15 0E Print count 14 31 1E Print count 30
16 0F Print count 15
174
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
Note
• The coverage data is a calculated value based on the colored area and the transfer paper area of
the image data. Therefore, it is different from the toner consumption when actually printed.
No. CSRC Coverage data (%) No. of print Paper size Print mode Date
parameter (V1)
01 00 00.0 to 99.9% Display of Copy/
02 01 No. printer
03 02
04 03
05 04
06 05
07 06
08 07
09 08
10 09
11 0A
12 0B
13 0C
14 0D
15 0E
175
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Note
• Maximum count: 999,999
• The jam code is a code displayed when DIPSW11-7 is set to 1.
1 176
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
177
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
(F1)
38 25 Cover sheet 1 count for 1-Sided exit, 2 counts for
39 26 Trimmer 2-Sided exit
40 27 Real size copy
41 28 Preset magnification E4
42 29 Preset magnification E3
43 2A Preset magnification E2
44 2B Preset magnification E1
45 2C Preset magnification R4
46 2D Preset magnification R3
47 2E Preset magnification R2
48 2F Preset magnification R1
49 30 Preset Zoom 1
50 31 Preset Zoom 2
51 32 Preset Zoom 3
52 33 Zoom
53 34 Vertical/Horizontal zoom
54 35 Maximum zoom
55 36 Minimum zoom
56 37 APS
57 38 AMS
58 39 Auto density
59 3A Preset density level 1
60 3B Preset density level 2
61 3C Interrupted copy
62 3D Auto image rotation cancellation
63 3E Sheet insertion
64 3F Chapter control
65 40 Combination
66 41 Booklet pagination copy
67 42 OHP interleave copy
68 43 OHP interleave blank
69 44 Insert Image
70 45 Book copy
71 46 Program job
72 47 Non-image area erase
73 48 Neg-/Positive reverse
74 49 Auto repeat
75 4A Manual repeat
76 4B Standard size repeat
77 4C Frame erasure
78 4D Fold erasure
79 4E Centering
178
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
103 66 Operation time in ADF mode Time while ADF is ON (in seconds)
104 67 Morning correction counter Counts 1 per image stabilization control (fix-
ing temperature is 50°C or lower)
105 68 Time during APS sensor On Time during which the APS sensor is ON.
(in seconds)
106 69 —
107 6A —
108 6B N of folding & stapling used jobs Number of JOB
109 6C —
110 6D N of ADF NF occurred Times of occurrence
111 6E N of ADF special error 1 occurred Number of wrong detection of original size
112 6F N of ADF special error 2 occurred Number of wrong detection of next original
information
179
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
(F1)
113 70 N of ADF special error 3 occurred Number of error in size for which mixed
size mode is not allowed
114 71 N of scanner scanned Counts 1 for pressing Start button in the
platen mode
115 72 N of electrode cleaned Number of executions
116 73 N of memory overflow Sum of No.124, 125, 126 plus HDD mem-
ory shortage
117 74 N of fixing alarm occurred Times of occurrence
118 75 N of no toner stop occurred
119 76 N of AGC retry Times of retry
120 77 —
121 78 N of mis-centering correct error Times of occurrence
122 79 N of ADF distortion adjust error
123 7A N of ADF distortion data error
124 7B Compression memory overflow Scanner compression/print compression
memory shortage
125 7C Page memory overflow (scan) Shortage in memory for receiving print data
126 7D Page memory overflow (print) Decompression page memory shortage
127 7E FNS alarm (Tray/trim) Times of occurrence
128 7F FNS alarm (staple)
129 80 —
130 81 N of ADF special error 4 occurred Ready timeout error
Note) Not for 950
131 82 Store for HDD (Sync. with Copying) Number of JOB (For copier HDD storing,
printer print & HDD storing, printer HDD
storing only, and JOB that adds HDD stor-
ing in wait/proof)
132 83 Store for HDD (Store Scan → HDD) Number of JOB
133 84 —
134 85 Store for FTP/SMB (HDD → FTP/SMB) Number of JOB
135 86 Recall from HDD (Recall HDD)
136 87 —
137 88 —
138 89 Wide paper count (A3W or 11 x 17W) 1 count for 1-Sided exit, 2 counts for 2-
139 8A Wide paper count (A4W or 81/2 x 11W) Sided exit
140 8B Wide paper count (A4SW or 81/2 x 11SW)
141 8C Wide paper count (A5W or 51/2 x 81/2W)
142 8D Wide paper count (Others)
143 8E Hole-Punch
144 8F Z-Folding
145 90 —
146 91 Mixplex (Simplex) 1 count for each paper exit in the single
side mode
180
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
181
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
(F1)
185 B8 Half Fold Job number Number of JOB
186 B9 Inside print Letter Fold Job number
187 BA Outside print Letter Fold Job number
188 BB Arbitrary stamp 1 count for 1-Sided exit, 2 counts for 2-
Sided exit
189 BC N of Scan to E-mail Number of JOB Scan To E-mail (scanner
mode)
190 BD N of Scan to HDD Number of JOB Scan To HDD (scanner
mode)
191 BE N of Scan to FTP Number of JOB Scan To FTP (scanner
mode)
192 BF N of Scan to SMB Number of JOB Scan To SMB (scanner
mode)
193 C0 PI Counter PI Counter
194 C1 N of Temperature cooling process Number of temperature cooling process in
sub power OFF
195 C2 Count of Suspended JOB Number of JOB moved to suspended JOB
196 C3 Count of Tab Paper Use Number of JOB exited tab paper
197 C4 Count of Needless Tab Paper Exit Number of JOB exited needless tab paper
198 C5 Multi Punch 1 count for 1-Sided exit, 2 counts for 2-
Sided exit
182
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
Note
• Maximum count: 99,999,999
• When the service mode DIPSW3-1 is 1 (Latched), C-35, 38, and 39 are not counted.
No. CSRC Item No. CSRC Item No. CSRC Item
parameter (SC code) parameter (SC code) parameter (SC code)
(E0) (E0) (E0)
001 00 0-1 036 23 3-4 071 46 11-22
002 01 0-2 037 24 3-5 072 47 11-25
003 02 0-4 038 25 3-6 073 48 11-26
004 03 0-5 039 26 3-7 074 49 11-31
005 04 0-10 040 27 3-8 075 4A 11-32
006 05 0-20 041 28 3-9 076 4B 11-33
007 06 0-21 042 29 3-10 077 4C 11-34
008 07 0-22 043 2A 3-11 078 4D 11-35
009 08 1-1 044 2B 4-1 079 4E 11-36
010 09 1-2 045 2C 4-2 080 4F 11-37
011 0A 1-3 046 2D 4-3 081 50 11-41
012 0B 1-4 047 2E 4-10 082 51 11-42
013 0C 1-5 048 2F 4-11 083 52 11-43
014 0D 2-10 049 30 4-12 084 53 11-44
015 0E 2-11 050 31 10-1 085 54 11-52
016 0F 2-12 051 32 10-2 086 55 11-53
017 10 2-13 052 33 10-12 087 56 11-54
018 11 2-20 053 34 10-47 088 57 11-55
019 12 2-21 054 35 10-91 089 58 11-57
020 13 2-22 055 36 10-92 090 59 11-58
021 14 2-23 056 37 11-1 091 5A 11-81
022 15 2-30 057 38 11-2 092 5B 13-46
023 16 2-31 058 39 11-3 093 5C 13-56
024 17 2-32 059 3A 11-4 094 5D 13-61
025 18 2-33 060 3B 11-5 095 5E 21-1
026 19 2-40 061 3C 11-6 096 5F 21-2
027 1A 2-41 062 3D 11-7 097 60 21-3
028 1B 2-42 063 3E 11-8 098 61 21-4
029 1C 2-43 064 3F 11-10 099 62 21-6
030 1D 2-51 065 40 11-11 100 63 21-10
031 1E 2-52 066 41 11-12 101 64 21-11
032 1F 2-53 067 42 11-13 102 65 22-1
033 20 3-1 068 43 11-14 103 66 22-2
034 21 3-2 069 44 11-15 104 67 22-3
035 22 3-3 070 45 11-21 105 68 22-4
183
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
184
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
185 1
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
A. Procedure
186
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
016 7B Toner collect box 14RT-970 When operating recycling cut, 1 count for
017 7C Recycling cut pump 14RT-210 each paper exit in the single side mode, 2
018 7D Accumulator 14RT-230 counts for double
019 7E Cleaning gear/A assy 56GA-556 1 count for each paper exit in the single
020 0F Fix. roller (U) 57GB5304 side mode, 2 counts in the double side
021 10 Fix. roller Unit (L) 57GA-528 mode.
187 1
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
parameter
(Z1)
023 12 Fixing claws lower 25AA5329 1 count for each paper exit in the single
024 13 Heat sleeve (Upper) 45405339 side mode, 2 counts in the double side
025 14 Upper roller bearing 45407504 mode.
1 188
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
189
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
parameter
(Z1)
086 51 8K/16K duplex feed counter When the paper size is 270mm to
278mm in width and 300g/m2 or less, 0
count for each paper exit in the single
side mode, 1 count for double.
No count for 92g/m2 to 300g/m2 when
the DIPSW27-6 is 1 (no pressure).
2 counts for double when the DIPSW15-0
is 1 (side1 pressure).
087 52 B4/B5 duplex feed counter When the paper size is 257mm to
269mm in width and 300g/m2 or less, 0
count for each paper exit in the single
side mode, 1 count for double.
No count for 92g/m2 to 300g/m2 when
the DIPSW27-6 is 1 (no pressure).
2 counts for double when the DIPSW15-0
is 1 (side1 pressure).
088 53 81/2 Duplex count When the paper size is 215mm to
256mm in width and 300g/m2 or less, 0
count for each paper exit in the single
side mode, 1 count for double.
No count for 92g/m2 to 300g/m2 when
the DIPSW27-6 is 1 (no pressure).
2 counts for double when the DIPSW15-0
is 1 (side1 pressure).
089 54 A4S/A5 duplex feed counter When the paper size is 210mm to
214mm in width and 300g/m2 or less, 0
count for each paper exit in the single
side mode, 1 count for double.
No count for 92g/m2 to 300g/m2 when
the DIPSW27-6 is 1 (no pressure).
2 counts for double when the DIPSW15-0
is 1 (side1 pressure).
090 55 8/81/8/81/4inch duplex feed When the paper size is 203mm to
209mm in width and 300g/m2 or less, 0
count for each paper exit in the single
side mode, 1 count for double.
No count for 92g/m2 to 300g/m2 when
the DIPSW27-6 is 1 (no pressure).
2 counts for double when the DIPSW15-0
is 1 (side1 pressure).
190
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
101 60 FNS gate solenoid 15JK-263 1 count for each paper exit in tri-folding
mode
102 61 PI sheet feed clutch/U 13QN8201 1 count for each PI/UP paper feed
103 62 PI feed roller unit/A 50BA-574
104 63 PI feed roller unit/B 13QN-446
105 64 PI rev rubber unit 13QN-443
106 65 PI torque limiter 13QN4073
191
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
parameter
(Z1)
107 66 PI sheet feed clutch/L 13QN8201 1 count for each PI/Lw paper feed
108 67 PI feed roller unit/A 50BA-574
109 68 PI feed roller unit/B 13QN-446
110 69 PI rev rubber unit 13QN-443
111 6A PI torque limiter 13QN4073
112 6B PI Registration clutch 13QN8201 1 count for each PI paper feed
113 6C Paper adjusting part 20AMJ026 1 count for each trimming of TU
114 6D ZU punch motor unit 12GQ-417 1 count for each punching of ZU
115 6E ZU punch unit 14KB5001
14JA5001
13BX5001
116 6F PK503 unit 15KJ-050 1 count for each punching of PK
117 70 PK504 unit 15KG-050
118 71 PK505 unit 15KA-050
15KB-050
119 72 ADF pickup roller 13GA4604 Original feed count in all modes.
120 73 ADF feed roller 15AS4605
121 74 ADF retard roller 13GA4606
122 75 ADF sub pick roller 13GA4601
123 76 ADF torque limiter 13GA-135
124 77 ADF SDF solenoid 13GA8252 Total original feed count in the single feed
mode.
125 78 ADF LSB solenoid 13GA8251 1 count for each set of the large size orig-
inal single side mode. *1
1 count for each sheet of the large size
original double side mode. *1
126 79 ADF press/release SD 13GA8251 1 count for each of the large size original
double side mode. *1
127 7A ADF SSB solenoid 13GA8251 1 count for each sheet of the small-size
original double side mode.
128 7F GP incline roller assy A0N9PA01 1 count for each paper exit in multi-punch
mode.
129 80 GP bypass assy A0N9PA02 1 count for each paper exit.
130 81 GP roller drive section A0N9PA03 1 count for each paper exit in multi-punch
mode.
131 82 GP incline belt (green) A0N9PA04 1 count for each paper exit in multi-punch
mode.
132 83 GP back-gauge mechanism A0N9PA05 1 count for each paper exit in multi-punch
mode.
*1 The large size original represents all originals in the mixed original mode and A3, B4, A4S, B5S, 11 x 17,
81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S, F4, 8K, 16KS.
1 192
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
Note
• Take 1 count for each print page of all paper exits with no discrimination made by paper size.
• When the print count is in excess of a limit value, an asterisk "*" is displayed to the right of the
limit value.
B. Procedure of reset
193
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
194
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
A. Procedure
195
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
B. Input list
bizhub PRO 950
Multi code
Symbol
H L
Code Name
1 196
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
Multi code
Symbol
Code
Name
197
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Multi code
Symbol
bizhub PRO 950
H L
Code
Name
198
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
DF Classification
Multi code
Symbol
Code
Name
1 PS2 Main tray upper limit sensor Upper limit Not at upper
limit
2 PS3 Main tray lower limit sensor Lower limit Not at lower
limit
3 PS4 FS entrance sensor No paper Paper
4 PS5 Stacker entrance sensor Paper No paper
5 PS6 Main tray paper exit sensor
6 PS7 Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor Other than Stand-by
the stand-by position
position
7 PS8 Alignment plate home sensor /Up Home Other than
8 PS9 Paper exit belt home sensor position home position
9 PS13 Stapler rotation home sensor (FS-611 only)
10 — —
11 PS12 Paper exit opening home sensor Other than the Closed
closed position position
12 PS14 Clincher rotation home sensor (FS-611 only) Home Other than
position home position
13 PS15 Counter reset sensor Reset position Other than
reset position
14 PS18 Shift roller home sensor Other than Home
home position position
15 PS20 Stacker empty sensor (FS-528) Paper No paper
Stacker empty sensor (FS-611)
16 PS35 Staple empty sensor /Rr (FS-528) Staple No staple
MS3 Staple empty switch /Rr (FS-611)
17 MS30 Stapler home sensor /Rr Other than Home
home position position
18 PS38 Stapler ready sensor /Rr (FS-528) Unready Ready
MS2 Cartridge switch /Rr (FS-611) No cartridge Cartridge
19 — — — —
20 — — — —
199
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Multi code
Symbol
bizhub PRO 950
H L
Code
Name
76 21 PS32 Clincher home sensor /Rr (FS-611 only) Other than Home
home position position
22 PS19 Sub tray full sensor Full Other than full
23 MS1 Front door interlock switch Door opened Door closed
24 PS37 Staple empty sensor /Fr (FS-528) No staple Staple
MS5 Staple empty switch /Fr (FS-611)
25 PS31 Stapler home sensor /Fr Other than Home
home position position
26 PS39 Stapler ready sensor /Fr (FS-528) Unready Ready
MS4 Cartridge switch /Fr (FS-611) No cartridge Cartridge
27 — — — —
28 — — — —
29 PS33 Clincher home sensor /Fr (FS-611 only) Other than Home
home position position
30 — — — —
31 — FS connection detection bit Connection Non-connection
32 PS22 Folding blade home sensor (FS-611 only) Home Other than
33 PS23 Saddle stitching stopper home sensor (FS-611 position home position
only)
34 PS24 Alignment home sensor /Lw (FS-611 only) Other than Home
home position position
35 PS25 Folding paper exit sensor (FS-611 only) Paper No paper
36 PS26 Folding passage sensor (FS-611 only)
37 PS29 Folding full sensor (FS-611 only) Other than full Full
38 PS1 Passage sensor No paper Paper
ZU FS ZU
39 — — — —
40 PS9 Exit sensor No paper Paper
41 PESB Paper edge sensor board (2)
42 PESB Paper edge sensor board (3)
43 PESB Paper edge sensor board (4)
44 — — — —
PI
200
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
PI Classification
Multi code
Symbol
Code
Name
201 1
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Multi code
Symbol
bizhub PRO 950
H L
Code
Name
87 PS804 Punch scraps box set sensor Set Other than set
88 PS805 Swing edge face detection 1 No paper Paper
89 PS805 Swing edge face detection 2
90 PS805 Swing edge face detection 3
91 PS805 Swing edge face detection 4
92 PS805 Swing edge face detection 5
93 PS803 Punch home sensor Home Other than
position home position
94 — PK connection detected Non-connection Connection
95 — — — —
77 0 PS112 Pusher home sensor Home Other than
TU
1 202
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
ADU Classification
Multi code
Symbol
Code
Name
203
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
A. Procedure
B. Output list
High voltage Classification
Multi code
Symbol
Code
Name Remarks
0 0 L4 Exposure lamp
1 0 M15 Toner bottle motor
2 — — —
3 — — —
4 — — —
5 — — —
6 — — —
7 — — —
8 — — —
9 — — —
10 — — —
15 1 — CSRC counter clear. Data collection When DIPSW
Data clear
204
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
Multi code
Symbol
205
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Multi code
Symbol
bizhub PRO 950
Code
Name Remarks
206
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
Multi code
Symbol
207 1
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Multi code
Symbol
bizhub PRO 950
Code
Name Remarks
208
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
FS Classification
Multi code
Symbol
209 1
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
FS Classification
Multi code
Symbol
bizhub PRO 950
Code
Name Remarks
41 — Punch brake
42 — Punch clutch
43 — Punch stepper motor punch operation
44 M7 Paper exit roller motor normal rotation
FS
1 210
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
TU Classification
Multi code
Symbol
press setting
69 M107 Pusher motor press release
70 M106 Holder motor upper limit movement
71 M106 Holder motor home position search
lower limit movement
72 M1, M6 Registration motor, conveyance motor
ZU
ON
73 M2 1st stopper motor home position
search
74 M3 2nd stopper motor home position
search
75 SD2 Gate solenoid /Up ON
76 SD1 Gate solenoid /Lw ON
77 CL1 Punch clutch ON
78 M801 Punch motor punch operation
PK
position)
89 M12 Gate motor stacker direction switching
90 M12 Gate motor straight direction switching
91 M21 Sub tray paper exit motor ON
211
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
FS Classification
Multi code
Symbol
bizhub PRO 950
Code
Name Remarks
(FS-611 only)
98 M5 Punch shift motor home position search
80 1 SD2 Reverse/exit solenoid
ADU
1 212
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
ADU Classification
Multi code
Symbol
213
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Multi code
Symbol
bizhub PRO 950
Code
Name Remarks
91 0 — Main body adjustment data NVRAM Perform after installation and adjustment
board storage (installation initial)
92 0 — NVRAM board data reset Cannot adjust in the field
— — — —
94 0 Adjustment data display
95 — — —
96 0 — Main body adjustment data NVRAM Cannot adjust in the field
board storage (factory default)
97 0 — Image memory (DRAM) capacity
check
98 0 — Image memory (DRAM) check
1 — Controller memory check
99 1 — HDD 1 total capacity
2 — HDD 1 remaining capacity
3 — HDD 1 bad sectors check and recovery
214
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
Note
• The execution of this mode allows the blade to be automatically replaced. So, when the first clean-
ing blade has been used before re-packaging, be sure to conduct the spring charge for the auto
blade replacement when reinstalling the machine.
(1) Procedure
1. Check the currently used cleaning blade to see if it is the 1st or 2nd one.
2. Enter the I/O check mode.
3. Enter "17" with the numeric button. Confirm that "17-00" is displayed in the message display area.
4. Open the front door /Rt.
Note
• When the front door /Rt is not opened, the blade motor (M14) will not rotate.
5. Press the Start button.
6. The blade motor (M14) rotates and the cleaning blade separates from the drum to move to the transporta-
tion lock position.
(1) Procedure
215
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
ing, maintenance, and moving of RC, conduct this operation after the unit is installed.
(1) Step
D. Main body adjustment data NVRAM board strage (installation initial data)
Adjustment data of the main body which are adjusted in the field are backed up to the NVRAM board (NRB),
when necessary, it can be recalled with "Installation Initial" of "Recall Standard Data" (Machine Adjust and Pro-
cess) in the service mode.
Note
• Since only one kind of data can be back upped, the data is overwritten when executed again.
(1) Procedure
216
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
(1) Procedure
Note
• The operation cannot be cancelled while in the bad sectors check and recovery. (The Stop button
and the [Return] are disabled.
• When the bad sectors check and recovery is conducted and an error code recurs, replace HDD1
with a new one.
217
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
A. Procedure
NOTE
• If you set DIPSW30-1 from "0" to "1", the parameter list and after are displayed.
• Do not use the parameter list and the memory dump list in the field because they are for devel-
opment.
4. Press the key for an item you want to output and press [COPY]
5. Press the Start button to output the selected list.
6. Press [SERVICE].
7. "List output mode menu screen"
To output other lists, repeat steps 4 to 7.
*1 Prints out the latest 30 items of the sending and receiving history of the mail remote notification system
and the CS Remote Care. The start time of communications, the time period of communications (modem
only), the communication modes, the results of communications, and the senders (mail only) are printed.
The communication modes and the results of communications are displayed in the numbers of 4 digit
number. For the meaning of them, refer to the following table.
218
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
The SMTP reply codes (200 to 554) prescribed in the RFC1846, 2554 and 2821 are displayed in this place of
***.
219
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Note
• Do not use any test pattern number not described in the service manual.
A. Procedure
220
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
[Check item]
• When density is set to 70 (halftone)
If there are white stripes, black stripes, determine whether the fault is with the scanner system or the pro-
cess system.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Developing unit, cleaning unit, charger unit, transfer/separation charger
unit, scanner mirrors, slit glass, original glass
• When density is set to 0 (white)
If the test pattern is gray background image, determine whether the fault is with the process.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Charger, high voltage contact
• When density is set to 255 (black)
If the density is light, determine whether the fault is with the process.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Write unit
* For information about setting the density, refer to "9.8.2 Test Pattern Density"
Note
• All print outputs in the user mode are outputted with 1-bit or 2-bit error diffusion. However,
since this pattern is output in 8-bit, an uneven density is apt to conspicuous. Therefore, when
checking an uneven density in halftones (other than 0 and 255 in the density setting), be sure to
use the test pattern No. 9.
Test patterns
When the density is set to 70 When the density is set to 0 When the density is set to 255
57gaf3c023na
221
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
bizhub PRO 950
[Check item]
• Check the pattern to see if the laser output of LD1/LD2 is uniform with the gradation continuously repro-
duced.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Write unit, LD offset adjustment
* For LD offset adjustment, refer to "9.4.13 LD Offset Adjustment (Drum Peculiarity Adj.)."
Test patterns
LD1 LD2
57gaf3c024na
222
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
[Check item]
• Check the pattern to see if the laser output of LD1/LD2 is uniform with the gradation continuously repro-
duced.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Write unit, LD offset adjustment
* For LD offset adjustment, refer to "9.4.13 LD Offset Adjustment (Drum Peculiarity Adj.)."
Test patterns
LD1 LD2
57gaf3c025na
223
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
bizhub PRO 950
[Check item]
• Check if there is any uneven density or transfer jitter.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Moisture absorption of paper, developing unit, charger unit, transfer/sepa-
ration charger unit.
Note
• The density of halftone changes according to the test pattern density adjustment.
• All print outputs in the user mode are outputted with 1-bit or 2-bit error diffusion. However,
since this pattern is output in 8-bit, an uneven density is apt to conspicuous, but less conspicu-
ous than the test pattern No. 1.
Test patterns
57gaf3c026na
224
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
[Check Items 1]
• Check the solid black pattern to see if there is uneven density found in the main scan and sub scan direc-
tions.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Charger unit, transfer/separation charger unit, developing unit, writing
dust-proof glass.
[Check Items 2]
• Check to see if there is any image repelling in the resolution pattern at the leading/trailing edge of the test
pattern in the sub scan direction.
[Recommended checkpoints]: transfer/separation charger unit
Test patterns
[1]
[2]
57gaf3c027na
225
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
bizhub PRO 950
[Check item]
Judge from this test pattern whether the scanner system or the printer system is abnormal.
Items that can be checked include main scan magnification, sub scan magnification, image skew, and leading
edge timing of the printer system. If the copy image is defective despite no abnormality being visible on the
test pattern, the scanner system is defective.
Test patterns
[1]
31mm 237mm
20mm
[1]
190mm
m
0m
28
205.7mm
28
0m
m
190mm
190mm 57gaf3c028na
226
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
Test patterns
[1]
1inch 9inch
1inch
[1]
190.5mm
m
0m
28
205.7mm
28
0m
m
190.5mm
190mm a0y5f3c015ca
227
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
A. Procedure
A. Procedure
228
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
Note
• DIPSW bits data are written into the NVRAM board (NRB) every time a change is made. Do not
change data hastily, for they cannot be automatically restored. Do not change any switch not
described in the service manual.
A. Procedure
229
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
• Be sure not to change bits with no particular reference made of the function.
1 230
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
231
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
232
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
233
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
1 234
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
235 1
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
1 236
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
237 1
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
1 238
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
239
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
240
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
Note
• Bold boxes show default settings.
*2 Print stop method after toner supply display Mode 1-3 1-2
Select the method to stop printing when the number
Stops after exit paper in 0 0
specified with DIPSW1-0/1 is reached.
the machine
Stops at a break between 0 1
print set
Stops at the end of the 1 0
current job
Does not stop 1 1
*3 Print number setting until printing is prohibited Mode 1-7 1-6 1-5
after PM is displayed
1,000 prints 0 0 0
Select the number of prints that stops printing after
2,000 prints 0 0 1
the value specified with the maintenance counter is
reached. 3,000 prints 0 1 0
4,000 prints 0 1 1
5,000 prints 1 0 0
1,000 prints 1 0 1
1,000 prints 1 1 0
1,000 prints 1 1 1
*4 All charge cleaning cycle (fusing temperature Mode 2-3 2-2 2-1
50°C or less when turning ON
Cleaning every time 0 0 0
Set the timing for the electrode cleaning, which is
At 5,000 prints 0 0 1
performed on the condition that the fusing tempera-
ture is below 50°C when the power is turned on. At 10,000 prints 0 1 0
At 15,000 prints 0 1 1
At 20,000 prints 1 0 0
At 25,000 prints 1 0 1
At 30,000 prints 1 1 0
No cleaning 1 1 1
241
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
At 150,000 prints 0 0
At 250,000 prints 0 1
At 300,000 prints 1 0
At 400,000 prints 1 1
Note
• Changing this switch to 1 in the original hav-
ing a typical blacking ratio results in the
image getting light colored.
*8 Image density selection (laser PWM) for copier Mode 5-3 5-2
Change the image writing laser PWM to make image
Standard (*190/170) 0 0
lighter.
Lighter (*1167/137) 0 1
(black). PWM 24 1 1
242
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
*10 Min. black band width in black band creation Mode 6-4 6-3
control
243
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Normal 0
between the normal operation (operated on both the
Side 2 only 1
front and the rear) and the operation only on the rear.
When paper with much paper dust is used and the
drum is damaged by paper dust adhering to the
drum claw, select the operation only on the rear.
*16 Image density selection (laser PWM) for printer Mode 8-1 8-0
Change the image writing laser PWM to make image
Standard (*190/170) 0 0
lighter.
Lighter (*167/137) 0 1
Lightest (*142/112) 1 0
Standard (*190/170) 1 1
* 0 (white) to 255 (black) represent density within
the image density range. Numbers represent
each image density at the line speed 460mm/s,
290mm/s from left.
*19 Fusing initial rotation control after printing small Mode 8-7
size
Disable 0
Change this setting to "1" when the thermal offset at
Enable 1
edges of the paper occurs after feeding the small-size
paper (216mm or less in width).
However, changing this setting to "1" within 4 min-
utes after the printing stop of the previous job makes
the fusing initial rotation time longer.
244
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
245
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
*23 Definition change of the large size paper in Mode 10-4 10-3
counter control
bizhub PRO 950
Refer to the following table about the default for each destination.
246
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
Note
• It does not press on the tab paper even
when this setting is changed to "1" (with
pressure).
247 1
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
*29 Non-image area erase mode judge level Mode 16-6 16-5
This setting should be changed if auto erase is car-
bizhub PRO 950
Standard 0 0
ried out incorrectly when "Non-image area erase
Correspond to dark origi- 0 1
mode" is used.
nal
Correspond to light inter- 1 0
ference
Not used 1 1
*31 Density selection at scanning tab paper Mode 17-6 17-5 17-4
Set the shading of the texture of index paper.
Brightness level 80 0 0 0
Brightness level 40 0 0 1
(Lightest)
Brightness level 60 0 1 0
Brightness level 100 0 1 1
Brightness level 120 1 0 0
Brightness level 160 1 0 1
Brightness level 200 1 1 0
Brightness level 255 1 1 1
(Darkest)
248
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
*33 Maximum black band width (when connecting Mode 19-7 19-6
RC)
20mm 0 0
Sets the maximum width of the black band in black
10mm 0 1
band creation control. This function is enable only
5mm 1 0
when RC is connected.
Follows the DIPSW 6-3 /4 1 1
settings
*34 Image scanning area with "Page margin" func- Mode 20-1
tion
Normal 0
Normal: Compare the original size and the transfer
Original priority 1
paper size, the smaller one is to be the image
area.
Original priority:Original size is to be the image area.
249
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
250
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
*42 Image density selection (toner control patch density) Mode 27-3 27-2
Changes the image density by setting the developing
Standard 0 0
bias for the toner control patch formed on the drum
Approx. 0.5% up 0 1
to determine the toner density.
Approx. 1.0% up 1 0
251
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
*43 Image shift when outputting the custom size Mode 28-4
print job
bizhub PRO 950
Paper standard 0
Image shift occurs depending on the paper size when
Paper size > Image: normal
sending the custom size image as the print job.
Paper size Image: Image shift
(The output is different from the thumbnail displayed
image). Image standard 1
Paper size > Image: normal
Paper size Image: normal
[Image]
ABCDEFGH
CDEFGH ABCDEF
CDEFGH ABCDEF
CDEFGH ABCDEF
57gaf3c030na
252
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
*44 EL2 light volume switchover at the trailing edge Mode 29-6 29-5 29-4
of paper
NOTE
• This mode is used when disposing the
machines. By executing this function, all data
stored in the HDD is deleted and the machine
becomes inoperable.
*48 TIFF direct print Paper size for APS (F4) Mode 42-2 42-1
8 x 13 0 0
8 1/2 x 13 0 1
8 1/4 x 13 1 0
8 1/8 x 13 1/4 1 1
253 1
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Resolution priority 0
printed by 600dpi resolution. For example, when
(Changed 600dpi)
200dpi resolution of A4 size TIFF data is printed by
Output size priority 1
"direct print",
In the case of 0 : The resolution of the TIFF data is
converted into 600dpi, it is
reduced and printed.
In the case of 1 : The TIFF data is not reduced and it
is printed correctly.
*50 Visual Counter Master counter value read-off Mode 46-1 46-0
intervals
Every 10 minutes 0 0
Every 1 minute 0 1
Not acquisition 1 0
Every 1 hour 1 1
254
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
NOTE
• When a number is less than 16 digits, be sure to use hyphen etc to fill up the blanks.
5. Press [OK] to register data.
Press [Cancel] to cancel the setting you entered.
Caution
• Never change the serial number of the main body. Otherwise, the fusing temperature abnormality
may occur.
A. Procedure
Note
• When the input data is incorrect, a notice screen appears. Press [OK] to close the screen and
input data again.
• The serial number of the main body cannot be changed.
255
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
When setting the DIPSW 16-4 to 1, the starting date of the total counter is not displayed.
A. Procedure
256
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
Note
• The [Image Control] that is displayed on the screen represents the firmware version of the overall
control board (OACB).
A. Procedure
257
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
9.11.1 Outline
The CS Remote Care is a system that manages the main body by sending and receiving various kinds of the
management data of the main body between the main body and the CS Remote Care center computer through
the phone line, E-mail or WebDAV server.
It enables the main body to call the center computer, and the center computer to inquire regularly the main body
for various data.
The data handled by the CS Remote Care can be classified into the 3 following groups.
a. Data that allow you to grasp the use conditions of the main body, such as the total count and the PM count.
b. Data that give us the general information of when and how often an abnormality occurred with the main body.
c. All sorts of adjustment data
Note
• When the security enhanced mode is set to ON, the use of the main body NIC is not allowed.
9.11.2 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care (When using the E-mail)
When the E-mail is used for the CS Remote Care system, make settings following the procedure as shown
below.
Note
• Select one of main body NIC or controller NIC to use. Pay attention to the mail account and the
DIPSW setting when selecting NIC to be used or using E-mail CS Remote Care and the mail
remote notification system at the same time. For particulars, refer to 9.11.5 List of combinations of
E-mail CS Remote Care and Mail remote notification system.
• Conduct the settings of the mail address and the mail server to be used for E-mail system of CS
Remote Care. The setting methods differ depending on the used NIC as follows.
- Main body NIC: Set from [E-Mail Initial setting] on Extension for maintenance of Web Utilities.
(Refer to P.270)
- Controller NIC: Set [Utility Menu] → [Administrator Setting] → [Network Setting] → [Controller NIC Setting]
→ [CSRC Setting]. (Refer to P.271)
• Conduct RAM clear for CS Remote Care first and then setup again when conducting the setup
again for the main body that has been done CS Remote Care setup once. (Refer to P.282) .
When using E-mail (Duplex) When using E-mail (Simplex (from machine to center))
Step Operation Step Operation
1 Device registration on CS Remote Care center 1 Device registration on CS Remote Care center
Conduct the preregistration of the device at Conduct the preregistration of the device at
the center side. (This step can be skipped the center side. (The preregistrartion of the
when sending the initial connection mail from device at the center side can be skipped.
the machine to the center. After the initial After the initial connection, in this case,
connection, in this case, register the device at register the device at the center side. )
the center side.)
For the device registration method at the cen-
For the device registration method at the cen- ter side, refer to the user's guide on CS
ter side, refer to the user's guide on CS Remote Care center application.
Remote Care center application.
2 I/O check mode data collection clear available 2 I/O check mode data collection clear available
Set [03-6] to "On (1)" from [Service mode] → Set [03-6] to "On (1)" from [Service mode] →
[System Setting] → [Software DIPSW Setting]. [System Setting] → [Software DIPSW Setting].
1 258
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
When using E-mail (Duplex) When using E-mail (Simplex (from machine to center))
259
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
When using E-mail (Duplex) When using E-mail (Simplex (from machine to center))
bizhub PRO 950
260
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
When using E-mail (Duplex) When using E-mail (Simplex (from machine to center))
Note
• When the CS Remote Care related window
is opened while receiving the initial connec-
tion mail from the center, the information
being created is destroyed and the CS
Remote Care setting screen is displayed.
• For the method of sending the initial con-
nection mail from the center side, refer to
the user's guide on CS Remote Care
center application.
• Mail transmission is possible only between
the center and the main body that the ini-
tial connection has been established.
• After when the initial registration is done,
the center mail address is displayed on
[Service mode] → [CS Remote Care] →
[CS Remote Care] → [Detail setting] →
[Basic setting] → [E-mail].
• When the transmission error occurs
against the center, check the error code
that appears. (Refer to P.283)
261 1
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
When using E-mail (Duplex) When using E-mail (Simplex (from machine to center))
bizhub PRO 950
Note
• When the transmission error occurs
against the center, check the error code
that appears. (Refer to P.283)
• In case the device pre-registration at the
center side is skipped, it turns to be the
temporary registered status by center
receiving the initial connection mail. The
initial connection is completed when the
device is registered at the center side.
1 262
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
9.11.3 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care (When using the phone line modem)
When a phone line modem is used for the CS Remote Care system, make settings following the procedure as
For the device registration method at the center side, refer to the user's guide on CS Remote Care
center application.
2 Modem connection
Turn off the power of the modem, connect the main body and the modem with a modem cable, and
the modem and the wall outlet with a modular cable.
• For the connection of a modular cable, refer to the instructions of the modem to be used.
3 I/O check mode data collection clear available
Set [03-6] to "On (1)" from [Service mode] → [System Setting] → [Software DIPSW Setting].
4 Initialization of CS Remote Care memory
1. Press [Service mode] → [Machine Condition] → [I/O Check Mode].
2. Enter "15" with numeric keys and confirm that "015-00" appears on the screen.
3. Press [ID] button.
4. Enter "98" with numeric keys and confirm that "015-98" appears on the screen.
5. Press [Start] button and confirm that the output check display switches to "FIN".
5 CS Remote Care function ON
Set [15-5] to "On (1)" from [Service mode] → [System Setting] → [Software DIPSW Setting].
6 CS Remote Care system selection
Press [Service mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [CS Remote Care] and then [Modem].
7 ID code entry
1. Press [ID Code].
2. Enter the 7-digit serviceman ID with numeric keys and press [ID code] again.
8 Press [Detail setting] to display the [Modem setting menu] screen.
9 Basic setting
1. Press [Basic setting] on the [Modem Setting Menu] screen.
2. Press [Center ID] and enter the center ID (5 digits).
• The serial number that is input from [Service mode] → [System Setting] → [Serial Number Setting]
appears on [Device ID].
3. Press [Center Telephone Number] to enter the center phone number.
• Use such as [P], [T], [W], [-] as needed.
4. Press [Machine Telephone Number] to enter the machine phone number.
• Use such as [P], [T], [W], [-] as needed.
5. Press [OK].
263 1
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Step Operation
10 Date and time setting for the CS Remote Care
1. Press [Date/Time Setting] on the [Modem setting menu] screen.
2. Press [Setting Time] to enter the year, month, day, and time.
• Press [Set] to move the cursor among the year/month/day/hour/minute fields.
3. Press [Time Zone] to enter the time zone.
• Press [ +/- ] to switch plus/minus of the time zone.
4. Press [OK].
11 Modem initialization AT command entry
Note
• Change the initialization AT command of the modem as needed. (Normally no need to
change.)
• For the detail of AT command, refer to the instruction of the modem used.
1. Press [AT command] on the [Modem setting menu] screen.
2. Press [Initial Command] to enter AT command.
3. Press [OK].
12 DIPSW setting for the CS Remote Care
Note
• Normally no need to change the setting, but conduct the setting as needed according to
the connection environment.
1. Press [Software DIPSW setting] on the [Modem Setting Menu] screen.
2. Specify DIP-SW as needed.
(Refer to P.272)
13 Turn on and off the sub power switch (SW2) of the main body.
14 First call execution
1. Press [Basic setting] on the [Modem Setting Menu] screen.
2. Press [First Call] to start the initial transmission.
• When the connection to the center completes successfully, the CS Remote Care setting screen
appears.
• When the transmission error occurs against the center, check the error code that appears.(Refer to
P.283)
• In case the device pre-registration at the center side is skipped, it turns to be the temporary regis-
tered status by center receiving the initial call. The initial connection is completed when the device
is registered at the center side.
1 264
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
9.11.4 Setup procedure of the CS Remote Care (When using the WebDAV server)
When the http communication is used for the CS Remote Care system, make settings following the procedure
When using http (Duplex) When using http (Simplex (from machine to center))
Step Operation Step Operation
1 Device registration on CS Remote Care center 1 Device registration on CS Remote Care center
Conduct the preregistration of the device at the center Conduct the preregistration of the device at the cen-
side. (The preregistrartion of the device at the center ter side. (The preregistrartion of the device at the cen-
side can be skipped. After the initial connection, in ter side can be skipped. After the initial connection,
this case, register the device at the center side.) in this case, register the device at the center side.)
For the device registration method at the cen- For the device registration method at the
ter side, refer to the user's guide on CS center side, refer to the user's guide on CS
Remote Care center application. Remote Care center application.
2 I/O check mode, data collection clear valid 2 I/O check mode, data collection clear valid
Set [03-6] to "On (1)" on [Service mode] → Set [03-6] to "On (1)" on [Service mode] →
[System setting] → [Software DIPSW Setting]. [System setting] → [Software DIPSW Setting].
3 Initialization of CS Remote Care memory 3 Initialization of CS Remote Care memory
1. Press [Service mode] → [Machine Condi- 1. Press [Service mode] → [Machine Condi-
tion] → [I/O Check Mode]. tion] → [I/O Check Mode].
2. Enter "15" with numeric keys and confirm 2. Enter "15" with numeric keys and confirm
that "015-00" appears on the screen. that "015-00" appears on the screen.
3. Press [ID] button. 3. Press [ID] button.
4. Enter "98" with numeric keys and confirm 4. Enter "98" with numeric keys and confirm
that "015-98" appears on the screen. that "015-98" appears on the screen.
5. Press Start button and confirm that the 5. Press Start button and confirm that the
output check display switches to "FIN". output check display switches to "FIN".
4 CS Remote Care function ON 4 CS Remote Care function ON
Set [15-5] to "On (1)" from [Service mode] → Set [15-5] to "On (1)" from [Service mode] →
[System Setting] → [Software DIPSW Setting]. [System Setting] → [Software DIPSW Setting].
5 Set machine NIC as the NIC to be used 5 Set machine NIC as the NIC to be used
Set [16-7] to "On (1)" from [Service mode] → Set [16-7] to "On (1)" from [Service mode] →
[System Setting] → [Software DIPSW Setting]. [System Setting] → [Software DIPSW Setting].
6 http communication setting (Arbitrary setting) 6 http communication setting (Arbitrary setting)
When the http proxy server is used, be sure to When the http proxy server is used, be sure to
set with [CSRC http setting] on the [Extension for set with [CSRC http setting] on the [Extension for
maintenance] of Web Utilities. (Refer to P.271) maintenance] of Web Utilities. (Refer to P.271)
7 CS Remote Care system selection 7 CS Remote Care system selection
Press [Service mode] → [CS Remote Care] → Press [Service mode] → [CS Remote Care] →
[CS Remote Care] and then [http]. [CS Remote Care] and then [http].
8 Communication method selection 8 Communication method selection
Press [Duplex] on [CS Remote Care setting] screen. Press [Simplex] on [CS Remote Care setting] screen.
265 1
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
When using http (Duplex) When using http (Simplex (from machine to center))
bizhub PRO 950
266
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
When using http (Duplex) When using http (Simplex (from machine to center))
267 1
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
When using http (Duplex) When using http (Simplex (from machine to center))
bizhub PRO 950
*1 The Heart Beat function is a function to give notice of the equipment being in operation by uploading the
Heart Beat file periodically to the registered Web server. In the Heart Beat file, information of the total counter
and the status is included.
*2 The Heart Beart function does not work when SW2 of the main body is not turned OFF/ON after the First
Call finishes.
1 268
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
9.11.5 List of combinations of E-mail CS Remote Care and Mail remote notification system
To change a combination of E-mail CS Remote Care and Mail remote notification system, refer to this table to
Case Mail remote E-mail CS Remote E-mail CS Remote Setting item Value Remark
notification sys- Care using the main Care using the con-
tem body NIC troller NIC
"Enable E-Mail notification" of Yes
the main body NIC Web Utilities
"Service mode - Software 1
1 { { — (*3)
DIPSW": 15-5 (*1)
"Service mode - Software 1
DIPSW": 16-7 (*2)
"Use the mail remote notification Yes
system" of the main body NIC
Web Utilities
2 { — { "Service mode - Software 1 (*4)
DIPSW": 15-5 (*1)
"Service mode - Software 0
DIPSW": 16-7 (*2)
"Use the mail remote notification Yes
system" of the main body NIC
Web Utilities
3 { — — "Service mode - Software 0 -
DIPSW": 15-5 (*1)
"Service mode - Software 0
DIPSW": 16-7 (*2)
"Use the mail remote notification Yes (*5)
system" of the main body NIC
Web Utilities
4 — { — "Service mode - Software 1 -
DIPSW": 15-5 (*1)
"Service mode - Software 1
DIPSW": 16-7 (*2)
"Use the mail remote notification No
system" of the main body NIC
Web Utilities
5 — — { "Service mode - Software 1 -
DIPSW": 15-5 (*1)
"Service mode - Software 0
DIPSW": 16-7 (*2)
* 1 Service mode - Software DIPSW: 15-5 (CS Remote Care function ON, 0=OFF, 1=ON)
* 2 Service mode - Software DIPSW: 16-7 (NIC selection of E-mail CS Remote Care, 0=controller NIC, 1=main
body NIC)
* 3 Mail remote notification system and CS Remote Care using the main body NIC share the same mail
account
* 4 Mail remote notification system and CS Remote Care using the controller NIC use separate mail accounts
* 5 Even when the mail remote notification system is not used, set it to "Yes" and conduct the mail initial set-
ting.
269
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
9.11.6 Mail initial setting (In the case of the main body NIC)
Set the main body mail address and the mail server using Web Utilities.
bizhub PRO 950
1. Press [E-Mail initial setting] on [Extension for maintenance] of Web Utilities. Refer to P.67 for Web Utilities.
2. Conduct the following settings.
• Time difference: Enter the time zone.
• Sending mail (SMTP) server: Set the IP address of the SMTP server.
• SMTP port number: Set the port number of the SMTP server.
• Sending mail (SMTP) server Time out: Specify the timeout period.
• Interval between fetching mails: Set the interval for checking the new-arrivals.
• Receiving mail server: Set the IP address of the receiving mail server.
• Kind of mail spool: Set the type of the receive mail server (POP3/IMAP).
• POP3 (IMAP) port number: Set the port number of the receive mail server.
• User name on the server: Set the account name.
• Password: Set the account password.
• E-Mail Address of this copy machine: Set the E-mail address for machine.
• Enable POP (IMAP) before SMTP: Make a setting to decide whether the POP (IMAP) before SMTP Auth. is
used.
• Enable SMTP Authentication: Set whether to use SMTP Auth. or not. Set the User name and the pass-
word when using it.
3. Press [Apply].
4. Press [Sending and Receiving test] to make a transmission/reception test.
270
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
1. Press [CSRC http setting] on [Extension for maintenance] of Web Utilities. Refer to P.67 for Web Utilities.
2. Conduct the following settings.
• Enable Proxy Server: Select the check box when using the proxy server.
• Proxy Server Address: Set the IP address of the proxy server.
• Proxy Server Port: Set the port number of the proxy server.
• Web server URL: Set the URL of the Web server.
• Time out (seconds): Set the time-out period.
• Enable Authentication: Select the check box when conducting the authentification.
• User Name: Set the user name of the authentification.
• Password: Set the password of the authentification.
3. Press [Apply].
4. Press [Sending and Receiving test] to make a transmission/reception test.
271
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Note
• Software SW bits data are written into the NVRAM board (NRB) every time a change is made. In
case you changed bit data by accident, be sure to restore the previous state.
A. Input procedure
Note
• About functions of each switch, refer to “B. List of software SW for CS Remote Care.”
272
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
273
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
No. Bit 0 1
6 0 Modem redial times *5 *5 0
1 *5 *5 1
2 *5 *5 0
3 *5 *5 1
4 *5 *5 0
5 *5 *5 0
6 *5 *5 0
7 — — — 0
7 0 Redial for response time out Do not redial Redial 1
1 to 7 — — — 0
8 0 Retransmission interval on E-Mail delivery error *6 *6 0
1 *6 *6 1
2 *6 *6 1
3 *6 *6 0
4 to 7 — — — 0
9 0 Retransmission times on E-Mail delivery error *7 *7 0
1 *7 *7 1
2 *7 *7 0
3 *7 *7 1
4 *7 *7 0
5 *7 *7 0
6 *7 *7 0
7 — — — 0
10 0 Time zone setting *8 *8 0
1 *8 *8 0
2 *8 *8 0
3 *8 *8 0
4 *8 *8 0
5 *8 *8 0
6 *8 *8 0
7 *8 *8 0
11 0 Timer 1 *9 *9 0
1 RING reception → CONNECT reception *9 *9 0
2 *9 *9 0
3 *9 *9 0
4 *9 *9 0
5 *9 *9 1
6 *9 *9 0
7 *9 *9 0
274
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
275
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
No. Bit 0 1
17 0 Call JAM date (main body) *14 *14 1
1 Valid copy quantity *14 *14 0
2 Call ADF JAM date *15 *15 1
3 Valid original feed quantity *15 *15 0
4 Call JAM date *16 *16 1
5 MCBJ setting *16 *16 0
6 Call ADF JAM date *17 *17 1
7 MOBJ setting *17 *17 0
18 0 Attention display Do not call Call 1
1 to 7 — — — 0
19 0 Reservation — — 0
1 E-mail/http communication mode Duplex Simplex 0
2 to 7 Reservation - - 0
20 0 http Heart Beat function ON OFF 0
1 http Heart Beat Fix send OFF ON 1
2 to 7 Reservation — — 0
21 to 40 0 to 7 Reservation — — 0
276
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
277
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
3 2 1 0
0 minute 0 0 0 0
10 minutes 0 0 0 1
20 minutes 0 0 1 0
30 minutes 0 0 1 1
40 minutes 0 1 0 0
50 minutes 0 1 0 1
60 minutes 0 1 1 0
70 minutes 0 1 1 1
80 minutes 1 0 0 0
90 minutes 1 0 0 1
100 minutes 1 0 1 0
110 minutes 1 0 1 1
120 minutes 1 1 0 0
278
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
*11 Timer 4 (Line connection → Start request tele- Mode DIPSW No.14
gram delivery)
*12 Timer 5 (Wait time for other side's response) Mode DIPSW No.15
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 to 29 sec 0000 0000 to 0001 1101
30 sec 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
31 to 255 sec 0001 1111 to 1111 1111
*14 Call JAM date (main body) Valid copy quantity Mode DIPSW No.17
1 0
3000 copies 0 0
6000 copies 0 1
9000 copies 1 0
12000 copies 1 1
*15 Call ADF JAM date Valid original feed quantity Mode DIPSW No.17
3 2
600 sheets 0 0
1200 sheets 0 1
1800 sheets 1 0
2400 sheets 1 1
279
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
*17 Call ADF JAM date MOBJ setting Mode DIPSW No.17
bizhub PRO 950
7 6
100 0 0
200 0 1
400 1 0
600 1 1
280
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
* During the maintenance, the start button blinks until the completion of the maintenance.
281
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
1. Press [Utility/Counter].
2. "Utility Menu screen"
Press [06 Administrator Setting].
3. "Administrator Setting menu screen"
Press [06 System Connection].
4. "System Connection menu screen"
Press [User Call].
5. "User Call screen"
Press [Start].
If the setup is not completed, or if other call is made, the [Start] is grayed out, disabling to make a call.
About how to call the center and send various data of the main body on the specified date and time, refer to the
CS Remote Care center's manual.
282
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
283
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
9.11.16 Troubleshooting
Check the followings when the main body neither receives the initial connection mail nor returns a response.
1) The center ID or the machine ID are not set in the main body.
2) The center ID or the machine ID are different (A machine ID error is not returned at the initial connection).
3) CS Remote Care function is disabled, or the phone line is selected in the CS Remote Care function selection.
4) Communication between the main body and the mail server is not proper (Check this with a transmission
test).
284
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
9.12 ISW
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when the staple position in the sub scan direction of center folding is not within
the standard value.
Note
• Be sure "9.13.2 Half hold stopper adjustment (FS-611)" has been adjusted.
C. Procedure
15sjf3c100na
6. When the value is not within the standard value, press [SERVICE].
7. "Fold & Staple stopper adj. screen"
Enter a value through the numeric keys and press [Set].
Setting range: -128 (lower) to +127 (upper) 1 step = 0.1mm
8. Repeat steps 3 to 7 until the standard value can be obtained.
285
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
• Adjust the folding position while in the center folding and saddle stitching.
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when the folding position of center folding and saddle stitching is not within the
standard value.
C. Procedure
15sjf3c101na
6. When the value is not within the standard value, press [SERVICE].
7. "Fold stopper adjustment screen"
Enter a value through the numeric keys and press [Set].
Setting range: -128 to +127 1 step = 0.1mm
• In the case of the misalignment given in the step 5, enter a set value to the negative side.
8. Repeat steps 3 to 7 until the standard value can be obtained.
B. Usage
• This adjustment should be performed when the cover sheet tray size cannot be detected properly.
C. Procedure
286
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
B. Usage
• When the paper trimming amount is too large or tool small, adjust the trimming amount.
C. Procedure
Note
• Reducing the trimming amount less than
15smf3c003na
2mm may cause a trimming error.
6. When the value is not within the standard value, press [SERVICE].
7. "Trimming stopper adj. screen"
Enter a value of the trimming amount through the numeric keys and press [Set].
Setting range: -128 (reducing) to +127 (increasing) 1 step = 0.1mm
8. Repeat steps 3 to 7 until the standard value can be obtained.
287
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
• Adjust the punch position of the punch kit (PK) in the main scan direction.
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when the punch position in the main scan direction of the punch kit (PK) is not
within the standard value.
C. Procedure
[2]
15knf3c002nb
7. When the value is not within the standard value, press [SERVICE].
8. "Punch kit Vert. pos. adj. screen"
Enter a value through the numeric keys and press [Set].
Setting range: -50 (in front) to +50 (in back) 1 step = 0.1mm
9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the standard value can be obtained.
288
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when the punch position in the sub scan direction of the punch kit (PK) is not
within the standard value.
C. Procedure
15knf3c001nb
7. When the value is not within the standard value, press [SERVICE].
8. "Punch kit Horiz. pos. adj. screen"
Enter a value through the numeric keys and press [Set].
Setting range: -50 (shorter) to +50 (longer) 1 step = 0.1mm
9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the standard value can be obtained.
289
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
• Adjust the punch hole position in the sub scan direction while in the ZU.
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when the punch position in the main scan direction of ZU is not within the stand-
ard value.
C. Procedure
[2]
15kvf3c002nb
7. When the value is not within the standard value, press [SERVICE].
8. "Punch unit Vert. pos. adj. screen"
Enter a value through the numeric keys and press [Set].
Setting range: -50 (in back) to +50 (in front) 1 step = 0.1mm
9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the standard value can be obtained.
290
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when the punch position in the sub scan direction of ZU is not within the standard
value.
C. Procedure
15kvf3c001nb
7. When the value is not within the standard value, press [SERVICE].
8. "Punch unit Horiz. pos. adjustment screen"
Enter a value through the numeric keys and press [Set].
Setting range: -50 (longer) to +50 (shorter) 1 step = 0.1mm
9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the standard value can be obtained.
291
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when the punch skew, paper creases, or a jam at the punch registration section
occurs.
C. Procedure
292
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when the folding position of Z-folding is not within the standard value.
Note
• When adjusting both the 1st fold and the 2nd fold, be sure to start with the 1st fold.
• The position of the 1st fold is based on the leading edge of paper and the position of the 2nd fold
is based on the position of the 1st fold. So, the dimension "b" in the step 7 varies when either posi-
tion of the 1st fold and the 2nd fold is changed.
C. Procedure
7. When the value is not within the standard value, press [SERVICE].
8. "1st fold position adj. screen" or "2nd fold position adj. screen"
Enter a value through the numeric keys and press [Set].
Setting range: -128 to +127 1 step = 0.1mm
• The dimension [1] in the step 7 gets smaller when the set value is moved to the positive side in the 1st
folding adjustment and gets larger when moved to the negative side. In the same manner, the dimension
[2] get smaller when moved to the positive side in the 2nd folding adjustment and get larger when moved
to the negative side.
9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the standard value can be obtained.
293
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when the 1st folding position of the tri-folding is not within the standard value.
Note
• The 2nd folding position (dimension "b") is mechanically adjusted. (Refer to "Mechanical adjust-
ment” in FS-611 Field service.)
C. Procedure
c
a
b 15sjf3c102na
6. When the value is not within the standard value, press [SERVICE].
7. "Tri-Fold adjustment screen"
Enter a value through the numeric keys and press [Set].
Setting range: -128 (larger) to +127 (smaller) 1 step = 0.1mm
8. Repeat steps 4 to 7 until the standard value can be obtained.
294
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when the staple intervals of the flat stapling are not within the standard value.
C. Procedure
a 15sjf3c103na
6. When the value is not within the standard value, press [SERVICE].
7. "2 positions staple pitch adjustment screen"
Enter a value through the numeric keys and press [Set].
Setting range:128 to 160 1 step = 1mm
8. Repeat steps 3 to 7 until the standard value can be obtained.
295
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when the staple intervals of the saddle stitching are not within the standard value.
C. Procedure
a
15sjf3c104na
6. When the value is not within the standard value, press [SERVICE].
7. "Fold and Staple staple pitch adjustment screen"
Enter a value through the numeric keys and press [Set].
Setting range:120 to 160 1 step = 1mm
8. Repeat steps 3 to 7 until the standard value can be obtained.
296
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
B. Usage
• Conduct this setting for the common security administration.
C. Procedure
B. Usage
• Conduct this setting for the common security administration.
Note
• The selection of the [Administrator Password Setting] is limited only when the [Administrator
Authentication] is set to "Authentication On."
• Do not use anything easily guessed by others such as your name, birthday.
C. Procedure
297
9. SERVICE MODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
9.15 CE Setting
bizhub PRO 950
Important
• The use of the [Security Strengthen Mode] in the [Administrator Setting] in the utility mode is lim-
ited only when the [CE Authentication Setting] is set to "Authentication On."
9.15.1 CE authentication
A. Function
• To enhance security of the service mode, configure the setting so that a password is required to enter the
service mode.
B. Usage
• Conduct this setting for the maintenance security administration.
C. Procedure
B. Usage
• Conduct this setting for the maintenance security administration.
Note
• The selection of the [CE Password Setting] is limited only when the [CE Authentication] is set to
"Authentication On."
• Do not use anything easily guessed by others such as your name, birthday.
• CE should not inform other people of the password.
C. Procedure
298
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 9. SERVICE MODE
A. Procedure
Note
• Be sure to output the settings information list before formatting parameters.
• [Font]
Formats the font data storage area.
Conduct this when deleting downloaded external font data.
Note
• By formatting, all downloaded external fonts are deleted.
• [Spool]
Formats the spool area.
There is no need to format this area alone.
299
10. ADJUSTMENT FOR POD Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
300
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 10. ADJUSTMENT FOR POD
[1] Front
[2] Back
[1]
[2] 1050fs3350c
301
10. ADJUSTMENT FOR POD Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Remove the cover of the photo conductor section. Mark current position of the positioning plate [1] as a refer-
ence point with something like a pencil. Loosen 2 screws [2] to move the positioning plate [1] side to side and move
the shaft [3] that positions the write unit, thus adjusting the distortion and making the lines in the main scan direction
parallel on both sides.
When distortion is found as shown in the drawing below, move the positioning plate to the right.
Reference
• Attaching the long screw M4 to the shaft [3] makes the adjustments easy.
[3] [2]
[1]
[4]
[5]
a0y5f3c013ca
Note
• With the [Printer Centering Adjustment] in the service mode, there is no adjustment for individ-
ual tray. In case you need to adjust individual tray, select the user mode, selecting [MACHINE] -
[Paper Setting] - [Tray Setting]. Then, select [Change] - [Both Sides Adj.] to make adjustment
with the Image Shift function.
302
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 10. ADJUSTMENT FOR POD
[1] Front
A
[2] Back
[1]
[2] 1050fs3043c
[1] Front
[2] Back
[1]
[2]
1050fs3044d
303
10. ADJUSTMENT FOR POD Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
At the user mode, select the tray you want to adjust from [MACHINE] - [Paper Setting] - [Tray Setting].
Then, select [Change] - [Both Sides Adj.] to make adjustment. Use the Image Shift function to align the
centering of the back side on the figure A to the front side.
Note
• With the [Printer Centering Adjustment] in the service mode, there is no adjustment for individ-
ual tray.
• Since a test pattern cannot be output in the user mode, output an image from a PC so you can
confirm the image centering or use [Test Pattern Output Mode] in Service mode.
• The [Tray Setting] you set in step 5 is an individual adjustment, in which the updated settings are
not applied to the registered paper type. Thus, to change the registered paper type, select the
paper name key you want to adjust in [MACHINE] - [Paper Setting] - [Register Type/Weight].
Make the adjustment with the Image Shift function of [Both Sides Adj.].
[1] Front
A
[2] Back
[1]
[2] 1050fs3045c
304
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 10. ADJUSTMENT FOR POD
[1] Front
A
[2] Back
[1]
[2] 1050fs3046c
[1] Front
A
[2] Back
[1]
[2] 1050fs3047c
305
10. ADJUSTMENT FOR POD Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Remove the original stopper plate /Rr, and mark the current position of the adjustment plate [1] with
something like a pencil. Loosen the screw [2] to move the adjustment plate [1] up and down, thus adjust-
ing the mounting position of the original stopper plate /Rr.
[1] [2]
[1]
[2] 1050fs3048c
306
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 10. ADJUSTMENT FOR POD
[1] Front
A
[2] Back
[1]
[2] 1050fs3049c
[1] Front
A
[2] Back
[1]
[2] 1050fs3050c
307
10. ADJUSTMENT FOR POD Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
With the ADF paper skew adjustment in the mechanical adjustment, adjust the skew on the front and
back side.
[1] Front
[2] Back
[1]
[2] 1050fs3051d
6. Perform steps 3 and 4 to adjust the misalignments of timing and centering caused by the ADF paper skew
adjustment.
308
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 10. ADJUSTMENT FOR POD
10.2.4 The front and back registration by user (by paper brand)
Even when conducting the front and back registration in 10.2.1 to 10.2.3, adjustments may be required
Note
• Check to see if the front and back registrations in 10.2.1 to 10.2.3 are completed.
A. Procedure
3. Press the name key of paper you want to change, or press [Next] to register paper newly.
309
10. ADJUSTMENT FOR POD Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
4. Enter the type of paper, the name of paper, the weight, the color paper and the punch hole. For the type of
bizhub PRO 950
5. Press [Both Sides Adj.], and adjust the front and back registration.
310
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 10. ADJUSTMENT FOR POD
10.2.5 The front and back registration by user (for fine adjustments)
Even when conducting the adjustments for brand of paper as described in 10.2.4, an adjustment may be
Note
• Check to see if the front and back registrations in 10.2.1 to 10.2.4 are completed.
311
10. ADJUSTMENT FOR POD Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
3. Press the tray key you want to adjust, and then press [Change setting].
bizhub PRO 950
312
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 10. ADJUSTMENT FOR POD
313
10. ADJUSTMENT FOR POD Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
When using carbonless paper (thin paper), take the following measures.
Reference
• The carbonless paper adheres to the conveyance belt under suction while it is conveyed by the belt. This
makes the paper reading edge to be flipped up when it comes to the fusing section, and the reading edge
is rubbed against the fusing entrance guide causing soiled on the printed side.
Note
• When feeding carbonless paper, take the following countermeasures.
a) When printing on carbonless middle sheets, 50mm width of the sheet leading edge reacts by
the pressure and changes in color. If this cannot be allowed, use middle sheets 60 mm longer in
main scan direction, and 20 mm longer in sub scan direction to trim off the discolored portion.
b) Set carbonless paper in SEF position (the narrower side of paper comes to the paper feed roller side).
c) Set the paper so that the paper curls convexly in the conveyance section.
d) Allowable curl amount is less than 3 mm.
e) Only [Simplex mode] is acceptable for carbonless paper.
A. Preparation
1. Refer to " 23.1 Relationship between the optimum value and the control of each of setting items by paper
brand (U.S.A. paper) (for fusing hard roller) " and conduct the setting that is suitable for paper.
B. Procedure
1. Pull out the ADU main body. (Refer to Theory of Operation of the main body P.214 )
2. Turn over the conveyance belt [1] so that the suction holes [2] can be seen.
314
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 10. ADJUSTMENT FOR POD
315
10. ADJUSTMENT FOR POD Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
A. Procedure
1. With the image density selection of the density setting in the utility mode, set Darker [+1].
2. In the test pattern output mode, output the test pattern No.11 to check image density.
3. When image density is insufficient, set the image density selection "approx. 0.5% up" in the DIPSW27-2/
3.
4. With the DIPSW23-2/3/4 toner density of developer, set "approx. 0.5% down" or "approx. 1.0% down" to
prevent from image background and toner spillage.
5. Output 500 prints of test pattern No.11 in the test pattern output mode.
Note
• The settings in steps 3 and 4 change the toner density of developer. Thus, image density does
not change without making prints.
6. Confirm image density.
7. When image density is insufficient, set the image density selection "approx. 1.0% up" in DIPSW27-2/3.
8. With DIPSW23-2/3/4 toner density of developer, set "approx. 1.5% down."
9. Output 500 prints of the test pattern No.11 in the test pattern output mode.
10. Confirm image density.
316
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 10. ADJUSTMENT FOR POD
A. Procedure
1. With the image density selection of the density setting in the utility mode, set Lighter [-1].
2. Output test pattern No.11 in the test pattern output mode to confirm image density.
3. When image density is insufficient, repeat steps 1 and 2 until "-5."
4. When image density is insufficient, set as "lighter" in the DIPSW5-2/3.
5. Output test pattern No.11 in the test pattern output mode to confirm image density.
6. When image density is insufficient, set as "lightest" in the DIPSW5-2/3.
7. Output test pattern No.11 in the test pattern output mode to confirm image density.
317
10. ADJUSTMENT FOR POD Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
For the user setting method for paper which is commonly used in the POD market, refer to "23. PAPER SET-
TING", by paper brand.
This document shows the optimum set values for paper brands tested by KMBT.
However, it does not assure the same image quality and paper feed ability as the paper specified by KMBT. Only
the basic performance under usual environment (temperature and humidity) has been tested and confirmed.
Information on other brand of paper will be also provided when the test is finished, by updating the document.
318
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment to adjust the misalignment of the center of the printed image and the paper from
the mis-centering tray.
C. Procedure
1. Disable (data=1) the Software DIPSW12-3 "Printer
mis-centering correction." (Refer to P.229)
2. Output the test pattern (No.16) and check the
mis-centering of the image without automatic cor-
rection.
3. Pull out the paper feed tray. (Refer to Theory of
Operation of the main body P.306, P.310.)
4. If any paper remaining, remove it.
5. If the paper guide [1] is at the small size position,
stretch the guide.
6. Loosen 2 screws [2].
7. Move the paper guide [1]. According to the mis-
centering checked in step 2, adjust the center
[1] position using the marking line [3].
8. Tighten 2 screws [2].
[2]
[3]
57gaf3c010na
a0y5f3c014ca
319
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
• Increase or decrease the separation pressure in feeding paper from the trays 1, 2, and 3 and prevent the no
feed and the double feed.
B. Usage
• Perform the adjustment when the no feed (paper is conveyed to the paper feed roller section but stops
there) or the double feed occurs at the paper feed.
Note
• Affected by the paper type and the operating environment (the no feed is likely in the low temper-
ature environment and the double feed is likely in the high temperature environment).
• Excess adjustment may reverse the symptom.
C. Procedure
1. Pull out the paper feed tray. (Refer to Theory of
Operation of the main body P.306, P.310.)
2. Change the installation position [1] of the spring.
Note
• The separation pressure gets stronger when
sliding it in the direction of [3] and gets
weaker when sliding it in the direction of [2].
Weak: Improves double feed jams.
Strong: Improves no feed jams.
Reference
• The spring pressure changes approx. 10%
each time the position is slid 1 scale in either
direction.
320
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when no feed occurs even with the separation pressure adjustment of the tray.
C. Procedure
1. Pull out the paper feed tray. (Refer to Theory of
Operation of the main body P.306, P.310.)
2. Place the paper feed assist plate [3] on the paper
[1]
feed assist plate holder [2] of the pick-up roller
assembly [1] and fasten it with the 2 screws [4].
Note
[4] • Up to 6 paper feed assist plates (P/N:
[3] [2] 56UA4070) can be installed. When installing
up to 3 plates, use M3 x 6mm screws and
when installing 4 to 6 plates, use M3 x 8mm
screws.
321
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
• Get back the lift trays of tray 1, 2, 3 to the horizontal position if the trays are inclined.
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when the paper feed jam often occurs or when the lift wire is replaced.
C. Procedure
1. Pull out the paper feed tray. (Refer to Theory of
Operation of the main body P.306, P.310.)
2. If any paper remaining, remove it.
3. In order to remove the tray with the lift tray
brought up, put the rubber eraser [2] under the
up/down drive connecting lever [1].
[2]
[1]
57gaf3c013na
4. With the tray set, check the lift tray to see if it has
[3] [3] completed the up operation by listening to the
operating sound of the paper lift motor, and then
pull out the tray again.
5. Remove the tray. (Refer to Theory of Operation of
the main body P.306, P.310.)
6. While holding the pulley mounting bracket [1] by
[4] [4]
hand, loosen the screw [2] and, with the marking
[3] used as a guide, make the lift plate [4] horizon-
tal.
7. Tighten up the screw [2].
Note
• After completion of adjustments, be sure to
take off the rubber eraser set under the up/
down drive connecting lever.
[1]
322
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when all printed images have inclines.
C. Procedure
1. Pull out the duplex section.
2. Open the jam release cover [1] and remove the
screw [2].
[2]
3. Loosen 1 screw [3] and 3 screws [4].
[4]
[1] 4. Move the registration section [5] in the direction of
the arrow [6] based on the screw [3].
5. Tighten 1 screw [3] and 3 screws [4].
6. Make test copy and check the paper skew.
7. In case it is not improved, repeat steps 1 to 6.
[5]
[6]
[3]
[4]
a0y5f3c001ca
323
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
• Adjust the incline of the image printed from the trays 1, 2, and 3.
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when the inclines of the paper and the other trays are different even with the reg-
istration section incline adjustment. All paper, however, is adjusted at the registration section so the effect is
a little.
C. Procedure
1. Output test pattern (No.16) continuously and
check the incline.
2. Pull out the paper feed tray. (Refer to Theory of
Operation of the main body P.306, P.310.)
3. Remove the tray cover and then remove the
paper lift unit. (Refer to Theory of Operation of the
main body P.196.)
Note
• When conducting the adjustment of the tray
3, the paper lift unit is not required to be
[2]
removed.
324
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
B. Usage
• Perform the adjustment when the no feed (paper is conveyed to the paper feed roller section but stops
there) or the double feed occurs at the paper feed.
Note
• Affected by the paper type and the operating environment (the no feed is likely in the low temper-
ature environment and the double feed is likely in the high temperature environment).
• Excess adjustment may reverse the symptom.
C. Procedure
1. Remove the bypass tray. (Refer to Theory of
Operation of the main body P.201.)
2. Change the installation position [1] of the spring.
Note
• The separation pressure gets stronger when
the spring is changed to the position indi-
cated by [2] and gets weaker when changed
to the position indicated by [3].
[2] [3] Weak: Improves double feed jams.
Strong: Improves no feed jams.
Reference
• The spring pressure changes approx. 15%
each time the installation position is changed
1 scale in either direction.
325
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
• Change the upper position of the lift tray, prevent no feed and the paper edge folding, and feed the paper
with a large amount of curl.
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when no feed or the paper edge folding occurs and when feeding paper with a
large amount of curl.
Note
• Since this adjustment affects the pick-up release amount, be sure to adjust the pick-up release
amount after completion of the adjustment. (Refer to P.329)
C. Procedure
1. Pull out the paper feed tray. (Refer to Theory of
Operation of the main body P.306, P.310.)
2. If any paper remaining, remove it.
3. In order to remove the tray with the lift tray
brought up, put the rubber eraser [2] under the
up/down drive connecting lever [1].
[2]
[1]
57gaf3c019na
326
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
4. With the tray set, check the lift tray to see if it has
[1]
Note
• Fix the upper limit sensor placing plate [4]
horizontally.
Adjustment standard
• Lifting the upper limit sensor position lowers
the height of the pick-up roller [8]. (The differ-
[6]
ence of elevation [3] between the feed roller
[8] [9] [9] and the pick-up roller [8] becomes larger.)
• Lowering the upper limit sensor position lifts
the height of the pick-up roller [8]. (The differ-
ence of elevation [3] between the feed roller
[9] and the pick-up roller [8] becomes
[3] smaller.)
• In case a no feed occurred, lower the upper
limit sensor.
• In case a double feed occurred, lift the upper
57gaf3c020na limit sensor.
• When the edge of paper is folded, bring up
the upper limit sensor position.
• When paper curls up, bring down the upper
limit sensor position.
11. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
327
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Note
• Setting the tray with the pick-up roller failed
bizhub PRO 950
328
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when adjusting the feeding height (upper limit) of the trays 1, 2, and 3.
C. Procedure
1. Remove the tray.
2. If any paper remaining, remove it.
3. In order to remove the tray with the lift tray
brought up, put the rubber eraser [2] under the
up/down drive connecting lever [1].
[2]
[1]
57gaf3c021na
329
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
4. With the tray set, check the lift tray to see if it has
[2]
bizhub PRO 950
Note
• Before loosening the screw [4], be sure to
make a note of the position of the pick-up
solenoid [1] with a marking line [5].
[4] [5]
57gaf3c022na
8. With the moving section pulled, adjust the posi-
tion of the pick-up solenoid [1] so that the clear-
ance A between the pick-up roller [2] and the lift
tray [3] is equal to the standard value.
9. Tighten up the screw [4] to fix the pick-up sole-
noid [1].
Note
• After completion of adjustments, be sure to
take off the rubber eraser set under the up/
down drive connecting lever.
330
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
11.2 DF-616
A. Procedure
1. Make a copy in the single sided original - single
sided original mode, and check the original skew
[3] pattern (pattern A [4] or pattern B [5]) of the image
[3] on the copy paper [2] to the copy paper feed
direction [1].
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[5] 15saf3c009na
331
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
a0y5f3c002ca
332
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
A. Procedure
1. Close the DF.
2. Loosen the nuts [1], one each provided on both
sides.
3. Open the DF.
4. Rotate the adjusting screw [2] to adjust the spring
pressure of the hinge.
Tighten (clockwise): Spring pressure decreased.
Loosen (counterclockwise): Spring pressure
increased.
5. Close the DF.
6. Tighten securely the nuts [1], one each provided
[1] on both sides.
[2] a0y5f3c003ca
333
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
A. Procedure
1. Close the DF.
[1]
2. Check to see if each of 2 stopper pieces [1] on the
DF side gets in touch with the dent [2] in the origi-
nal stopper plate /Lt on the main body side.
[2] a10tt3c035ca
[2] [1]
3. When each of the stopper pieces does not get in
touch with the dent in the original stopper plate /Lt
at the same time, make adjustments by turning
the adjusting screw A [1].
Note
• For the adjustment of the DF height, be sure
to make adjustments by turning the adjusting
screw A [1] as a rule. When a satisfactory
a0y5f3c004ca
adjustment cannot be made with the adjust-
ing screw A [1], make adjustments turning the
adjusting screws A [1] and B [2] alternately.
334
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
11.2.4 Adjustment to prevent false detection by the original count sensor (PS310), original size sen-
sors /Rt (PS302) and /Lt (PS303)
A. Procedure
1. Raise the original feed tray [1].
[2] [3]
2. Remove 3 screws [2] and then remove the original
feed tray cover /Lw [3].
[1] 15saf3c005na
Note
• Be careful not to spread the claw [1] too wide.
Otherwise, it may break off.
[5] [2]
335
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Reference
• When tilting the sensor from directly above up
to 10º forward or backward:
Install the sensor holder to the attaching hole
[8] with the projection [3] placed on the side
opposite to the triangular mark (r) [6]. In this
way, the sensor can be tilted to 10º forward.
And installing the sensor holder to the attach-
ing hole [7] with the projection [3] placed on
[4] [2][8] the triangular mark (r) [6] side allows the sen-
sor to be tilted 10º backwards. In either case,
install the sensor on the side [5] with no pro-
jection [3].
• When installing the sensor turned directly
upward:
With the projection [3] put on the triangular
mark (U) [6] side, install the sensor holder [1]
to the attaching hole [8]. Install the sensor on
the side [4] provided with the projection [3].
[3] [5] 15saf3c007na
Note
• Be sure to check to see if the sensor [3] is
securely held by the claw [5].
• Be careful that the sensor face [1] does not
get damaged, and also be careful not soil it
with grimy hands.
336
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
11.3 LU-407/408
A. Purpose
• Increase or decrease the separation pressure in feeding paper and prevent the no feed and the double
feed.
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when no feed or the double feed often occurs in feeding paper.
Note
• Adjusting the pressure excessively may result in an adverse effect. So, be careful not to make an
excessive adjustment.
• A no feed or double feed condition may be affected by the type of paper used and the operating
environment (a no feed condition is apt to occur in a low temperature environment, and a double
feed condition seems to occur in a high temperature environment.) So, be sure to take note of
these environmental conditions when adjusting the separation pressure.
C. Procedure
1. Remove LU from the main body.
[1] 2. Change the position to which the hook [1] of the
spring is attached. The separation pressure can
be set in 5 steps. Attaching the hook of the spring
to one of the positions arranged in the direction of
[2] increases pressure, and attaching it to one of
the position arranged in the direction of [3]
decreases pressure.
Decrease: This improves a double feed jam.
Increase: This improves a no feed jam.
[2] [3]
Reference: Each time one step in the position is
changed, the pressure of the spring changes
about 10%.
3. Reinstall LU to the main body.
Note
• After the installation, make test copy and
check that no feed jam and double feed jam
does not occur.
15ssf3c001na
337
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
A. Purpose
• Increase the pressure in feeding paper from LU to prevent the no feed.
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when no feed occurs even with the separation pressure adjustment of LU
Note
• Adjusting the feed roller pressure changes the pick-up release amount. So after completion of
adjustment, be sure to check the pick-up release amount.
• Be sure to purchase the paper feed assist plate (P/N: 13FG4062*) separately since it is supplemen-
tal part.
C. Procedure
1. Open the upper door [1].
[1] [2]
2. Release the hook [3] of the spring [2] from the
paper feed guide plate [4].
[3]
[4] a0y5f3c005ca
Note
• When a no feed condition recurs, increase the
number of paper feed assist plates. When a
double feed condition occurs, decrease the
number of plates.
• Up to six paper feed assist plates can be set.
338
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
B. Usage
• Conduct this adjustment when the paper feed jam often occurs or when the lift wire is replaced.
339
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
C. Procedure
(1) Adjustments for LU-407
bizhub PRO 950
Note
[2] [2] [1]
• After the installation, make test copy and
check that no feed jam and double feed jam
does not occur.
[6] [5]
15ssf3c002na
340
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
Note
• After the installation, make test copy and
check that no feed jam and double feed jam
does not occur.
[1] [6]
341
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
A. Purpose
• Adjust when the mis-centering between the center of the printed image and the paper occurs on the print
from LU.
B. Usage
• Adjust the skew between the center of the printed image and the paper.
C. Procedure
1. Disable for change the software DIPSW 12-3
[3] [5] "Printer centering adjustment" (data = 1). (Refer to
P.229)
2. Make a print of the test pattern No. 16 and check
the amount of centering with no adjustment
made.
3. Set about 100 sheets of paper in LU (the amount
[4] [6] that does not result in the deformation of the
guide plate).
4. Close the upper door. And after checking from the
[9] operating sound of the paper lift motor that the
paper lift plate has gone up fully, turn OFF the
[8]
main power switch (SW1) and the sub power
switch (SW2) of the main body.
5. Remove the right cover. (Refer to Theory of Oper-
ation of the LU-407/408 P.32.)
6. Open the front door and loosen the screw [2] of
[7] the paper width adjustment section [1].
7. Open the upper door and loosen 2 screws [4] of
LU-407 LU-408 the guide plate /Fr [3] and 2 screws [6] of the
[2] [2] guide plate /Rr [5].
8. Loosen 2 screws [8] of the center positioning
bracket [7].
9. Using the marking-off lines [9] as a guide, slide the
center positioning bracket [7] and tighten up the
screw [8].
10. Press the guide plates /Fr [3] and /Rr [5] against
[1] [1] the paper, tighten up screws [2], [4] and [6], 5 in all.
a0y5f3c006ca
Note
• When pressing the guide plate against the
paper, be careful not to apply too much force.
Otherwise, the paper feed can be negatively
affected, thus resulting in a jam.
Note
• After completion of installation, be sure to
make a print and check to see if the amount
of centering is inside the specified value.
• After checking that it is inside the specified
value, be sure to enable the software
DIPSW12-3 (data = 0).
342
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
A. Preparations in advance
1. Make the continuous print of the test pattern (No. 16) to check the skew.
2. Depending on the inclination of a skew, conduct either of the following adjustment B and C.
Skew in the same inclination for the entire LU: Adjustment procedure B
Skew at random: Adjustment procedure C
B. Adjustment procedure taken when there is a skew found with all of the paper supplied from the
LU.
1. Open the front door.
2. Loosen 2 screws [1].
3. Using the marking-off lines [2] as a guide, adjust
the position of the positioning bracket [3].
Note
• Be sure to move the positioning bracket [3] in
parallel so that it comes to the same position
as the marking-off limes [2] in front and rear.
[2] 15ssf3c004na
343
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
[3] [5]
that does not result in the deformation of the
guide plate).
2. Turn ON the main power switch (SW1) and the
sub power switch (SW2) of the main body. And
after checking from the operating sound of the
[4] [6] paper lift motor that the paper lift plate has gone
up fully, turn OFF both of the switches.
3. Open the front door and loosen the screw [2] of
the paper width adjustment section [1].
4. Open the upper door and loosen 2 screws [4] of
the guide plate /Fr [3] and 2 screws [6] of the
guide plate /Rr [5].
5. Press the guide plates /Fr [3] and /Rr [5] against
the paper, tighten up screws [2], [4] and [6], 5 in
all.
LU-407 LU-408
[2] [2] Note
• The size indication of the guide plate is given
so that it becomes 2 mm larger than the
standard size indication. This clearance of 2
mm may cause a skew depending on the type
of paper.
• When pressing the guide plate against the
[1] [1]
paper, be careful not to apply too much force.
a0y5f3c007ca
Otherwise, the paper feed can be negatively
affected, thus resulting in a jam.
344
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
Note
• Adjusting the paper feed height (upper limit) changes the pick-up release amount. So, be sure to
conduct the pick-up release amount adjustment after this adjustment. (Refer to P.346)
A. Procedure
1. Turn ON the main power switch (SW1) and the
[3] [4]
sub power switch (SW2) of the main body. And
after checking from the operating sound of the
paper lift motor that the paper lift plate has gone
up fully, turn OFF both of the switches.
2. Remove the paper feed roller unit. (Refer to The-
ory of Operation of the LU-407/408 P.19.)
3. Record a mark [3] for the height of the sensor
mounting plate [2] of the upper limit sensor
(PS109) [1].
4. Remove 2 screws [4], and attach them to the
screw holes [5] provided outside. Then tighten
them tentatively.
5. Adjust the sensor mounting plate [2] vertically
while keeping it in a horizontal position, and
[2] [1] [5]
tighten up the screw [4].
Note
• Be sure to install the sensor mounting plate
[2] so that it is in a horizontal position.
• Move downward the sensor mounting plate
[2] to increase the paper feed height, and
move upward the sensor mounting plate [2] to
decrease the paper feed height.
• When there occurs a no feed condition and a
convex-curled paper is fed, move downward
the sensor mounting plate [2] to increase the
15ssf3c006na paper feed height.
• When there occurs a double feed condition
with the edge of fed paper folded and a con-
cave-curled paper is fed, move upward the
sensor mounting plate [2] to decrease the
paper feed height.
345
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Conduct this adjustment when there occurs a no feed jam repeatedly and when the paper feed height (upper
limit) adjustment is made.
A. Procedure
1. Turn ON the main power switch (SW1) and the
[3] [1]
sub power switch (SW2) of the main body. And
after checking from the operating sound of the
paper lift motor that the paper lift plate has gone
up fully, turn OFF both of the switches.
2. Remove the upper door [1]. (Refer to Theory of
Operation of the LU-407/408 P.32.)
3. Remove 6 screws [2] and then remove the paper
feed cover [3].
[2] 15ssf3c007na
346
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
Note
After completion of installation, be sure to make
a print and check to see if a no feed jam or dou-
ble feed jam does not occur.
[7] [6]
15ssf3c008na
347
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
11.4 FS-528/611
bizhub PRO 950
Conduct this adjustment when the paper gets jammed in the bypass gate.
A. Procedure
1. Open the front door.
2. Pull out the stacker unit [1].
3. Remove 2 screws [2] from the rail stopper, and
then pull out the stacker unit further.
[2]
Note
• Be sure to place a support [3] under the
stacker unit to prevent FS from falling down.
• The illustration given left shows FS-611 as an
example.
[1]
[2]
[3] 15sjf3c001na
[2]
15sjf3c002na
348
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
a0y5f3c008ca
[3] a0y5f3c009ca
349
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
[1] 15sjf3c005na
[1] [2]
15sff3c002na
350
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
[3]
m)
(m
21
A
19
[2]
15sff3c003na
15sff3c004na
351
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Conduct this adjustment when the shift amount of the paper exited to the main tray is not within a standard
value (30 mm).
A. Procedure
1. Remove the following parts.
• Remove the upper cover /1 (Refer to Theory
of Operation of the FS-528/611 P.96.)
• Upper cover /2 (Refer to Theory of Operation
of the FS-528/611 P.97.)
2. Turn ON the main body and drive the shift roller
motor (M2) via the service mode.
[4] [3] [5] [4] 3. Turn OFF the main body.
4. Both in the home position and the shift position,
check to see if the edge of the actuator [5] of the
slide gear [4] is in the notch [3] of the slide stay [2]
of the shift unit [1].
When the edge of the actuator is in the notch of
the slide stay, perform the following adjustment.
15sjf3c008na
352
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
A. Procedure
1. Remove the following parts.
• Remove the upper cover /1 (Refer to Theory
[1]
of Operation of the FS-528/611 P.96.) or
optional PI (if installed)
• Upper cover /2 (Refer to Theory of Operation
A=6.5 0.5mm of the FS-528/611 P.97.)
• Rear cover (Refer to Theory of Operation of
[2] the FS-528/611 P.98.)
2. Turn ON the main body and turn ON the paper
exit opening solenoid (SD4) via the service mode.
3. Turn OFF the main body.
4. Check to see if the clearance between the plunger
[3] [2] of the solenoid and the stopper [3] of the
15sjf3c009na
mounting plate is within a standard value when
SD4 [1] is ON.
Standard value: A = 6.5 ± 0.5 mm
When the value is not within the standard value,
perform the following adjustment.
[2]
[3] 15sjf3c010na
353
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
[4]
[1] [5] 7. Reinstall the solenoid and the mounting plate [1],
and then install the solenoid mounting plate at the
position where the paper exit guide [2] contacts
[4]
with the stopper (rubber) [4] of the paper exit
[3] guide stay [3] with 2 screws [5].
[2] Note
• There should be more than 1 mm of step
between the paper exit guide [2] and the
paper guide stay [3].
354
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
A. Procedure
(1) Position adjustment for FS-528
1. Open the front door, and then pull out the stacker
unit.
2. Remove 2 screws from the rail stopper, and then
pull out the stacker unit further. (Refer to P.348)
Note
• Be sure to place a support under the stacker
unit to prevent FS from falling down.
• The illustration given left shows FS-528 as an
example.
[3] [1] 3. Move the paper exit belt [1] and set the paper exit
arm [2] to the punch mark [3] position.
[2]
a0y5f3c012ca
355
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
[2]
15sff3c007na
356
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
[2]
15sff3c008na
357
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
unit.
[3]
2. Rotate the belt detection gear to align the edge of
the actuator [2] of the belt detection gear [1] with
the notch [3] of the panel /Rr.
[2]
[1]
15sjf3c013na
Note
• Be sure to place a support under the stacker
unit to prevent FS from falling down.
15sjf3c014na
358
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
15sjf3c015nb
359
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Conduct this adjustment when there is misalignment in the flat-stapled paper bundle.
A. Procedure
(1) Position adjustment for FS-528
1. With the power to the main body turned on, enter
[1]
the I/O check code 76-07 in the I/O check mode
of the service mode and check to see if "H" is
shown in the display column "IN."
Note
• When "L" is shown in "IN," be sure to open
the front door and pull out the stacker unit
before turning off the power to the main body,
and then conduct Step 2.
• The illustration given left shows FS-528 as an
example.
Note
• Be sure to place a support under the stacker
unit to prevent FS from falling down.
360
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
Note
• Be sure to loosen the 2 screws [1] fully in
advance so that the actuator [3] of the align-
ment plate home sensor is not displaced as
when the alignment plate /UpRr [2] for posi-
tion adjustment is moved.
361
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
[2] [1]
A=336.5 +0
-0.5 mm (inside to inside)
B=337 +0
-0.5 mm (inside to inside)
[2]
[1]
15sff3e012na
362
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
[2] 15sff3c013na
Note
• When "L" is shown in "IN," be sure to open
the front door and pull out the stacker unit
before turning off the power to the main body,
and then conduct Step 2.
Note
• Be sure to place a support under the stacker
unit to prevent FS from falling down.
363
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
[1] 15sjf3c017nb
[2]
[1] [3]
15sjf3c018na
364
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
11.4.6 Adjusting the mounting position of the alignment plate /Lw (FS-611)
A. Procedure
1. Check to see if "(2) Position adjustment for FS-
611" in "11.4.5 Adjusting the mounting position of
the alignment plate /Up" has been completed.
2. Turn ON the main body and drive the saddle
stitching stopper motor (M18) via the service
mode.
3. Enter the input check code 76-34 in the I/O check
mode of the service mode and check to see if "L"
is shown in the display column "IN" (home posi-
tion of the alignment plate /Lw).
4. Turn OFF the main body.
5. Open the front door, and then pull out the stacker
unit.
6. Remove 2 screws from the rail stopper, and then
pull out the stacker unit further. (Refer to P.348)
Note
• Be sure to place a support under the stacker
unit to prevent FS from falling down.
0
A=340.6 1.5 mm
15sjf3c020nb
365
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Note
bizhub PRO 950
[2]
[1]
[1]
15sjf3c022na
366
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
Note
• Be sure not to move the stapler unit in the horizontal direction by hand. Otherwise, it may cause
the belt and gear tooth skipping.
A. Procedure
(1) Position adjustment for FS-528
1. Conduct the 2-staple mode (flat stapling) and
A=10 3mm
check to see if the staple position is within the
standard value.
Standard value: A = 10 ± 3mm
(In the flat-stapling, the edge of the paper and the
line connecting 2 staples [1] should be in parallel.)
Conduct the following adjustment when the value
is not within the standard value or when they are
not in parallel.
[1] 15sff3c014na
367
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
2. Open the front door, and then pull out the stacker
[3] [4]
bizhub PRO 950
unit.
3. Remove 2 screws from the rail stopper, and then
pull out the stacker unit further. (Refer to P.348)
Note
• Be sure to place a support under the stacker
unit to prevent FS from falling down.
[3] [4]
4. Remove screws [1], 1 each, and then remove the
assist stopper cover/Fr and /Rr.
Note
• Adjustments should be made so that all of the
four stoppers are of the same height.
[2] [5]
368
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
[1] 15sjf3c023na
369
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Note
• Be sure to place a support under the stacker
unit to prevent FS from falling down.
[2]
[4] 15sjf3c024na
370
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
A. Procedure
Note
• Be sure not to move the stapler unit in the horizontal direction by hand. Otherwise, it may cause
the belt and gear tooth skipping.
15sjf3c025na
Note
• Be sure to place a support under the stacker
unit to prevent FS from falling down.
[2]
5. Remove the stapler unit cover. (Refer to Theory of
Operation of the FS-528/611 P.77.)
6. Loosen 3 screws [2] on the alignment plate /Lw
[1].
[3]
7. With the marking [3] used as a guide, adjust the
alignment plate /Lw to the front side in the case of
[4], and also, to the rear side in the case of [5].
8. Tighten the 3 screws, and then perform the sta-
[4] [5] pling operation and check to see if the saddle
stitching position is within the standard value.
15sjf3c026na
371
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Note
• Be sure not to move the stapler unit in the horizontal direction by hand. Otherwise, it may cause
the belt and gear tooth skipping.
A. Procedure
1. Perform the stapling operation and check to see if
[1] there is one of the following clinching problems.
• There is the bucking [1] of the staple.
• The floating of the staple [2] is more than the
L
[3] L=0.7mm
the conditions is met.
15sjf3c027na
2. With the power source of the main body turned
ON, specify A4 and the 2-staple mode (flat sta-
pling), and then turn OFF the power source.
3. Open the front door, and then pull out the stacker
unit.
4. Remove 2 screws from the rail stopper, and then
pull out the stacker unit further. (Refer to P.348)
Note
• Be sure to place a support under the stacker
unit to prevent FS from falling down.
372
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
[1]
15sjf3c029na
373
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Note
• Be sure to rotate the gears of the staplers
carefully because the pins of the stapler posi-
[1] [3] tioning jigs may be clogged if they are
inserted forcedly.
[4]
[2] 15sjf3c030na
374
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
Note
• Be sure not to move the stapler unit in the
horizontal direction by hand. Otherwise, it
may cause the belt and gear tooth skipping.
• Never loosen the screw [1] of the folding
stopper. It is prohibited to be removed.
• For ease of understand, the position of the
folding stopper is shown lower than the
actual position in the illustration.
[1]
15sjf3c031na
A. Procedure
1. Perform the folding operation on A3 paper and
check to see if the misalignment L is within the
standard value.
Standard value: L = 1 mm or less
L
When the misalignment is not within the standard
value, perform the following adjustment.
15sjf3c032na
375
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
2. Open the front door, and then pull out the stacker
bizhub PRO 950
unit.
3. Remove 2 screws from the rail stopper, and then
pull out the stacker unit further. (Refer to P.348)
Note
• Be sure to place a support under the stacker
unit to prevent FS from falling down.
376
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
A. Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover. (Refer to Theory of Opera-
[1]
tion of the FS-528/611 P.98.)
A
[3] B 2. Open the front door.
3. Remove the stacker unit cover.
C
4. Change the mounting position of the each 2 pres-
sure springs [3] at both the front [1] and the rear
[2].
The folding pressure is:
A: weak B: normal C: strong
C
Note
B
• Hook the 4 pressure springs [3] on the hook
A
holes of the same mark.
C C
B B
A A
377
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Conduct this adjustment when the 1st folding position or the 2nd folding position is not within the standard
value.
A. Procedure
1. Check to see if "11.4.10 Folding stopper tilt
adjustment (FS-611)" has been completed.
2. Conduct the tri-folding and check to see if the tri-
folding position is within the standard value given
in the table below.
When the tri-folding positions are not within the
standard values, perform the following adjust-
ment.
c
a Folding Standard value Standard
position A4S 81/2 x 11S
a 95 mm 89 mm ± 2 mm
b 15sjf3c035na
b 101 mm 95 mm ± 2 mm
c 101 mm 95 mm ± 2 mm
15sjf3c036na
378
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
11.5 PI-506
Conduct this adjustment when the punch position is displaced when feeding from PI.
NOTE
• In the PI displacement adjustment, adjust the tray /Up, and then adjust the tray /Lw.
• If the slide distance of the side guide plate /Rr is too long, perform the cover sheet tray size
adjustment in the service mode, and then perform the procedure from step 2.
A. Procedure
1. Check to see if the PK punch hole vertical position
[3] adjustment is completed by feeding the paper
from the manual feed tray of the main body.
2. Perform the displacement adjustment for the main
body trays 1, 2, 3, and 4 by in accordance with
the punch hole position.
3. Set 3 sheets of paper in the tray of the PI, and
then feed them in the punch mode as samples.
[2] [1] 4. Fold the sheets in half at the center and check the
misalignment of the punch holes.
5. Release the hook [1], and then remove the adjust-
ment cover [3] of the side guide plate /Rr [2].
15jff3c001na
[1]
[2]
15jff3c002na
379
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
plate /Rr [1] and slide the side guide plate /Rr
[1] twice as long as the misalignment of the punch
hole position (for example, if the misalignment is
1.5mm to the rear, slide 3mm to the rear).
1 index: 2mm
8. Fully tighten the adjustment screws [2] to secure
[2] the side guide plate /Rr.
9. For the tray /Lw, reinstall the side guide plate /Rr
with 2 screws.
10. Set paper on the tray, and then set the side guide
plate /Rr so that the side guide plate /Rr is con-
15jff3c003na
tacted with the paper in parallel.
11. Set 3 sheets of paper in the tray, and then feed
them in the punch mode as samples.
12. Fold the sheets in half at the center and check the
misalignment of the punch holes.
13. Repeat step 6 to 12 until the misalignment of the
punch holes is corrected.
14. Reinstall the adjustment cover of the side guide
plate /Rr.
15. Set A4S paper on the PI tray, and then perform
the cover sheet tray size adjustment in the service
mode.
380
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
A. Procedure
1. Set 3 sheets of paper in the tray of the PI, and
[1] [2] then feed them in the punch mode as samples.
2. Fold the sheets in half and check the tilt of the
punch holes.
[1]: The front is wider
[2]: The back is wider
15jff3c004na
[1]
[3]
[2]
[5] [4]
15jff3c005na
381
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
11.6 PK-504/505
bizhub PRO 950
Conduct this adjustment if the edge of the paper and the punch hole position on the paper are not in parallel.
A. Procedure
1. Align the paper on the main body tray with the
A side guide plate and the rear edge guide plate,
and then check the tilt with the platen copy or the
service mode (DF is unavailable).
2. Conduct the paper tilt adjustment if it is tilted sig-
nificantly.
C
3. Perform the punch mode printing for 3 sheets of
paper in each of the single sided mode and the
double sided mode as samples for checking the
tilt of the punch hole position.
B 4. Measure the tilt of the punch hole position for the
15kjf3c001na
3 sheets of paper.
Tilt of the punch hole position (%) = (A - B)/C
[2]
15kjf3c002na
382
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
A. Procedure
1. Check to see if FS is connected with the main
[1] body.
2. Open the front door.
3. Remove the screw [2], and then remove the
punch drive board cover [1].
[2]
15kjf3c004na
[1]
[2]
15kjf3c005na
383
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
11.7 ZU-607
bizhub PRO 950
Conduct this adjustment when replacing the ZU control board (ZUCB) or the paper edge sensor board (PESB).
A. Procedure
1. Remove the screw [1], and then remove the board
[2] [1]
cover [2].
15kvf3c001na
Note
• Be sure to stop rotating VRs at the positions where
LEDs turn ON. Try again if rotating VRs too much.
• The following table shows the correspon-
dence between VRs and LEDs.
15kvf3c002na
VR LED
VR1 LED2
VR2 LED3
VR3 LED4
VR4 LED5
VR5 LED6
384
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
A. Procedure
1. Remove ZU together with FS from the main body.
[2] [1] [6] (Refer to Theory of Operation of the ZU-607 P.36.)
2. Remove ZU from FS. (Refer to Theory of Opera-
tion of the ZU-607 P.39.)
3. Pull out the Z-folding/conveyance unit, and then
remove the stopper and pull out the unit further.
(Refer to Theory of Operation of the ZU-607 P.43.)
4. Loosen 2 screws [3] on the mounting plate [2] of
the gate solenoid /Lw (SD1) [1] and adjust the
gate /Lw [4] so that the clearance between the
gate /Lw [4] and the registration plate [5] gets to
the standard value "a", and then tighten the
screws [3].
Standard value: a = 3mm to 5mm
5. Loosen 2 screws [6] and adjust the gate /Lw [4]
so that the clearance between the gate /Lw [4]
[3] [7] [3] and the guide plate [5] gets to the standard value
"b" while SD1 [1] turns ON and the plunger [7] is
pulled, and then tighten 2 screws [6].
Standard value: b = 2mm to 4.6mm
6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal
steps in reverse.
[4] [5]
b a
[5]
15kvf3c003na
385
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Conduct the 1st folding skew adjustment when the skew of the 1st folding is not within the standard value.
Be sure to conduct the 1st Z-folding position adjustment (refer to "Service mode") because this adjustment
effects the 1st folding position.
A. Procedure
1. Perform the Z-folding printing operation on A3 or
11 x 17 paper and check to see if the skew of the
a 1st folding is within the standard value "a".
Standard value: a = 2mm or less
When the value is not within the standard value,
perform the following procedure.
15kvf3c004na
2. Open the front door, and then pull out the Z-fold-
[1] [2] [1] ing/conveyance unit.
3. Pull out the Z-folding/conveyance unit, and then
remove the stopper and pull out the unit further.
(Refer to Theory of Operation of the ZU-607 P.43.)
4. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the con-
veyance top cover [2].
15kvf3c005na
Note
• When the skew pattern is [4], move the front
side of the 1st stopper assembly [2] to the left
[5].
• When the skew pattern is [6], move the front
[5] [2] side of the 1st stopper assembly [2] to the
right [7].
386
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
NOTE
• Be sure to conduct the "1st folding skew adjustment" before conducting this adjustment.
• Be sure to conduct the "2nd Z-folding position adjustment" (refer to "Service mode") because this
adjustment effects the 2nd folding position.
A. Procedure
1. Perform the Z-folding printing operation on A3 or
11 x 17 paper and check to see if the skew of the
a 2nd folding is within the standard value "a".
Standard value: a = 2mm or less
When the value is not within the standard value,
perform the following procedure.
15kvf3c008na
2. Open the front door, and then pull out the Z-fold-
[2] [1]
ing/conveyance unit.
3. Pull out the Z-folding/conveyance unit, and then
remove the stopper and pull out the unit further.
(Refer to Theory of Operation of the ZU-607 P.43.)
4. Loosen 4 screws [1].
5. Adjust the 2nd stopper assembly [3] by moving it
vertically by referring to the markings [2], and then
tighten the 4 screws [1].
Note
[5] [3] • When the skew pattern is [4], move the back
side of the 2nd stopper assembly [2] upward
[5].
• When the skew pattern is [6], move the back
side of the 2nd stopper assembly [2] down-
ward [7].
387
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Conduct this adjustment when the 2nd folding position cannot be adjusted from the service mode or the skew
of the 2nd folding cannot be adjusted by the procedure in "11.7.4 2nd folding skew adjustment."
NOTE
• Be sure to conduct the "2nd folding skew adjustment" (Refer to P.387) and "2nd Z-folding position
adjustment" (Refer to "Service mode") because this adjustment effects the amount of the 2nd
folding skew and the 2nd folding position.
A. Procedure
1. Conduct the Z-folding printing operation to move
the 2nd stopper to the home position, and then
turn OFF the sub power switch (SW2) and the
[3] main power switch (SW1) of the main body.
2. Open the front door, and then pull out the Z-fold-
ing/conveyance unit.
3. Check to see if the distance between the 2nd
stopper [1] and inside edge of the guide plate [2]
is within a standard value.
Standard value: a = 20 ± 0.5mm
When the value is not within the standard value,
perform the following procedure.
a 4. Loosen 2 screw [3] with the hex wrench, and then
adjust the distance between the 2nd stopper [1]
and the inside of the guide plate [2] so that it gets
to the standard value a.
[2] [1]
Note
• Be sure not to rotate the actuator [5] of the
2nd stopper home sensor (PS4) [4] during the
adjustment. It may be moved from the home
position.
• Conduct the following steps 5 to 13 only if you
cannot reach to the screws [3] with the hex
wrench when they are located in side of the
[4]
2nd stopper assembly.
[5]
15kvf3c011na
388
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
Note
• Never remove the screw [6] from the actuator
[3]. At the appropriate position, the anti-rota-
[6] [3] [6] [3]
tion pin [7] points upward when the actuator
[3] faces to the left.
Note
• Before tightening the screws [10], be sure to
check the tension is exerted on 2 belts [11].
389
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
11.8 TU-502
bizhub PRO 950
A. Procedure
1. Take the measure of the upper and lower hems
B
between the folding side [1] and the trimming side
[2] of the booklet that has been trimmed and cal-
culate the parallelism to check to see if it is within
a standard value.
Standard value: parallelism = |A - B| = 1mm or
[1] [2] less
When the value is not up to the standard value,
conduct the following adjustments.
A
15smf3c001na
[5]
390
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 12. JAM CODE
TROUBLESHOOTING
turn ON within a specified period of sheet of paper the bypass tray and
time after the pick-up solenoid/bypass being printed remove jammed paper
(SD11) turns ON. when a jam if any.
J-1002 While in the standby for the bypass occurs, the main
feed, the registration sensor (PS44) body completes
does not turn OFF within a specified the paper exit
period of time. before stopping
Tray 1 J-1101 The pre-registration sensor /1 (PS48) operations. Pull out the tray and
does not turn ON within a specified remove jammed paper
period of time after the paper feed if any.
clutch /1 (CL3) turns ON.
J-1102 The paper feed sensor /1 (PS47) does
not turn ON within a specified period of
time after the pre-registration clutch /1
(CL4) turns ON.
The vertical conveyance sensor /1
(PS18) does not turn ON within a speci-
fied period of time after the pre-registra-
tion clutch /1 (CL4) turns ON.
The pre-registration sensor /1 (PS48)
does not turn OFF within a specified
period of time after the pre-registration
clutch /1 (CL4) turns ON.
The vertical conveyance sensor /1
(PS18) does not turn ON within a speci-
fied period of time after the paper feed
sensor /1 (PS47) turns ON.
J-1151 The vertical conveyance sensor /1 Open the main body
When idling
391
12. JAM CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
tion operation
Tray 2 J-1201 The pre-registration sensor /2 (PS50) If there is a Open the main body
During operation
does not turn ON within a specified sheet of paper vertical conveyance
period of time after the paper feed being printed door and remove
clutch /2 (CL5) turns ON. when a jam jammed paper if any.
J-1202 The paper feed sensor /2 (PS49) does occurs, the main Pull out the tray and
not turn ON within a specified period of body completes remove jammed paper
time after the pre-registration clutch /2 the paper exit if any.
(CL6) turns ON. before stopping
The vertical conveyance sensor /2 operations.
(PS53) does not turn ON within a speci-
fied period of time after the pre-registra-
tion clutch /2 (CL6) turns ON.
The pre-registration sensor /2 (PS50)
does not turn OFF within a specified
period of time after the pre-registration
clutch /2 (CL6) turns ON.
The vertical conveyance sensor /2
(PS53) does not turn ON within a speci-
fied period of time after the paper feed
sensor /2 (PS49) turns ON.
J-1251 The vertical conveyance sensor /2 Open the main body
When idling
392
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 12. JAM CODE
During operation
does not turn OFF within a specified sheet of paper vertical conveyance
period of time after the pre-registration being printed door and remove
clutch /3 (CL8) turns ON. when a jam jammed paper if any.
The vertical conveyance sensor /3 occurs, the main Pull out the tray and
(PS19) does not turn ON within a speci- body completes remove jammed paper
fied period of time after the paper feed the paper exit if any.
sensor /3 (PS51) turns ON. before stopping
J-1351 The vertical conveyance sensor /3 operations. Open the main body
When idling
while in idling.
J-1452 The pre-registration sensor (PS107)
turns ON while in idling.
Paper feed J-1701 Within a specified period of time after Open the front door to
During operation
convey- the loop sensor (PS54) or the ADU exit pull out the ADU stand,
ance (com- sensor (PS46) turns ON, the registration and then open the reg-
mon to sensor (PS44) does not turn ON. istration loop jam han-
each tray) dling section and the
open/close guide B to
remove a jammed
paper, if any.
Paper feed J-1702 The loop sensor (PS54) does not turn Open the main body
convey- ON within a specified period of time vertical conveyance
ance (tray 1) after the paper feed sensor /1 (PS47) door and remove
turns ON. jammed paper if any.
393
12. JAM CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
tion operation
Paper feed J-1703 The loop sensor (PS54) does not turn If there is a Open the main body
During operation
convey- ON within a specified period of time sheet of paper vertical conveyance
ance (trays after the vertical conveyance sensor /2 being printed door and remove
2/3) (PS53) turns ON. when a jam jammed paper if any.
Paper feed J-1704 The vertical conveyance sensor /2 occurs, the main
convey- (PS53) does not turn ON within a speci- body completes
ance (tray 2) fied period of time after the paper feed the paper exit
sensor /2 (PS49) turns ON. before stopping
Paper feed J-1705 The vertical conveyance sensor /2 operations.
convey- (PS53) does not turn ON within a speci-
ance (tray 3) fied period of time after the paper feed
sensor /3 (PS51) turns ON.
LU J-1706 The loop sensor (PS54) does not turn Open the LU jam door
ON within a specified period of time and remove jammed
after the LU exit sensor (PS106) turns paper if any.
ON.
Paper feed J-1751 The paper leading edge sensor (PS45) Open the front door to
When idling
394
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 12. JAM CODE
During operation
paper feed does not turn ON within a specified sheet of paper pull out the ADU stand
conveyance period of time after the registration sen- being printed and remove a jammed
sor (PS44) turns ON. when a jam paper, if any.
J-3102 The fusing exit sensor (PS2) does not occurs, the main
turn ON within a specified period of body completes
time after the paper leading edge sen- the paper exit
sor (PS45) turns ON. before stopping
Fusing/ J-3201 The paper exit sensor (PS61) does not operations.
paper turn ON within a specified period of
exit time after the fusing exit sensor (PS2)
turns ON.
J-3202 The reverse/exit sensor (PS57) does
not turn ON within a specified period of
time after the fusing exit sensor (PS2)
turns ON.
J-3203 The PS57 does not turn ON again
within a specified period of time after
the reverse/exit sensor (PS57) turns
ON.
J-3204 The exit sensor (PS61) does not turn
ON within a specified period of time
after the reverse/exit sensor (PS57)
turns ON again.
J-3205 The paper exit sensor (PS61) does not
turn OFF within a specified period of
time after the PS61 turns ON.
J-3251 The paper exit sensor (PS61) turns ON
When idling
while in idling.
J-3252 The reverse/exit sensor (PS57) turns
ON while in idling.
J-3253 The fusing exit sensor (PS2) turns ON
while in idling.
J-3254 The reverse conveyance sensor (PS8)
turns ON while in idling.
J-3255 The fusing jam sensor (PS3) turns ON
while in idling.
Front J-5101 While in the print, the right front door or The main body
During operation
395
12. JAM CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
tion operation
ADU J-9201 The ADU reverse sensor /1 (PS58) does If there is a Open the front door to
During operation
not turn ON within a specified period of sheet of paper pull out the ADU stand
time after the reverse/exit sensor (PS57) being printed and remove a jammed
turns ON. when a jam paper, if any.
occurs, the main
body completes
J-9202 The PS58 does not turn ON again
the paper exit
within a specified period of time after
before stopping
the ADU reverse sensor /1 (PS58) turns
operations.
ON.
J-9251 The ADU reverse sensor /1 (PS58)
When idling
396
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 12. JAM CODE
During operation
turns OFF while in DF operation. immediately. cover and remove
J-6102 The cover open/close switch (MS301) If there is paper jammed paper if any.
turns OFF while in DF operation. being trans-
ferred or having
been trans-
J-6201 The original registration sensor (PS306)
ferred, the main
does not turn OFF within a specified
body completes
period of time after the pre-feed start.
the paper exit
before stopping
operations.
J-6202 The original conveyance sensor Open the open/close
(PS308) does not turn ON within a cover and remove
specified period of time after the pre- jammed paper if any.
feed start of the front side of the double
sided original (including the single sided
original).
J-6203 The original conveyance sensor
(PS308) does not turn ON within a
specified period of time after the pre-
feed start of the back side of the double
sided original.
J-6204 While in the forward rotation of the orig-
inal conveyance motor (M301), the orig-
inal conveyance sensor (PS308) does
not turn OFF within a specified period of
time after it turns ON.
J-6205 While in the reverse rotation of the origi-
nal conveyance motor (M301), the origi-
nal conveyance sensor (PS308) does
not turn OFF within a specified period of
time after it turns ON.
J-6206 When entering a large size double sided
original in the reverse section, the origi-
nal reverse sensor (PS309) does not
turn ON within a specified period of
time after the original conveyance sen-
sor (PS308) turns ON.
J-6207 When exiting a large size single sided
original, the original exit sensor /Lt
(PS307) does not turn ON within a
specified period of time after the original
conveyance sensor (PS308) turns ON.
397
12. JAM CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
tion operation
DF J-6208 When exiting a large size double sided The DF stops Open the open/close
During operation
original, the original exit sensor /Lt immediately. cover and remove
(PS307) does not turn ON within a If there is paper jammed paper if any.
specified period of time after the original being trans-
reverse sensor (PS309) turns ON. ferred or having
been trans-
J-6209 When exiting a large size single sided
ferred, the main
original, the original exit sensor /Lt
body completes
(PS307) does not turn OFF within a
the paper exit
specified period of time after it turns
before stopping
ON.
operations.
J-6210 When exiting a large size double sided
original, the original exit sensor /Lt
(PS307) does not turn OFF within a
specified period of time after it turns
ON.
J-6301 When outputting a large size double
sided original from the reverse section,
the original reverse sensor (PS309)
does not turn ON.
J-6302 When entering a large size double sided
original into the reverse section, the
original reverse sensor (PS309) does
not turn OFF within a specified period of
time after it turns ON.
J-6303 When outputting a large size double
sided original from the reverse section,
the original reverse sensor (PS309)
does not turn OFF within a specified
period of time after it turns ON.
J-6304 When exiting a small size single sided
original, the original exit sensor /Rt
(PS314) does not turn ON within a
specified period of time after the original
reverse sensor (PS309) turns ON.
J-6305 When exiting a small size double sided
original, the original exit sensor /Rt
(PS314) does not turn ON within a
specified period of time after the original
reverse/exit sensor (PS313) turns ON.
J-6306 When exiting a small size single sided
original, the original exit sensor /Rt
(PS314) does not turn OFF within a
specified period of time after it turns
ON.
398
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 12. JAM CODE
During operation
original, the original exit sensor /Rt immediately. cover and remove
(PS314) does not turn OFF within a If there is paper jammed paper if any.
specified period of time after it turns being trans-
ON. ferred or having
been trans-
J-6308 When entering a small size double
ferred, the main
sided original into the reverse section,
body completes
the original reverse sensor (PS309)
the paper exit
does not turn ON within a specified
before stopping
period of time after original conveyance
operations.
sensor (PS308) turns ON.
J-6309 When outputting a small size double
sided original from the reverse section,
the original reverse sensor (PS309)
does not turn ON.
J-6310 When entering a small size double
sided original into the reverse section,
the original reverse sensor (PS309)
does not turn OFF within a specified
period of time after it turns ON.
J-6311 When outputting a small size double
sided original from the reverse section,
the original reverse sensor (PS309)
does not turn OFF within a specified
period of time after it turns ON.
J-6501 The original registration sensor (PS306)
When idling
399
12. JAM CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
tion operation
ZU J-7103 The front door is opened while in print- The FS/main Remove jammed paper
During operation
ing. body stop if any from the FS/main
immediately. body.
GP J-7109 The GP front door open jam. The door The GP and the Remove jammed paper
switch turns OFF while in the print. main body stop if any from the GP/main
immediately. body.
FS J-7216 The FS entrance sensor (PS4) does not The FS/main Remove jammed paper
turn ON within a specified period of body stop if any from the FS/main
time after the paper exit sensor (PS61) immediately. body.
turns ON.
J-7217 The main tray paper exit sensor (PS6)
does not turn ON within a specified
period of time after the FS entrance
sensor (PS4) turns ON.
J-7218 The stacker entrance sensor (PS5)
does not turn ON within a specified
period of time after the FS entrance
sensor (PS4) turns ON. (while in sta-
pling)
J-7219 The stacker entrance sensor (PS5)
does not turn OFF within a specified
period of time after the PS5 turns ON.
J-7220 The main tray paper exit sensor (PS6)
does not turn ON within a specified
period of time after the start of exiting
paper (while in stapling).
J-7221 After start of the paper exit operation,
the main tray paper exit sensor (PS6)
does not turn OFF within a specified
period of time. (While in the staple)
J-7222 The sub tray paper exit sensor (PS1)
does not turn ON within a specified
period of time after the FS entrance
sensor (PS4) turns ON (while in exiting
paper in the sub tray).
J-7223 The sub tray paper exit sensor (PS1)
does not turn OFF within a specified
period of time after it turns ON (while in
exiting paper in the sub tray).
J-7224 The folding passage sensor (PS26)
does not turn ON after stapling is com-
pleted. (FS-611 only)
J-7225 The folding paper exit sensor (PS25)
does not turn ON within a specified
period of time after completion of the
folding operation. (FS-611 only)
1 400
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 12. JAM CODE
During operation
does not turn OFF within a specified body stop if any from the FS/main
period of time after it turns ON. (FS-611 immediately. body.
only)
J-7228 The stacker entrance sensor (PS5)
does not turn OFF within a specified
period of time after it turns ON.
(FS-611 only)
J-7229 The main tray paper exit sensor (PS6)
does not turn OFF within a specified
period of time after it turns ON. (shift
mode)
J-7230 The main tray paper exit sensor (PS6)
does not turn OFF within a specified
period of time after it turns ON. (Staple
mode)
TU J-7232 The entrance sensor (PS101) does not
turn ON within a specified period of
time after the folding paper exit sensor
(PS25) turns ON.
J-7233 The conveyance sensor (PS102) does
not turn ON within a specified period of
time after the entrance sensor (PS101)
turns ON.
J-7234 Paper does not pass through the paper
exit sensor (PS108) within a specified
period of time after the conveyance
motor (M101) turns ON.
PI J-7235 The paper entrance sensor /Lw (PS206)
does not turn ON within a specified
period of time after the conveyance
clutch /Lw (CL202) turns ON.
ZU J-7238 The leading, trailing, and side edge sen- The ZU/main Remove jammed paper
sors on the paper edge sensor board body stop if any from the ZU/main
(PESB) do not turn ON within a speci- immediately. body.
fied period of time after the paper exit
sensor (PS61) turns ON.
J-7239 The leading, trailing, and side edge sen-
sors on the paper edge sensor board
(PESB) do not turn OFF within a speci-
fied period of time after they turn ON.
J-7240 The passage sensor (PS1) does not
turn ON within a specified period of
time after the leading, trailing, and side
edge sensors on the paper edge sen-
sor board (PESB) turn ON.
401
12. JAM CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
tion operation
ZU J-7241 The passage sensor (PS1) does not The ZU/main Remove jammed paper
During operation
turn OFF within a specified period of body stop if any from the ZU/main
time after it turns ON. While in the Z- immediately. body.
folding mode of the ZU, the PS1 does
not turn OFF within a specified period of
time after it turns ON while in the sec-
ond folding operation.
J-7242 While in the exit of the second folding,
the passage sensor (PS1) does not turn
OFF within a specified period of time
after it turns ON.
PK J-7243 The punch home sensor (PS801) does The FS/main Remove jammed paper
not turn ON within a specified period of body stop if any from the FS/main
time after the punch motor (M801) turns immediately. body.
ON. Or, the paper size sensor (PS805)
does not turn ON within a specified
period of time after the punch shift
motor (M802) turns ON.
ZU J-7244 The exit sensor (PS9) does not turn ON The ZU/main Remove jammed paper
within a specified period of time after body stop if any from the ZU/main
the leading, trailing, and side edge sen- immediately. body.
sors on the paper edge sensor board
(PESB) turn ON.
J-7245 The exit sensor (PS9) does not turn ON
within a specified period of time after
the paper exit sensor (PS61) turns ON.
J-7246 The exit sensor (PS9) does not turn
OFF within a specified period of time
after it turns ON.
J-7247 Paper remains in ZU within a specified
period of time after the main body sent
ZU a stop signal.
FS J-7248 The folding passage sensor (PS26) The FS/main Remove jammed paper
does not turn OFF within a specified body stop if any from the FS/main
period of time after it turns ON. (while in immediately. body.
folding mode) (FS-611 only)
PI J-7249 The paper entrance sensor /Up (PS201) The PI/main Remove jammed paper
does not turn ON within a specified body stop if any from the PI/main
period of time after the conveyance immediately. body.
clutch /Up (CL201) turns ON.
J-7250 The FS entrance sensor (PS4) does not
turn ON within a specified period of
time after the paper entrance sensor /
Up (PS201) turns ON.
402
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 12. JAM CODE
During operation
turn ON within a specified period of body stop if any from the PI/main
time after the paper entrance sensor / immediately. body.
Lw (PS206) turns ON.
ZU J-7260 After the leading edge/trailing edge/side The ZU/main Remove jammed paper
edge sensor in the paper edge sensor body stop if any from the ZU/main
board (PESB) turns OFF, the corre- immediately. body.
sponding side edge sensor in the PESB
does not turn ON within a specified
period of time.
The punch home sensor (PS6) does not
turn ON within a specified period of
time after the punch clutch (CL1) turns
ON.
J-7261 The passage sensor (PS1) does not
turn ON within a specified period of
time after the leading, trailing, and side
edge sensors on the paper edge sen-
sor board (PESB) turn ON.
J-7262 The exit sensor (PS9) does not turn ON
within a specified period of time after
the passage sensor (PS1) turns ON.
J-7263 The conveyance motor (M6) lost syn-
chronism.
FS J-7281 The stapler home sensor /Fr (PS31) The FS/main Remove jammed paper
does not turn ON within a specified body stop if any from the FS/main
period of time after the stapler motor /Fr immediately. body.
(M14) turns ON. (FS-528)
The clincher home sensor /Fr (PS33)
and stapler home sensor /Fr (PS31) do
not turn ON within a specified period of
time after the clincher motor /Fr (M15)
and stapler motor /Fr (M14) turn ON.
(FS-611)
J-7282 The stapler home sensor /Rr (PS30)
does not turn ON within a specified
period of time after the stapler motor /
Rr (M9) turns ON. (FS-528)
The clincher home sensor /Rr (PS32)
and stapler home sensor /Rr (PS30) do
not turn ON within a specified period of
time after the clincher motor /Rr (M10)
and stapler motor /Rr (M9) turn ON.
(FS-611)
403
12. JAM CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
tion operation
FS J-7283 The stapler home sensors /Rr (PS30) The FS/main Remove jammed paper
During operation
and /Fr (PS31) do not turn ON within a body stop if any from the FS/main
specified period of time after the stapler immediately. body.
motors /Rr (M9) and /Fr (M14) turn ON.
(FS-528)
The clincher home sensor /Rr (PS32), /Fr
(PS33), stapler home sensor /Rr (PS30)
and /Fr (PS31) do not turn ON within a
specified period of time after the clincher
motor /Rr (M10), /Fr (M15), stapler motor
/Rr (M9) and /Fr (M14) turn ON. (FS-611)
J-7299 The FS does not stop within a specified
period of time after the main body
sends it a stop signal.
J-7301 The main tray exit sensor (PS6) turns — Remove jammed paper
When idling
404
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 12. JAM CODE
When idling
idling. door, the bypass panel
cover, and remove the
jammed paper, if any.
J-7391 The stepper 1 speed sensor (S2) turns Open the GP front
ON while in idling. door, the entrance
aligner panel, and
remove the jammed
paper, if any.
J-7392 The bypass sensor (S8) turns ON while Open the GP front
in idling. door, the bypass panel
J-7393 The exit sensor (S7) turns ON while in cover, and remove the
idling. jammed paper, if any.
J-7394 The punch flag sensor (S9) turns ON Open the GP front
while in idling. door, the entrance
aligner panel, the bot-
tom U-channel, and
remove the jammed
paper, if any.
J-7395 The u-channel sensor (S4) turns ON Open the GP front
while in idling. door, the bottom U-
J-7396 The backstop sensor (S5) turns ON channel, and remove
while in idling. the jammed paper, if
any.
J-7397 The stepper 2 speed sensor (S6) turns Open the GP front
ON while in idling. door, the exit aligner
panel, and remove the
jammed paper, if any.
J-7590 The enter sensor (S1) does not turn The GP/main Remove jammed paper
During operation
OFF within a specified period of time body stop if any from the GP/main
after it turns ON. immediately. body.
J-7591 The stepper 1 speed sensor (S2) does
not turn OFF within a specified period of
time after it turns ON.
J-7592 The bypass sensor (S8) does not turn
OFF within a specified period of time
after it turns ON.
J-7593 The exit sensor (S7) does not turn OFF
within a specified period of time after it
turns ON.
J-7594 The punch flag sensor (S9) does not
turn OFF within a specified period of
time after it turns ON.
J-7595 The u-channel sensor (S4) does not
turn OFF within a specified period of
time after it turns ON.
405 1
12. JAM CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
tion operation
GP J-7596 The backstop sensor (S5) does not turn The GP/main Remove jammed paper
During operation
OFF within a specified period of time body stop if any from the GP/main
after it turns ON. immediately. body.
J-7597 The stepper 2 speed sensor (S6) does
not turn OFF within a specified period of
time after it turns ON.
1 406
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
B. Code list
NOTE
• For codes with "*" given in the error code column, a message "Turn off the power and turn it on
again" is displayed on the operation board.
• For codes with "#" given in the error code column, no error code is displayed. However, these
code are left as a record for data collection, list output and CSRC.
• For codes with no "*" or "#" given in the error code column, a message "Contact the service" is
displayed.
• "Confirmation of the wiring harness and the connector" on the estimated abnormal parts list
means checking the floating connector and the broken wiring harness on the board and between
the parts on the same list.
407
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
tion operation
Com- C-0010* Communication error check The main body Confirmation of the wiring
Main body
muni- between the printer engine sys- stops immedi- harness and the connector
cation tem boards. Drive communication ately to turn OFF ADU drive board (ADUDB)
abnor- reception error detection abnor- the main relay LU drive board (LUDB)
mality mality. A reception error interrup- (RL1). Printer control board (PRCB)
tion occurs while in the drive
board serial data reception. Or,
due to the occurrence of the data
checksum error/ID information
error, a retransmission request is
made 3 times and an error is
detected on the 4th time.
ADU C-0020* Initial communication check Confirmation of the wiring
stand between the ADU drive board harness and the connector
abnor- (ADUDB)/ printer control board ADU drive board (ADUDB)
mality (PRCB). Printer control board (PRCB)
ADU drive serial input abnormality
1. Within a specified period of
time after the ACK at the time of
the main power switch (SW1)
being turned ON, a serial data
from ID = 0 of the ADUDB is not
received.
C-0021* Communication error check
between the ADU drive board
(ADUDB)/ printer control board
(PRCB).
ADU drive serial input abnormality
2. Within a specified period of
time after the ACK at the time of
the main power switch (SW1)
being turned ON, a serial data
from ID = 7 of the ADUDB is not
received.
C-0022* Initial communication check
between the ADU drive board
(ADUDB)/ printer control board
(PRCB).
ADU drive serial input abnormality
3. Within a specified period of
time after the ACK at the time of
the main power switch (SW1)
being turned ON, a serial data
from ID = 9 of the ADUDB is not
received.
408
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
409
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
tion operation
Tray 1 C-0211# When the upper limit sensor /1 Error code is not Tray 1 paper improperly
Main body
410
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
411
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
tion operation
Tray 3 C-0231# When the upper limit sensor /3 Error code is not Tray 3 paper improperly
Main body
412
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
bypass (PS23) or the lower limit restart" is dis- harness and the connector
sensor /bypass (PS43) is OFF, played on the Bypass tray lift motor (M22)
PS23 or PS43 does not turn ON operation panel. Upper limit sensor /Bypass
within a specified period of time An error code is (PS23)
after the bypass tray lift motor displayed (J- Lower limit sensor /Bypass
(M22) turns ON for its lifting or 1001 jam count) (PS43)
lowering operation. And at this only for data col- Printer control board (PRCB)
time, an error detection signal lection, list out- DC power supply /2
(24V cut off) is detected. put and CSRC. (DCPS2)
413
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
tion operation
Bypass C-0252# When the upper limit sensor / "Press START to Confirmation of the wiring
Main body
bypass (PS23) or the lower limit restart" is dis- harness and the connector
sensor /bypass (PS43) is OFF, played on the Bypass tray lift motor (M22)
PS23 or PS43 does not turn ON operation panel. Upper limit sensor /Bypass
within a specified period of time An error code is (PS23)
after the bypass tray lift motor displayed (J- Lower limit sensor /Bypass
(M22) turns ON for its lifting or 1001 jam count) (PS43)
lowering operation. And at this only for data col- Printer control board (PRCB)
time, an error detection signal lection, list out- DC power supply /2
(blowout of ICP) is detected. put and CSRC. (DCPS2)
C-0253# When the upper limit sensor /
bypass (PS23) or the lower limit
sensor /bypass (PS43) is OFF,
PS23 or PS43 does not turn ON
within a specified period of time
after the bypass tray lift motor
(M22) turns ON for its lifting or
lowering operation. And at this
time, an error detection signal is
not detected.
Fan C-0301 The rotation of the conveyance The main body Confirmation of the wiring
abnor- suction fan (FM2) is checked, and stops immedi- harness and the connector
mality the 24V power source is also ately to turn OFF Conveyance suction fan
checked. An abnormal FM2 EM the main relay (FM2)
signal condition occurs a speci- (RL1). AC drive board (ACDB)
fied period of time after FM2 is DC power supply /2
turned ON. This abnormal condi- (DCPS2)
tion recurs even a specified
period of time after FM12 is
turned OFF and then turned ON,
and an error detection signal (24V
cut off) is detected.
C-0302 The blowout of ICP for the con-
veyance suction fan (FM2) in the
AC drive board (ACDB) is
checked.
An abnormal condition occurs
with the FM2 EM signal a speci-
fied period of time after FM2 is
turned ON. This abnormal condi-
tion recurs even a specified
period of time after FM2 is turned
OFF and then turned ON, and an
error detection signal (blowout of
ICP) is detected.
414
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
415 1
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
tion operation
Fan C-0307 The rotation of the developing The main body Confirmation of the wiring
Main body
abnor- cooling fan (FM19) is checked, stops immedi- harness and the connector
mality and the 24V power source is also ately to turn OFF DC power supply /2
checked. An abnormal condition the main relay (DCPS2)
occurs with the FM19 EM signal a (RL1). Printer control board
specified period of time after (PRCB)
FM19 is turned ON. This abnor-
mal condition recurs even a spec-
ified period of time after FM is
turned OFF and then ON again,
and an error detection signal (24V
cut off) is detected.
C-0308 The blowout of ICP for the devel-
oping cooling fan (FM19) is
checked.
An abnormal condition occurs
with the FM19 EM signal a speci-
fied period of time after FM19 is
turned ON. This abnormal condi-
tion recurs even a specified
period of time after FM is turned
OFF and then ON again, and an
error detection signal (blowout of
ICP) is detected.
However, an error detection sig-
nal (24V cut off) is not detected.
C-0309 The rotation of the developing
cooling fan (FM19) is checked. An
abnormal condition occurs with
the FM19 EM signal a specified
period of time after FM19 is
turned ON. This abnormal condi-
tion recurs even a specified
period of time after FM19 is
turned OFF and then ON again,
and an error detection signal (24V
cut off/blowout of ICP) is not
detected.
416
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
417 1
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
tion operation
ADU C-0411 24V power source of the ADU The main body Confirmation of the wiring
Main body
stand drive board is checked. At the stops immedi- harness and the connector
abnor- start, an error detection signal ately to turn OFF Centering sensor (PS1)
mality (blowout of ICP for the transfer the main relay Transfer exposure lamp (EL2)
exposure lamp/solenoid) is (RL1). ADU lock solenoid (SD1)
detected, and an error detection Reverse/exit solenoid (SD2)
signal (24V cut off) is detected. Fusing solenoid (SD3)
C-0412 At the start, an error detection ADU drive board (ADUDB)
signal (blowout of the ICP for the DC power supply /2
transfer exposure lamp/solenoid) (DCPS2)
is detected. However, an error
detection signal (24V cut off) is
not detected.
FS C-1001* Communication error. The main body Confirmation of the wiring
FS
abnor- C-1002* Start-up response error. and the FS stop harness and the connector
mality immediately to FS control board (FSCB)
turn OFF the Printer control board (PRCB:
main relay (RL1). main body)
GP C-1012 Communication error. The main body Confirmation of the wiring
GP
abnor- between FS-PK. and the FS stop harness and the connector
mality immediately to PK drive board (PDB)
turn OFF the FS control board (FSCB)
FS C-1091 Communication error when the main relay (RL1). Confirmation of the wiring
FS
abnor- sub CPU in the FS control board harness and the connector
mality (FSCB) is receiving data. FS control board (FSCB)
C-1092 Communication error when the
main CPU in the FS control board
(FSCB) is receiving data.
C-1101 The shift unit does not get to the Confirmation of the wiring
shift position or the HP within a harness and the connector
specified period of time. Confirmation of the shift unit
drive parts
Shift roller home sensor
(PS18)
Shift roller motor (M2)
FS control board (FSCB)
1 418
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
419
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
tion operation
FS C-1107 Stapler rotation motor (M6) The main body Confirmation of the wiring
FS
abnor- abnormality. (FS-611 only) and the FS stop harness and the connector
mality immediately to Confirmation of the stapler
turn OFF the rotation parts
main relay (RL1). Stapler rotation motor (M6)
Relay board (RB)
FS control board (FSCB)
C-1108 Stapler /Rr rotation abnormality. Confirmation of the wiring
(FS-611 only) harness and the connector
Confirmation of the stapler /
Rr rotation parts
Stapler rotation home sensor
(PS13)
Relay board (RB)
FS control board (FSCB)
C-1109 After start-up of the paper exit belt Confirmation of the wiring
motor (M400) operation, the paper harness and the connector
exit belt home sensor (PS9) does Confirmation of the driving
parts of the conveyance belt
not turn ON within a specified
Paper exit belt motor (M400)
period of time. FS control board (FSCB)
C-1111 The stapler motor home sensor /Fr Confirmation of the wiring
(PS31) does not turn ON within a harness and the connector
specified period of time after the sta- Replacement of the stapler /
Fr
pler motor /Fr (M14) starts opera-
Relay board (RB)
tions. (FS-528) FS control board (FSCB)
Within a specified period of time after
the start-up of the clincher motor /Fr
(M15) or stapler motor /Fr (M14)
operation, the clincher home sensor /
Fr (PS33) or the stapler home sensor
/Fr (PS31) does not turn ON.
(FS-611)
C-1112 The stapler motor home sensor / Confirmation of the wiring
Rr (PS30) does not turn ON harness and the connector
within a specified period of time Replacement of the stapler /
after the stapler motor /Rr (M9) Rr
starts operations. (FS-528) Relay board (RB)
Within a specified period of time FS control board (FSCB)
after the start-up of the clincher
motor /Rr (M10) or stapler motor /
Rr (M9) operation, the clincher
home sensor /Rr (PS32) or the
stapler home sensor /Rr (PS30)
does not turn ON. (FS-611)
420
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
421
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
tion operation
FS C-1125 After the folding blade motor The main body Confirmation of the wiring
FS
abnor- (M19) starts the home position and the FS stop harness and the connector
mality detection operation, the folding immediately to Confirmation of the folding
blade home sensor /Lw (PS22) turn OFF the blade drive parts
does not turn ON within a speci- main relay (RL1). Folding blade home sensor
fied period of time. (FS-611 only) (PS22)
Folding blade motor (M19)
Relay board (RB)
FS control board (FSCB)
C-1126 After start-up of the folding con- Confirmation of the wiring
veyance motor (M20) operation, harness and the connector
the M20 does not get to the pre- Confirmation of the folding
determined speed within a speci- transfer drive parts
fied period of time. (FS-611 only) Folding transfer motor (M20)
Relay board (RB)
FS control board (FSCB)
TU C-1131 After start-up of the conveyance Confirmation of the wiring
TU
422
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
abnor- /Lw (M202) operation, the tray harness and the connector
mality lower limit sensor /Lw (PS210) Confirmation of the tray /Lw
does not turn ON within a speci- drive parts
fied period of time. Tray lower limit sensor /Lw
(PS210)
Tray lift motor /Lw (M202)
PI drive board (PIDB)
FS control board (FSCB)
423
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
tion operation
PI C-1142 After start-up of the tray lift motor The main body Confirmation of the wiring
PI
abnor- /Up (M201) operation, the tray and the FS stop harness and the connector
mality upper limit sensor /Up (PS204) immediately to Confirmation of the tray /Up
does not turn ON within a speci- turn OFF the drive parts
fied period of time. main relay (RL1). Tray upper limit sensor /Up
(PS204)
Tray lift motor /Up (M201)
PI drive board (PIDB)
FS control board (FSCB)
C-1143 After the conveyance motor Confirmation of the wiring
(M203) turns ON, the M203 does harness and the connector
not get to the predetermined Transfer motor (M203)
speed within a specified period of PI drive board (PIDB)
time. FS control board (FSCB)
PK C-1144 After the punch shift motor Confirmation of the wiring
PK
abnor- (M802) starts the home position harness and the connector
mality search, the punch shift home Punch shift home sensor
sensor (PS803) does not turn ON (PS803)
even when a specified period of Punch shift motor (M802)
time elapses. Punch drive board (PDB)
FS control board (FSCB)
ZU C-1152 After the 1st stopper motor (M2) Confirmation of the wiring
ZU
abnor- starts the home position search, harness and the connector
mality the 1st stopper home sensor Confirmation of the 1st stop-
(PS3) does not turn ON even per drive parts
when a specified period of time 1st stopper home sensor
elapses. (PS3)
1st stopper motor (M2)
ZU control board (ZUCB)
C-1153 After the 2nd stopper motor (M3) Confirmation of the wiring
starts the home position search, harness and the connector
the 2nd stopper home sensor Confirmation of the 2nd
(PS4) does not turn ON even stopper drive parts
when a specified period of time 2nd stopper home sensor
elapses. (PS4)
2nd stopper motor (M3)
ZU control board (ZUCB)
424
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
abnor- starts the home position search, harness and the connector
mality the punch shift home sensor Confirmation of the punch
(PS5) does not turn ON even shift drive parts
when a specified period of time Punch shift home sensor
elapses. (PS5)
Punch shift motor (M5)
ZU control board (ZUCB)
C-1157 After the punch motor (M4) turns Confirmation of the wiring
on, the punch operation is not harness and the connector
completed even when a specified Confirmation of the punch
period of time elapses. (The drive parts
punch home sensor (PS6) does Punch home sensor (PS6)
not turn OFF, or it does not turn Punch clutch (CL1)
ON after being turned OFF. ) Punch motor (M4)
ZU control board (ZUCB)
C-1158 After the punch switching motor Confirmation of the wiring
(M8) starts the home position harness and the connector
search, the punch switching Confirmation of the punch
switch (MS2) does not turn ON switchover drive parts
even when a specified period of Punch switchover switch
time elapses. (MS2)
Punch switchover motor
(M8)
ZU control board (ZUCB)
FSab- C-1181 After the gate motor (M12) starts Confirmation of the wiring
FS
nor- the home position search, the harness and the connector
mality gate home sensor (PS16) does Confirmation of the gate
not turn ON even when a speci- drive parts
fied period of time elapses. Gate home sensor (PS16)
Gate motor (M12)
FS control board (FSCB)
ZU C-1356 A specified period of time after Confirmation of the wiring
ZU
425
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
tion operation
Wire C-2101 When the charge cleaning home The main body Confirmation of the wiring
Main body
clean- sensor (PS41) is OFF with the stops immedi- harness and the connector
ing main power switch (SW1) ON, ately to turn OFF Charge cleaning motor (M23)
abnor- PS41 does not turn ON within a the main relay Charge cleaning home sen-
mality specified period of time after the (RL1). sor (PS41)
charge cleaning motor (M23) Charge cleaning limit sensor
turns ON for home position (PS42)
research operation (return opera- Printer control board (PRCB)
tion). At this time, an error detec-
tion signal (blowout of ICP) is not
detected.
PS41 does not turn OFF within a
specified period of time after the
reverse operation (return opera-
tion) is started. At this time, an
error detection signal (blowout of
ICP) is not detected.
It is checked that the time for the
M23 operations is over. The
charge cleaning limit sensor
(PS42) does not turn ON within a
specified period of time after the
reverse operation (return opera-
tion) is started for detection of
PS41 being OFF. Or, PS41 does
not turn ON within a specified
period of time after PS42 turns
ON.
426
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
427
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
tion operation
Wire C-2104 It is checked that the operations The main body Confirmation of the wiring
Main body
clean- of the transfer/separation clean- stops immedi- harness and the connector
ing ing motor (M18) are over. When ately to turn OFF Transfer/separation cleaning
abnor- the transfer/separation cleaning the main relay motor (M18)
mality home sensor (PS11) is OFF with (RL1). Transfer/separation cleaning
the main power switch (SW1) ON, home sensor (PS11)
PS11 does not turn ON within a Transfer/separation cleaning
specified period of time after the limit sensor (PS12)
M18 turns ON for a home posi- ADU drive board (ADUDB)
tion research operation (return
operation). At this time, an error
detection signal (blowout of ICP)
is not detected.
PS11 does not turn OFF within a
specified period of time after the
reverse operation (return opera-
tion) is started. At this time, an
error detection signal (blowout of
ICP) is not detected.
It is checked that the operations
of the M18 are over. The transfer/
separation cleaning limit sensor
(PS12) does not turn ON within a
specified period of time after the
reverse operation (return opera-
tion) is started for detection of
PS11 being OFF. Or, PS11 does
not turn ON within a specified
period of time after PS12 turns
ON. At this time, an error detec-
tion signal (blowout of ICP) is not
detected.
C-2106 The locking of the transfer/sepa- Confirmation of the transfer/
ration cleaning motor (M18) is separation cleaning member
detected. Motor lock signals are Confirmation of the wiring
detected while moving from the harness and the connector
transfer/separation limit sensor Transfer/separation cleaning
(PS12) side to the transfer/sepa- motor (M18)
ration home sensor (PS11) side, Transfer/separation cleaning
and after a retry operation, a fifth home sensor (PS11)
motor lock signal is detected. Transfer/separation cleaning
limit sensor (PS12)
ADU drive board (ADUDB)
428
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
429
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
tion operation
Motor C-2204 It is checked that the movement The main body Confirmation of the wiring
Main body
abnor- of the blade motor (M14) is not stops immedi- harness and the connector
mality completed, and the 24V power ately to turn OFF Blade sensor /1 (PS30)
source is also checked. The drum the main relay Blade sensor /2 (PS31)
READY1 signal (READY condi- (RL1). Blade motor (M14)
tion) cannot be detected within a Drum motor (M2)
specified period of time after the Printer control board (PRCB)
drum motor (M2) turns ON. Or, DC power supply /2
the drum READY1 signal (READY (DCPS2)
release condition) cannot be
detected within a specified period
of time after M2 turns OFF. At this
time, an error detection signal
(24V cut out) is detected.
C-2205 The blowout of ICP for the blade
motor (M14) in the printer control
board (PRCB) is checked.
The drum READY1 signal
(READY condition) cannot be
detected within a specified period
of time after the drum motor (M2)
turns ON. Or, the drum READY1
signal (READY release condition)
cannot be detected within a
specified period of time after M2
turns OFF. At this time, the error
detection signal (blowout of ICP)
of M14 is detected.
C-2206 It is checked that the movement
of the blade motor (M14) is not
completed.
The drum READY1 signal
(READY condition) cannot be
detected within a specified period
of time after the drum motor (M2)
turns ON. Or, the drum READY1
signal (READY release condition)
cannot be detected within a
specified period of time after M2
turns OFF. At this time, an error
detection signal is not detected.
430
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
431
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
tion operation
Motor C-2210 It is checked that the drum motor The main body Confirmation of the wiring
Main body
abnor- (M2) does not start. The drum stops immedi- harness and the connector
mality READY2 signal (READY signal) is ately to turn OFF Drum motor (M2)
not detected within a specified the main relay Printer control board (PRCB)
period of time after M2 turns ON. (RL1).
C-2211 The blowout of ICP for the toner Confirmation of the wiring
supply motor (M11) in the printer harness and the connector
control board (PRCB) is checked. Toner supply motor (M11)
An error detection signal (blowout Printer control board (PRCB)
of ICP) is detected when M11
turns ON.
C-2221 When the recycle cut motor (M24) Confirmation of the wiring
is turned ON, an error detection harness and the connector
signal is detected twice in a row Recycle cut motor (M24)
within a specified period of time. Recycle cut drive board
(An error detection signal on the (RCDB)
first time is ignored.) Printer control board (PRCB)
RC C-2250 It is detected that the waste toner If there is a Waste toner recycle box
RC
abnor- temperature sensor (TH5) stops immedi- harness and the connector
mality detected a specified period of ately to turn OFF Drum temperature sensor
time after the main power switch the main relay (TH5)
(SW1) is turned ON is -3°C or (RL1). Printer control board (PRCB)
lower, and also, the drum temper-
ature after a specified period of
time is -3°C or lower.
C-2402 When the main power switch
(SW1) turns ON with the fusing
temperature below 50°C, the
detected temperature of the
drum temperature sensor (TH5) is
more than 52°C, and when the
detected temperature is above
52°C after a specified period of
time.
432
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
433
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
tion operation
Pro- C-2802# The maximum density correction Error code is not Cleaning of the IDC sensor
Main body
cess is not completed. While in the displayed on the Confirmation of the wiring
abnor- maximum density correction, the operation panel, harness and the connector
mality number of rotations of the devel- but displayed IDC sensor board (IDCB)
oping roller gets to the maximum. only on the data Developing motor (M3)
C-2803# The IDC sensor board (IDCB) out- collection, the Printer control board (PRCB)
put abnormality. While in the max- list output and Overall control board (OACB)
imum density correction, a patch the CSRC. The Write unit
for control is not output. (No out- control of the
put is made from the IDCS. ) main body is
made by using a
data previously
obtained.
C-2804# The dirt correction of the sensor The main body
is not completed. While in stops immedi-
gamma correction, the dirt cor- ately to turn OFF
rection of the IDC sensor is not the main relay
sufficient. When C-2804 or C- (RL1).
2807 is detected 10 times in suc-
cession, the error code is dis-
played.
C-2805# The IDC sensor board (IDCB) out- Error code is not
put abnormality. While in the displayed on the
gamma correction, a patch for operation panel,
control is not output. (No output but displayed
is made from the IDCB. ) only on the data
C-2806# The gamma correction data is collection, the
defective. The gamma correction list output and
output is abnormal. A regression the CSRC. The
error when carrying out a gamma control of the
curve operation while in the main body is
gamma correction. made by using a
data previously
obtained.
C-2807# The dirt correction of the sensor The main body
is not completed. While in the dot stops immedi-
diameter correction, the dirt cor- ately to turn OFF
rection of the IDC sensor is not the main relay
sufficient. When C-2804 or C- (RL1).
2807 is detected 10 times in suc-
cession, the error code is dis-
played.
434
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
435
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
tion operation
Pro- C-2812# Auto adjustment monitor value Error code is not Confirmation of the transfer/
Main body
436
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
437
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
tion operation
Fan C-3306 When the print is completed, the Error code is not Confirmation of the wiring
Main body
abnor- fusing fan /2 (FM4) EM signal gets displayed on the harness and the connector
mality into an abnormal condition. operation panel, Fusing fan /2 (FM4)
but displayed ADU drive board (ADUDB)
only on the data DC power supply /2
collection, the (DCPS2)
list output and
CSRC.
Fusing C-3501 Fusing roller /Up high tempera- The main body Confirmation of the wiring
high ture detection (software). TH1 stops immedi- harness and the connector
tem- detects a temperature of 235°C ately to turn OFF Fusing temperature sensor /
pera- or above 5 times in a specified the main relay 1 (TH1)
ture period of time. Or, the fusing tem- (RL1). Fusing heater lamp /1 (L1)
abnor- perature sensor /2 (TH2) detects Fusing heater lamp /2 (L2)
mality a temperature of 240°C or above. Caution Printer control board (PRCB)
• When C-35**, AC drive board (ACDB)
C-3502 Fusing heating roller high temper- C-38** or C- Confirmation of the wiring
ature abnormality (software). TH3 39** (fusing harness and the connector
detects a temperature of 230°C temperature Fusing temperature sensor /
or above 5 times in a specified related 3 (TH3)
period of time. abnormality) Fusing heater lamp /3 (L3)
occurs, be Printer control board (PRCB)
sure to repair AC drive board (ACDB)
defective
parts before
setting
DIPSW3-1 to
0. Setting
DIPSW3-1 to
0 with defec-
tive parts not
repaired
results in a
fire.
438
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
439
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
tion operation
Fus- C-3901 Fusing roller /Up sensor abnor- The main body Confirmation of the wiring
Main body
ing mality (software). TH1 detects a stops immedi- harness and the connector
sen- temperature of 230°C or above ately to turn OFF Fusing temperature sensor /
sor 30 times in a row in a specified the main relay 1 (TH1)
abnor- period of time. (RL1). Fusing heater lamp /1 (L1)
mality Fusing heater lamp /2 (L2)
Caution Printer control board (PRCB)
• When C-35**, AC drive board (ACDB)
C-3902 Fusing heating roller sensor C-38** or C- Confirmation of the wiring
abnormality (software). TH3 39** (fusing harness and the connector
detects a temperature of 220°C temperature Fusing temperature sensor /
or above 30 times in a row in a related 3 (TH3)
specified period of time. abnormality) Fusing heater lamp /3 (L3)
occurs, be Printer control board (PRCB)
sure to repair AC drive board (ACDB)
C-3903 Fusing roller /Up sensor abnor- defective Confirmation of the wiring
mality (hardware). The output parts before harness and the connector
voltage of the TH1 is detected as setting Fusing temperature sensor /
a low temperature abnormality (- DIPSW3-1 to 1 (TH1)
6°C or lower) in the comparator 0. Setting Fusing heater lamp /1 (L1)
circuit. DIPSW3-1 to Fusing heater lamp /2 (L2)
0 with defec- Printer control board (PRCB)
tive parts not AC drive board (ACDB)
repaired
C-3904 Fusing heating roller sensor Confirmation of the wiring
results in a
abnormality (hardware). The out- harness and the connector
fire.
put voltage of the TH3 is Fusing temperature sensor /
detected as a low temperature 3 (TH3)
abnormality (-6°C or lower) in the Fusing heater lamp /3 (L3)
comparator circuit. Printer control board (PRCB)
AC drive board (ACDB)
440
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
441
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
tion operation
Fan C-4301 The rotation of the write unit cool- The main body Confirmation of the wiring
Main body
abnor- ing fan /1 (FM5) is checked, and stops immedi- harness and the connector
mality 24V power source is also ately to turn OFF Write unit cooling fan /1
checked. An abnormal condition the main relay (FM5)
occurs with the FM5 EM signal a (RL1). AC drive board (ACDB)
specified period of time after FM5 DC power supply /2
turns ON. This abnormal condi- (DCPS2)
tion recurs even a specified
period of time after FM5 is turned
OFF and then turned ON, and an
error detection signal (24V cut off)
is detected.
C-4302 The blowout of ICP for the write
unit cooling fan /1 (FM5) in the AC
drive board (ACDB) is checked.
An abnormal condition occurs
with the FM5 EM signal a speci-
fied period of time after FM5 turns
ON. This abnormal condition
recurs even a specified period of
time after FM5 is turned OFF and
then turned ON, and an error
detection signal (blowout of ICP)
is detected.
C-4303 The rotation of the write unit cool-
ing fan /1 (FM5) is checked.
An abnormal condition occurs
with the FM5 EM signal a speci-
fied period of time after FM5 turns
ON. This abnormal condition
recurs even a specified period of
time after FM5 is turned OFF and
then turned ON, and an error
detection signal (24V cut off/
blowout of ICP) is not detected.
C-4304 When the print is started, an error
detection signal of the writing
section cooling fan /1 (FM5) is
detected.
442
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
443
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
tion operation
Fan C-4309 The rotation of the cooling fan /4 The main body Confirmation of the wiring
Main body
abnor- (FM12) is checked and the 24V stops immedi- harness and the connector
mality power source is also checked. An ately to turn OFF Cooling fan /4 (FM12)
abnormal condition occurs with the main relay AC drive board (ACDB)
the FM12 EM signal a specified (RL1). DC power supply /2
period of time after FM12 turns (DCPS2)
ON. This abnormal condition
recurs even a specified period of
time after FM12 is turned OFF
and then turned ON, and an error
detection signal (24V cut off) is
detected.
C-4310 The blowout of ICP for the cool-
ing fan /4 (FM12) in the AC drive
board (ACDB) is checked.
An abnormal condition occurs
with the FM12 EM signal a speci-
fied period of time after FM12
turns ON. This abnormal condi-
tion recurs even a specified
period of time after FM12 is
turned OFF and then turned ON,
and an error detection signal
(blowout of ICP) is detected.
C-4311 Rotation of the cooling fan /4
(FM12) is checked. An abnormal
condition occurs with the FM12
EM signal a specified period of
time after FM12 turns ON. This
abnormal condition recurs even a
specified period of time after
FM12 is turned OFF and then
turned ON, and an error detection
signal (24V cut off/blowout of ICP)
is not detected.
C-4312 The rotation of the polygon cool- Confirmation of the wiring
ing fan (FM9) is checked and the harness and the connector
24V power source is also Polygon cooling fan (FM9)
checked. An abnormal condition AC drive board (ACDB)
occurs with the FM9 EM signal a Printer control board (PRCB)
specified period of time after FM9 DC power supply /2
is turned ON. This abnormal con- (DCPS2)
dition recurs even a specified
period of time after FM9 is turned
OFF and then turned ON, and an
error detection signal (24V cut off)
is detected.
444
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
445
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
tion operation
Image C-4703* Elongation abnormality. If there is a Confirmation of the wiring
Main body
446
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
447
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
tion operation
Count C-5102# The 24V power source for the Error code is not Confirmation of the wiring
Main body
er total counter (TCT) is checked. displayed on the harness and the connector
abnor- When TCT is turned ON from operation panel, Total Counter (TCT)
mality OFF, an error detection signal but displayed AC drive board (ACDB)
(blowout of ICP/24V cut off) is only on the data DC power supply /2
detected. collection, the (DCPS2)
C-5103# The blowout of ICP for TC in the list output and
AC drive board (ACDB) is CSRC. How-
checked. When the total counter ever, the counter
(TCT) is turned ON from OFF, an does not oper-
error detection signal (blowout of ate.
ICP) is detected. However, an
error detection signal (24V cut off)
is not detected.
C-5104# The 24V power source for the key Confirmation of the wiring
counter (KCT) is checked. When harness and the connector
KCT is turned ON from OFF, an Key counter (KCT)
error detection signal (blowout of AC drive board (ACDB)
ICP/24V cut off) is detected. DC power supply /2
Power C-5105# The blowout of ICP for KCT in the (DCPS2)
abnor- AC drive board (ACDB) is
mality checked. When the key counter
(KCT) is turned ON from OFF, an
error detection signal (blowout of
ICP) is detected. However, an
error detection signal (24V cut off)
is not detected.
Fan C-5301 The rotation of the cooling fan /1 The main body Confirmation of the wiring
abnor- (FM26) and /2 (FM27) is checked, stops immedi- harness and the connector
mality and the 24V power source is also ately to turn OFF Cooling fan /1 (FM26)
checked. An abnormal condition the main relay Cooling fan /2 (FM27)
occurs with the FM26 and FM27 (RL1). AC drive board (ACDB)
EM signals a specified period of Printer control board (PRCB)
time after FM26 and FM27 are DC power supply /2
turned ON. This abnormal condi- (DCPS2)
tion recurs even a specified
period of time after FM26 and
FM27 are turned OFF and then
ON again, and an error detection
signal (24V cut off) is detected.
448
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
449
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
tion operation
Fan C-5306# Rotation of the cooling fan /2 The cooling fan /2 Confirmation of the wiring
Main body
abnor- (FM27) is checked. An abnormal (FM27) stops. harness and the connector
mality condition occurs with the FM27 Operate only cool- Cooling fan /2 (FM27)
EM signal a specified period of ing fan /1 (FM26). AC drive board (ACDB)
time after FM27 is turned ON. Error code is not
This abnormal condition recurs displayed on the
even a specified period of time operation panel,
after FM27 is turned OFF and but displayed only
then ON again, and an error on the data collec-
detection signal (blowout of ICP) tion, the list output
is not detected. and CSRC.
C-5307# The rotation of the cooling fan /3 The main body Confirmation of the wiring
(FM6) is checked and +24V stops immedi- harness and the connector
power source is also checked. An ately to turn OFF Cooling fan /3 (FM6)
abnormal condition occurs with the main relay AC drive board (ACDB)
the FM6 EM signal a specified (RL1). Printer control board (PRCB)
period of time after FM6 turns DC power supply /2
ON. This abnormal condition (DCPS2)
recurs even a specified period of
time after FM6 is turned OFF and
then turned ON, and an error
detection signal (24V cut off) is
detected.
C-5308 The blowout of ICP for the cool-
ing fan /3 (FM6) in the AC drive
board (ACDB) is checked.
An abnormal condition occurs
with the FM6 EM signal a speci-
fied period of time after FM6 turns
ON. This abnormal condition
recurs even a specified period of
time after FM6 is turned OFF and
then turned ON, and an error
detection signal (blowout of ICP)
is detected.
C-5309 Rotation of the cooling fan /3
(FM6) is checked. An abnormal
condition occurs with the FM6
EM signal a specified period of
time after FM6 turns ON. This
abnormal condition recurs even a
specified period of time after FM6
is turned OFF and then turned
ON, and an error detection signal
(24V cut off/blowout of ICP) is not
detected.
450
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
451
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
tion operation
ADU C-5315 Rotation of the ADU cooling fan / The main body Confirmation of the wiring
Main body
452
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
453
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
tion operation
Fan C-5330 The rotation of the power supply The main body Confirmation of the wiring
Main body
abnor- cooling fan /3 (FM32) is checked. stops immedi- harness and the connector
mality An abnormal condition occurs ately to turn OFF Power supply cooling fan /3
with the FM32 EM signal a speci- the main relay (FM32)
fied period of time after FM32 is (RL1). DC power supply /2
turned ON. This abnormal condi- (DCPS2)
tion recurs even a specified
period of time after FM32 is
turned OFF and then ON again,
and an error detection signal (24V
cut off) is not detected.
Scan- C-6101 The scanner home sensor (PS5) Confirmation of the wiring
ner does not turn ON within a speci- harness and the connector
abnor- fied period of time after the home Scanner motor (M13)
mality position search is started. Scanner home sensor (PS5)
Scanner drive board (SDB)
Printer control board (PRCB)
DC power supply /2
(DCPS2)
Fan C-6301 The rotation of the scanner cool- Confirmation of the wiring
abnor- ing fan (FM7) is checked, and harness and the connector
mality 24V power source is also Scanner cooling fan (FM7)
checked. An abnormal condition Scanner drive board (SDB)
occurs with the FM7 EM signal a Printer control board (PRCB)
specified period of time after FM7 DC power supply /2
turns ON. This abnormal condi- (DCPS2)
tion recurs even a specified
period of time after FM7 is turned
OFF and then turned ON, and an
error detection signal (24V cut off)
is detected.
Image C-6701* When processing images, a filter If there is a Confirmation of the wiring
pro- coefficient cannot be created nor- sheet of paper harness and the connector
cess- mally. being printed, Reinstalling firmware
ing the main body Overall control board (OACB)
abnor- completes the
mality paper exit
before stopping
operations. The
main relay (RL1)
is turned OFF.
454
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
455
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
tion operation
Image C-6708* AOC/AGC adjustment abnormality. If there is a 1. CCD related parts
Main body
pro- The light blocking cover at the read sheet of paper Confirmation of the wiring har-
cess- section and the lens cover are being printed, ness and the connector
ing removed. the main body CCD board (CCDB)
abnor- • The connector of the CCD board is completes the Overall control board (OACB)
mality disconnected. paper exit 2. Exposure lamp related parts
• The power cable of the CCD board before stopping Confirmation of the wiring har-
is unplugged. operations. ness and the connector
• The ICP of the CCD board is cut off. Immediately to Exposure lamp (L4)
The light volume of the exposure turn OFF the L4 inverter (L4INVB)
lamp is excessive. main relay (RL1). Scanner drive board (SDB)
The exposure lamp does not light up.
C-6709# The adjustment data evacuated Error code is not Confirmation of the wiring
by resolutions is not available. displayed on the harness and the connector
C-6710# A density conversion gamma operation panel, Overall control board (OACB)
curve cannot be created normally. but displayed
only on the data
collection, the
list output and
CSRC.
C-6711* Calibration start abnormality. If there is a Confirmation of the wiring
C-6712* Calibration completion abnormality. sheet of paper harness and the connector
C-6713* Despite of the MPC not being ter- being printed, Reinstalling firmware
minated, the initial sampling of the main body Overall control board (OACB)
the APC is attempted. completes the
paper exit
C-6714* While executing the APC, the
before stopping
execution of the MPC is
operations.
attempted.
C-6716* When a clock for the image write
is abnormal, the sub scan beam
interval is attempted to be cor-
rected.
C-6717* Sequentially shot page area
abnormality.
Due to an image area abnormality
on the memory, images cannot
be developed on the memory.
C-6718* The PVV is turned ON before the Confirmation of the wiring
initial APC start processing is harness and the connector
completed. Reinstalling firmware
Write unit
Overall control board (OACB)
Printer control board (PRCB)
456
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
abnor- out data according to the data sheet of paper harness and the connector
mality retransmission request made by being printed, DF control board (DFCB: DF)
the DF, a retransmission request the main body Overall control board (OACB:
signal is received again. and the DF main body)
completes the
paper exit
before stopping
operations.
Immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay (RL1).
457
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
tion operation
DF C-8002* When a checksum error or an If there is a Confirmation of the wiring
DF
abnor- SRGA reception error was sheet of paper harness and the connector
mality detected while in the reception in being printed, DF control board (DFCB: DF)
serial communication, a signal the main body Overall control board (OACB:
was sent to make a request for and the DF main body)
sending data again. And when completes the
data is being received upon this paper exit
request, a checksum error or an before stopping
SRGA reception error is detected operations.
again. Immediately to
C-8003* When the main power switch turn OFF the Confirmation of the wiring
(SW1) is ON, there is no response main relay (RL1). harness and the connector
to the initial communication DF control board (DFCB)
request from the main body to
the DF even after a specified
period of time elapses.
C-8201 Tray up/down motor (M303) Confirmation of the wiring
abnormality. harness and the connector
Confirmation of the original
tray up/down drive parts
Tray up/down motor (M303)
DF control board (DFCB)
C-8301 Cooling fan (FM301) abnormality. Confirmation of the wiring
harness and the connector
Cooling fan (FM301)
DF control board (DFCB)
C-8401 Original registration sensor Confirming the sensor oper-
(PS306) abnormality. ation
Confirmation of the wiring
harness and the connector
Original registration sensor
(PS306)
DF control board (DFCB)
C-8402 Original conveyance sensor Confirming the sensor oper-
(PS308) abnormality. ation
Confirmation of the wiring
harness and the connector
Original conveyance sensor
(PS308)
DF control board (DFCB)
458
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
muni- C-A002 HDD/2 (HDD2) abnormality. stops immedi- Confirmation of the wiring
cation ately to turn OFF harness and the connector
abnor- the main relay HDD/2 (HDD2)
mality (RL1). PCI relay board (PCIRB)
IC board (ICB)
Overall control board (OACB)
C-A003 IC cooling fan (FM28) abnormal- Confirmation of the wiring
ity. harness and the connector
IC cooling fan (FM28)
PCI relay board (PCIRB)
IC board (ICB)
Overall control board (OACB)
C-A004 FATAL error. —
459
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
tion operation
Com- C-A005 The CF card in ICB is different The main body Reinstalling IC firmware
Main body
muni- from the program version of the stops immedi- IC board (ICB)
cation HDD/2 (HDD2). ately to turn OFF
abnor- C-A006 While in the security ON, the the main relay Confirmation of the wiring
mality *1 unlock of the HDD/2 (HDD2) (RL1). harness and the connector
results in failure. (Due to the mis- HDD/2 (HDD2)
match of the password) IC board (ICB)
C-A007 While in the security ON, an
*1 unlocked HDD is connected.
C-A008 An unformatted HDD/2 (HDD2) is Confirmation of the wiring
detected. harness and the connector
Hard disk format
HDD/2 (HDD2)
C-A101 The communication from ICB to Confirmation of the wiring
the overall control board (OACB) harness and the connector
is blocked. PCI relay board (PCIRB)
IC board (ICB)
Overall control board (OACB)
*1 Since this is a security-related error code, be sure to contact KMBT before taking any measure.
460
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
461 1
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
tion operation
DF C-C120 When the main power switch If there is a Confirmation of the wiring har-
DF
abnor- (SW1) is ON, a region into which sheet of paper ness and the connector
mality no write was made by the ISW is being printed, DF control board (DFCB: DF)
detected in the DF control pro- the main body Overall control board (OACB:
gram. and the DF main body)
completes the
paper exit
before stopping
operations.
Immediately to
turn OFF the
main relay (RL1).
ISW C-C125 When the main power switch The main body IC program
Main body
462
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
463
13. MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
trol units manually. While detached, an error detection is not carried out on these detached units.
There are 2 methods of setting for limited use.
464
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 13. MALFUNCTION CODE
465
14. TROUBLES THAT DO NOT DISPLAY THE MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
CODE
14.1 The power of main body does not turn ON
14.1.1 Turn ON the main power switch but the power LED of the operation panel does not light up in
red.
466
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 14. TROUBLES THAT DO NOT DISPLAY THE MALFUNCTION CODE
467
14. TROUBLES THAT DO NOT DISPLAY THE MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
14.1.2 Turn ON the main power switch and the sub power switch, but the touch panel does not dis-
play anything.
bizhub PRO 950
• The power save LED is lighting/blinking, but the main power LED does not light in green (but lights in red).
14.1.3 Turn ON the sub power switch but the power LED does not switch from red to green.
468
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 14. TROUBLES THAT DO NOT DISPLAY THE MALFUNCTION CODE
469
14. TROUBLES THAT DO NOT DISPLAY THE MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
14.4.1 FS-528/611
470
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 14. TROUBLES THAT DO NOT DISPLAY THE MALFUNCTION CODE
14.4.2 ZU-607
471
14. TROUBLES THAT DO NOT DISPLAY THE MALFUNCTION CODE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
14.4.3 TU-502
bizhub PRO 950
472
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 15. IMAGE TROUBLE
Scanner system
Original scan
CCD board
(CCDB)
Printer
control Overall control PCI relay
board board (OACB) board
IC board (ICB)
(PRCB) (PCIRB)
Cable
Write unit
473
15. IMAGE TROUBLE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
• When it is judged as the printer system trouble from the initial check items, conduct the image stabilization
after checking the printer check items.
Note
• The following sample images on each procedures are when printing in A3.
474
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 15. IMAGE TROUBLE
475
15. IMAGE TROUBLE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
15.2.3 Printer system: White lines in sub scan direction, White bands in sub scan direction, Black
lines in sub scan direction, Black bands in sub scan direction
bizhub PRO 950
White lines in sub scan White bands in sub Black lines in sub scan Black bands in sub
direction scan direction direction scan direction
B. Troubleshooting procedure
476
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 15. IMAGE TROUBLE
15.2.4 Printer system: White lines in main scan direction, White bands in main scan direction, Black
lines in main scan direction, Black bands in main scan direction
White lines in main White bands in main Black lines in main Black bands in main
scan direction scan direction scan direction scan direction
B. Troubleshooting procedure
477
15. IMAGE TROUBLE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
B. Troubleshooting procedure
478
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 15. IMAGE TROUBLE
4036fs4046c0 4036fs4047c0
B. Troubleshooting procedure
479
15. IMAGE TROUBLE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
4036fs4036c0
B. Troubleshooting procedure
480
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 15. IMAGE TROUBLE
4036fs4048c0
4036fs4049c0
B. Troubleshooting procedure
481
15. IMAGE TROUBLE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
4036fs4030c0
B. Troubleshooting procedure
482
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 15. IMAGE TROUBLE
4036fs4051c0
4036fs4050c0
B. Troubleshooting procedure
483
15. IMAGE TROUBLE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Black spots
AA
4036fs4052c0
B. Troubleshooting procedure
484
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 15. IMAGE TROUBLE
Blurred image
4036fs4031c0
B. Troubleshooting procedure
485
15. IMAGE TROUBLE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Poor fusing
Offset
performance
CF
CF
CF
4036fs4059c0 4036fs4060c0
B. Troubleshooting procedure
486
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 15. IMAGE TROUBLE
4036fs4061c0 4036fs4031c0
B. Troubleshooting procedure
487
15. IMAGE TROUBLE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
AA
4036fs4062c0 4036fs4063c0
B. Troubleshooting procedure
488
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 15. IMAGE TROUBLE
4036fs4038c0 4036fs4039c0
B. Troubleshooting procedure
489
15. IMAGE TROUBLE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
4138fs4507c0
B. Recovery method
490
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 15. IMAGE TROUBLE
Note
• The following sample images on each procedures are when printing in A3.
491
15. IMAGE TROUBLE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
15.3.2 Scanner system: White lines in sub scan direction, White bands in sub scan direction, Black
lines in sub scan direction, Black bands in sub scan direction
bizhub PRO 950
White lines in sub White bands in sub Black lines in sub scan Black bands in sub
scan direction scan direction direction scan direction
B. Troubleshooting procedure
3) When using original glass
4) When using DF
492
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 15. IMAGE TROUBLE
15.3.3 Scanner system: White lines in main scan direction, White bands in main scan direction,
Black lines in main scan direction, Black bands in main scan direction
B. Troubleshooting procedure
3) When using original glass
Step Section Check item Result Action
1 Scanner check There is no problem on scanner check items. NO Clean, Replace
2 Service mode The adjustment value of [Scanner NO Readjustment
→ Machine Restart Timing] is within the stan-
Adjustment dard.
→ Timing Adjustment
3 Service mode The adjustment value of [Scanner NO Readjustment
→ Machine Centering Adj.] is within the stan-
Adjustment dard.
→ Centering
Adjustment
4 The problem has been solved by NO Replace exposure unit
step 3. → Replace CCD unit
493
15. IMAGE TROUBLE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
AA
4036fs4029c0
B. Troubleshooting procedure
494
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 15. IMAGE TROUBLE
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
ABCD
4036fs4030c0
B. Troubleshooting procedure
495
15. IMAGE TROUBLE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
4036fs4031c0
B. Troubleshooting procedure
496
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 15. IMAGE TROUBLE
4036fs4033c0
B. Troubleshooting procedure
497
15. IMAGE TROUBLE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
AA
4036fs4034c0
B. Troubleshooting procedure
498
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 15. IMAGE TROUBLE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
4036fs4035c0
B. Troubleshooting procedure
499
15. IMAGE TROUBLE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
ABCDE
4036fs4036c0
B. Troubleshooting procedure
500
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 15. IMAGE TROUBLE
4036fs4038c0 4036fs4039c0
B. Troubleshooting procedure
501
15. IMAGE TROUBLE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
B. Troubleshooting procedure
502
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 15. IMAGE TROUBLE
Note
• The following sample images on each procedures are when printing in A3.
503
15. IMAGE TROUBLE Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
4036fs4038c0 4036fs4039c0
B. Troubleshooting procedure
504
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 16. CONTROLLER TROUBLE
16.2 The print jobs on the PC side are completed, but no printing starts.
A. Troubleshooting procedure
Step Section Check item Result Action
1 Main body The sub power switch of the main NO Turn ON the sub power switch and
body is turned ON. check it again.
2 Main body Network cable or USB cable is YES Connect the cable to the main body
disconnected from the main body. and then check it again.
3 Main body An error occurs on the main body YES Check the operation panel of the main
side. body and check it again after returning
it to the normal condition.
4 Main body Jobs are placed in a wait condi- YES Check the operation panel of the main
tion. body and then check the sequence of
jobs.
5 PC Printing is indicated as [Save in the YES Setting it to [Print] and make printing
box] or [Secure Print]. again.
6 Main body/PC When an authentication setting is YES Enter a correct user name (section
made, user name (section name)/ name)/password and then conduct
password that has not been regis- printing again.
tered is entered.
7 Main body/PC [Enhanced Security mode] is set YES After consulting with the administrator
on the main body. of the main body, make an authentica-
tion setting.
Checks are made up to Step 7 NO Replace the IC board.
and the problem has been cleared.
505
17. TROUBLESHOOTING (GP-501) Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Also called Repair Analysis Procedures, this section contains the basic troubleshooting information that a tech-
nician needs to isolate the root cause of a specific symptom.
17.1 Troubleshooting
The tables that follow are arranged in order of the normal operational sequence.
17.1.1 General
One of the first rules of troubleshooting is to first understand the normal operating sequence of the machine
(refer to Theory of Operation of GP-501/MK-724). Then carefully listen to the key operator's description of the
problem or complaint. Follow this by your own visual observation. The cause of the problem can be determined
by noting at which point in the operating cycle the problem occurred. To pinpoint the problem to a defective
electrical component or mechanical part, use the Troubleshooting Guide and the OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM.
During any service call, it is a good practice to check the cable connections for fit and alignment.
1 506
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 17. TROUBLESHOOTING (GP-501)
507 1
17. TROUBLESHOOTING (GP-501) Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
1 508
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 17. TROUBLESHOOTING (GP-501)
509 1
17. TROUBLESHOOTING (GP-501) Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
At the start of every service call, you should perform the following.
1. If called for a problem, determine the exact nature of the service complaint.
2. Estimate the cycle life on the Die Sets. Determine if any of the Die Set life cycles have exceeded 500k sheets
(cycles).
3. Determine if the customer uses only one Die Set pattern (style) or if they switch between different patterns.
4. Determine the last time the Die Set was lubricated.
5. Determine the date of the last preventative maintenance performed on the punch system.
6. Determine the paper type and quality, especially as it relates to curl and identify if any media changes corre-
late with the emergence of the customer issue.
1 510
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 17. TROUBLESHOOTING (GP-501)
[1]
[2]
4. Open the Bypass panel cover [1] and check for obstructions in the Bypass [2].
5. Ensure the Entrance Guide is clear [3].
6. Ensure the Diverter is clear [4].
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
511 1
17. TROUBLESHOOTING (GP-501) Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
7. Open the entrance paper Aligner panel latch [1] and clear obstructions in the Aligner.
8. Open the exit paper Aligner panel latch [2] and clear obstructions in each Aligner.
bizhub PRO 950
[1]
[2]
1 512
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 17. TROUBLESHOOTING (GP-501)
9. Open the bottom U-channel by pressing the lever in [1] and lower the U-channel [2] and clear the path.
10. When all the paper is cleared, close the U-channel, Aligner Panels, and Bypass.
11. Shut the cabinet door.
12. Verify on the printer screen that the misfeed has been cleared. If not, repeat the above steps.
13. Press the Start button on the printer. The printing operation should resume.
513 1
17. TROUBLESHOOTING (GP-501) Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
This section explains the actions a technician should take at the end of every service call. With each step, verify
that the system runs smoothly and misfeed free.
1. Inspect each Die Set visually and lubrication as needed. (Refer to Theory of Operation of GP-501/MK-724 P.27)
2. Using the customer’s primary Die Set pattern, run 200 simplex printed test sheets through the punch mode
and examine the output for clean hole quality and even hole alignment.
3. Using the customer’s primary Die Set pattern, run 200 duplex printed test sheets through the punch mode
and examine the output for clean hole quality and even hole alignment.
4. Using any of the customer’s secondary Die Set pattern, run 100 simplex printed test sheets through the
punch mode and examine the output for clean hole quality and even hole alignment.
5. Run 100 sheets simplex and 100 sheets duplex through the punch bypass mode.
6. Clean out all paper chips (chad) and paper dust from the chip tray, the bottom of the machine and from the
floor around the bottom of the machine. (Refer to Theory of Operation of GP-501/MK-724 P.33)
7. Explain to the customer the service work that was performed and ensure they are satisfied before you close
the call.
1 514
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
APPENDIX
[1]
a0y5f5c001ca
515
18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
[1]
[1] Sub power switch (SW2) [6] Door open/close sensor /2 (PS25)
[2] Interlock switch /1 (MS1) [7] Scanner home sensor (PS5)
[3] Door open/close sensor /1 (PS24) [8] APS sensor /2 (PS63)
[4] Interlock switch /2 (MS2) [9] APS sensor /1 (PS62)
[5] Main power switch (SW1)
[1]
57gaf5c003nb
516
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
[1] Drum potential sensor (DPS) [2] Drum temperature sensor (TH5)
E. Charge section
[1] Charge cleaning home sensor (PS41) [2] Charge cleaning limit sensor (PS42)
517
18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
F. Cleaning section
bizhub PRO 950
[1]
[2]
57gaf5c006na
518
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
G. Tray 1, 2, 3
[7]
[5]
[6]
57gaf5c007na
519
18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
[5]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3] 57gaf5c008na
[1] Vertical conveyance sensor /2 (PS53) [4] Vertical conveyance sensor /1 (PS18)
[2] Vertical conveyance sensor /3 (PS19) [5] Loop sensor (PS54)
[3] Door open /close sensor /3 (PS17)
520
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
I. Bypass tray
[1]
[2]
[1] Lower limit sensor /Bypass (PS43) [4] Temperature-humidity sensor (TEM//HUM)
[2] Paper size sensor /Rr4 (PS56) [5] Paper empty sensor /Bypass (PS29)
[3] Paper size sensor /Fr4 (PS55) [6] Upper limit sensor /Bypass (PS23)
J. Registration section
[1]
[3]
[2] 57gaf5c010nb
[1] Registration sensor (PS44) [3] Paper leading edge sensor (PS45)
[2] Centering sensor (PS1)
521
18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
K. Duplex section
bizhub PRO 950
[1]
[11] [2]
[3]
[10]
[9] [4]
[8] [5]
[7]
[6]
[9] [10]
[8]
[3]
[1] ADU deceleration sensor (PS59) [7] Reverse conveyance sensor (PS8)
[2] ADU pre-registration sensor (PS60) [8] Reverse/exit sensor (PS57)
[3] ADU exit sensor (PS46) [9] ADU reverse sensor /1 (PS58)
[4] Transfer/separation cleaning home sensor (PS11) [10] ADU reverse sensor /2 (PS13)
[5] ADU handle release sensor (PS10) [11] Transfer/separation cleaning limit sensor (PS12)
[6] ADU conveyance sensor (PS9)
522
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
L. Fusing section
[5]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
57gaf5c012na
[1]
57gaf5c013na
523
18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
N. TRANSFER/SEPARATION UNIT
bizhub PRO 950
[1]
1050fs5010c
524
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
18.1.2 Load
A. Main body rear side
[9]
[1]
[8]
[2]
[3]
525
18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
[1]
a0y5f5c005ca
[4] [5]
[1]
[1] Power supply cooling fan /3 (FM32) [4] Paper exit cooling fan /Up2 (FM17)
[2] Paper exit cooling fan /Lw1 (FM13) [5] Paper exit cooling fan /Up1 (FM15)
[3] Paper exit cooling fan /Lw2 (FM14)
526
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
D. Write section
[2]
57gaf5c017na
527
18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
[1]
[2]
57gaf5c018nb
[1] Toner supply motor (M11) [2] Toner bottle motor (M15)
[1]
a0y5f5c007ca
528
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
G. Charger unit
57gaf5c020na
H. Cleaning section
[1]
57gaf5c021na
529
18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
I. Tray1, 2, 3
bizhub PRO 950
[6]
[5]
[1]
[2]
[4]
[3]
57gaf5c022na
530
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
[2]
57gaf5c023na
[1] Vertical conveyance clutch /1 (CL9) [2] Vertical conveyance clutch /2 (CL10)
531
18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
K. Bypass tray
bizhub PRO 950
[6]
[5]
[4] [1]
[2]
[3] 57gaf5c024nb
[1] Pick-up solenoid /Bypass (SD11) [4] Write unit cooling fan /1 (FM5)
[2] Bypass tray lift motor (M22) [5] Write unit cooling fan /2 (FM8)
[3] Paper size VR/Bypass (VR4) [6] Cooling fan /4 (FM12)
532
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
L. Duplex section
[6]
[5]
[1] ADU cooling fan /4 (FM23) [10] ADU cooling fan /1 (FM10)
[2] Registration motor (M12) [11] Reverse/exit solenoid (SD2)
[3] ADU conveyance motor /2 (M26) [12] Fusing fan /2 (FM4)
[4] ADU lock solenoid (SD1) [13] Fusing fan /1 (FM1)
[5] Transfer/separation cleaning motor (M18) [14] Reverse/exit motor (M5)
[6] Transfer motor (M9) [15] ADU conveyance motor /1 (M8)
[7] ADU reverse motor (M7) [16] ADU cooling fan /2 (FM11)
[8] ADU cooling fan /5 (FM25) [17] Transfer assist motor (M25)
[9] Fusing solenoid (SD3)
533
18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
M. Fusing section
bizhub PRO 950
[1]
a0y5f5c009ca
534
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
[18]
[21]
[14] [1]
[13] [2]
[3]
[12]
[4]
[5]
[6]
535 1
18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
[1]
[2]
[3]
57gaf5c029na
[1]
a0y5f5c011ca
536
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
[2]
[1]
a0y5f5c012ca
[6]
[1]
[5]
[2]
[3]
[4]
a03uf5c033ca
537
18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
F. Write section
bizhub PRO 950
[3]
[1]
[2]
57gaf5c033na
[1]
[1] Drum potential sensor board (DPSB) [3] IDC sensor board (IDCB)
[2] JAM sensor board (JAMB)
538
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
H. Charge section
I. Tray 1, 2, 3
[1]
57gaf5c036na
539
18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
J. Duplex section
bizhub PRO 950
[3]
[1]
[2] 57gaf5c037nb
[1] Transfer exposure lamp (EL2) [3] High voltage unit /2 (HV2)
[2] ADU drive board (ADUDB)
540
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
K. Fusing section
[2]
[1] 57gaf5c038nb
[1] Fusing heater lamp /3 (L3) [3] Fusing heater lamp /2 (L2)
[2] Fusing heater lamp /1 (L1)
541
18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
18.2 DF-616
bizhub PRO 950
A. Front side
542
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
B. Rear side
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1] Original conveyance motor (M301) [9] Original paper exit motor /1 (M304)
[2] Original skew sensor /Fr (PS312) [10] Original paper exit motor /2 (M305)
[3] Original conveyance sensor (PS308) [11] DF control board (DFCB)
[4] Original skew sensor /Rr (PS311) [12] Cooling fan /Rt (FM302)
[5] Cooling fan (FM301) [13] Tray up/down motor (M303)
[6] APS timing sensor (PS317) [14] Cover open/close switch (MS301)
[7] Original feed motor (M302) [15] Tray lower limit sensor (PS316)
[8] SDF switching solenoid (SD304)
543
18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
C. Upper surface
bizhub PRO 950
[5]
[6]
[7]
15saf5c003na
[1] Original size sensor /Rt (PS302) [6] Original empty sensor (PS305)
[2] Original size sensor /Lt (PS303) [7] Tray upper limit sensor (PS315)
[3] Original count sensor (PS310) [8] Original reverse sensor (PS309)
[4] Reverse jam sensor (PS304) [9] Original exit sensor /Lt (PS307)
[5] Original registration sensor (PS306)
544
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
D. Upper tray
[2]
15saf5c004na
545
18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
E. Reverse tray
bizhub PRO 950
[1]
[2]
15saf5c005na
[1] Original exit sensor /Rt (PS314) [2] Original reverse/exit sensor (PS313)
546
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
18.3 LU-407/408
[19]
[4]
[18] [5]
[17]
[6]
[7]
[16]
[8]
[15]
[9]
[14]
[10]
[13]
[1] Tray down switch (SW100) [12] Remaining paper sensor /4 (PS105)
[2] Front door interlock switch (MS101) [13] Remaining paper sensor /3 (PS104)
[3] Front door open/close sensor (PS110) [14] Remaining paper sensor /2 (PS103)
[4] Pick-up solenoid (SD100) [15] Remaining paper sensor /1 (PS102)
[5] Upper limit sensor (PS109) [16] Paper lift motor (M100)
[6] LU exit sensor (PS106) [17] Feed clutch (CL101)
[7] Pre-registration clutch (CL102) [18] Upper door open/close sensor (PS100)
[8] Paper feed motor (M101) [19] Upper door interlock switch (MS102)
[9] LU drive board (LUDB) [20] Pre-registration sensor (PS107)
[10] Dehumidification heater (HTR101) [21] Paper empty sensor (PS108)
[11] Lower limit sensor (PS101)
547
18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
18.4 FS-528/611
bizhub PRO 950
A. Front side
[24] [25]
[4]
[23]
[22]
[21]
[20] [5]
[19] [6]
[7]
[18]
[8]
[9]
[10]
[17] [11]
FRONT
[16]
[15] [14] [13] [12]
15sff5c001nb
[1] Sub tray paper exit sensor (PS1) [15] Folding passage sensor (PS26)
[2] Paper exit home sensor (PS12) (FS-611 only)
[3] Gate home sensor (PS16) [16] Saddle stitching stopper home sensor
[4] FS entrance sensor (PS4) (PS23) (FS-611 only)
[5] Stapler movement motor (M11) (FS-611) [17] Side stitch stopper solenoid /Fr (SD7)
[6] Front door interlock switch (MS1) (FS-611 only)
[7] Clincher rotation motor (M4) (FS-611 only) [18] Stacker entrance sensor (PS5)
[8] Alignment home sensor /Lw (PS24) [19] Stacker empty sensor (PS20)
(FS-611 only) [20] Paper assist solenoid (SD51)
[9] Alignment motor /Lw (M16) (FS-611 only) [21] Paper assist motor (M51)
[10] Folding blade home sensor (PS22) [22] Alignment home sensor /Up (PS8)
(FS-611 only) [23] Paper exit belt home sensor (PS9)
[11] Folding blade motor (M19) (FS-611 only) [24] Stacker entrance motor (M13)
[12] Side stitch stopper solenoid /Rr (SD8) [25] Shift roller home sensor (PS18)
(FS-611 only) [26] Shift roller motor (M2)
[13] Saddle stitching stopper motor (M18) [27] Main tray paper exit sensor (PS6)
(FS-611 only) [28] Sub tray paper full sensor (PS19)
[14] Clincher rotation home sensor (PS14) [29] Paper exit opening solenoid (SD4)
(FS-611 only) [30] Paper exit home sensor (FS-528 only)
548
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
B. Rear side
[11]
[1]
[2]
[10]
[9] [3]
[4]
[8]
[7] [5]
[6]
15sjf5c002nb
[1] Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor (PS7) [9] FS control board (FSCB)
[2] Main tray upper limit sensor (PS2) [10] Gate motor (M12)
[3] Counter reset sensor (PS15) [11] FS conveyance motor (M1)
[4] Bypass gate solenoid (SD5) [12] Paper exit belt motor (M400)
[5] Main tray lower limit sensor (PS3) [13] Paper exit motor (M8)
[6] Main tray lift motor (M3) [14] Sub tray paper exit motor (M21)
[7] Folding transfer motor (M20) [15] Paper exit roller motor (M7)
[8] Relay board (RB)
549
18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
C. Folding section
bizhub PRO 950
[10]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4] [3] 15sff5c003na
[1] Stapler movement home sensor (PS11) [6] Stapler rotation home sensor (PS13)
(FS-528) (FS-611 only)
[2] Folding paper exit sensor (PS25) (FS-611 only) [7] Tri-folding gate solenoid (SD6) (FS-611 only)
[3] Folding full LED (LED29) (FS-611 only) [8] Stapler rotation motor (M6) (FS-611 only)
[4] Stapler movement motor (M11) (FS-528) [9] Stapler movement home sensor (PS11)
(FS-611)
[5] Folding full sensor (PS29) (FS-611 only) [10] Alignment motor /Up (M5)
550
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
D. Stapler section
[9] [7]
[3]
FS-611
[4]
[8]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[1] Clincher motor /Rr (M10) / [6] Staple empty switch /Rr (MS3) /
Clincher motor /Fr (M15) (FS-611 only) Staple empty switch /Fr (MS5) (FS-611)
[2] Clincher home sensor /Rr (PS32) / [7] Cartridge sensor /Rr (PS34) /
Clincher home sensor /Fr (PS33) (FS-611 only) Cartridge sensor /Fr (PS36) (FS-528)
[3] Stapler motor /Rr (M9) / [8] Staple ready sensor /Rr (PS38) /
Stapler motor /Fr (M14) Staple ready sensor /Fr (PS39)
[4] Stapler home sensor /Rr (PS30) / (FS-528)
Stapler home sensor /Fr (PS31) [9] Staple empty sensor /Rr (PS35) /
[5] Cartridge switch /Rr (MS2) / Staple empty sensor /Fr (PS37)
Cartridge switch /Fr (MS4) (FS-611) (FS-528)
551
18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
18.5 PI-506
bizhub PRO 950
[10]
[19] [11]
[12]
FRONT
[18] [13]
[17] [16] [15] [14] 15jff5c001na
[1] PI drive board (PIDB) [13] Upper door open /close switch (MS201)
[2] Conveyance motor (M203) [14] Tray upper limit sensor /Lw (PS209)
[3] Transfer clutch /Lw (CL202) [15] Paper empty sensor /Lw (PS207)
[4] Registration clutch (CL203) [16] Paper size VR /Lw (VR202)
[5] Paper empty sensor /Up (PS202) [17] Paper set sensor /Lw (PS208)
[6] Paper size VR /Up (VR201) [18] Paper set sensor /Up (PS203)
[7] Paper entrance sensor /Up (PS201) [19] L size sensor /Lw (PS212)
[8] Tray upper limit sensor /Up (PS204) [20] Tray lift motor /Lw (M202)
[9] Paper entrance sensor /Lw (PS206) [21] Tray lower limit sensor /Lw (PS210)
[10] PI operation board (PIOB) [22] Tray lower limit sensor /Up (PS205)
[11] Pick-up solenoid /Lw (SD202) [23] Tray lift motor /Up (M201)
[12] Pick-up solenoid /Up (SD201) [24] Transfer clutch /Up (CL201)
552
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
18.6 PK-504/505
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[8]
[5]
FRONT [7] [6] 15kjf5c001na
[1] Punch motor (M801) [5] Punch shift home sensor (PS803)
[2] Paper size sensor (PS805) [6] Punch shift motor (M802)
[3] Punch scraps box full sensor (PS802) [7] Punch drive board (PDB)
[4] Punch home sensor (PS801) [8] Punch scraps box set sensor (PS804)
18.6.2 PK-505
[7]
[6] [1]
[5]
[9]
[8] 15knf5e003na
[1] Punch shift home sensor (PS303) [6] Punch motor (M301)
[2] Punch shift motor (M302) [7] Punch encoder sensor (PS306)
[3] Paper size sensor (PS305) [8] Punch drive board (PDB)
[4] Punch scraps box full sensor (PS302) [9] Punch scraps box set sensor (PS304)
[5] Punch home sensor (PS301)
553
18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
18.7 ZU-607
bizhub PRO 950
[1]
[2]
[15]
[3]
[14]
[13]
[4]
[12]
[5]
[11]
[10] [6]
[9]
[8] [7]
15kvf5c001na
[1] Conveyance motor cooling fan (M10) [9] Noise filter (NF)
[2] Punch shift motor (M5) [10] Coil (L)
[3] Punch shift home sensor (PS5) [11] DC power supply (DCPS)
[4] ZU control board (ZUCB) [12] Door switch (MS1)
[5] Circuit breaker /2 (CBR2) [13] Punch scraps box set sensor (PS7)
[6] Circuit breaker /1 (CBR1) [14] Punch scraps full sensor (PS8)
[7] Power relay /1 (RL1) [15] Punch scraps conveyance motor (M7)
[8] Power relay /2 (RL2)
554
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
B. Z-folding/conveyance section
[8] [1]
[2]
[7]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[5]
15kvf5c002na
C. Punch section
[1] Punch motor (M4) [4] Paper edge sensor board (PESB)
[2] Punch clutch (CL1) [5] Punch switchover motor (M8)
[3] Punch home sensor (PS6) [6] Punch switchover switch (MS2)
555
18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
18.8 TU-502
bizhub PRO 950
A. Front side
[3]
[11]
[10]
[9] [4]
[8] [7] [6] [5] 15smf5c001na
[1] Scraps removal fan motor (M108) [9] Press motor (M105)
[2] Scraps box full LED (LED101) [10] Exit sensor (PS108)
[3] Entrance sensor (PS101) [11] Stacker interlock switch /1 (MS3)
[4] Scraps box full sensor (PS109) [12] Stacker interlock switch /2 (MS4)
[5] Blade motor (M102) [13] Stacker door sensor (PS114)
[6] Blade home switch (MS101) [14] Stacker full sensor (PS113)
[7] Front door interlock switch (MS2) [15] Pusher home sensor (PS112)
[8] Press home sensor (PS105) [16] Pusher motor (M107)
556
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
B. Rear side
[1]
[10]
[2]
[3]
[9]
[8] [4]
[7]
[6] [5]
15smf5c002na
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
15smf5c003na
557
18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
18.9 GP-501/MK-724
bizhub PRO 950
18.9.1 GP-501
[3]
[6]
[2]
[1]
[4] [5]
[1] Punch Controller PCB [4] Chip Tray Full Sensor (Unused)
[2] Power Supply [5] Back Gauge Solenoid
[3] Power Inlet [6] Punch Flag Sensor (S9)
1 558
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
[3]
[2]
[1]
[7]
[5]
[4]
559 1
18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
C. Right side 2
bizhub PRO 950
[1]
D. Front side
[1]
1 560
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
[2]
[1]
561 1
18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
[1]
[1]
1 562
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
563 1
18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
bizhub PRO 950
[1]
1 564
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
[2]
565 1
18. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
18.9.2 MK-724
bizhub PRO 950
[1]
a1ayf5c001ca
1 566
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 19. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
N.C
236 (BN : 3 pin)
424 (W : 5 pin) 226 (BN : 12 pin) 295 (BN : 10 pin)
N.C
37 (W : 8 pin)
290 (BN : 24 pin) 291 (BN : 18 pin)
323 (W : 8 pin) N.C 213 (BN : 34 pin)
N.C N.C
38 (W : 3 pin)
322 (W : 7 pin) N.C
218 (W : 6 pin)
567
19. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
125 (W : 4pin)
530 (W :3pin)
525 (W : 14 pin) 590 (BN : 8 pin) 527 (W : 7 pin) 520 (BN : 26 pin)
526 (W : 10 pin) 564 (BN : 6 pin) 57gaf5c041nb
568
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 19. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
D. AC drive board
35 (W : 5 pin)
36 (W : 10 pin)
411 (BN : 11 pin)
E. DC power supply /1
75 (W : 2 pin) 74 (W : 14 pin)
71 (W : 8 pin)
72 (W : 6 pin) 77 (W : 10 pin)
E (W : 3 pin)
76 (W : 4 pin)
73 (W : 12 pin) F (W : 3 pin)
2 (W : 3 pin)
57gaf5c043na
569
19. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
F. DC power supply /2
bizhub PRO 950
11 (W : 14 pin) 13 (W : 18 pin)
15 (W : 14 pin) 12 (W : 22 pin) 31 (W : 3 pin)
14 (W : 4 pin)
21 (W : 5 pin)
1-1 (W : 2 pin)
1-2 (W : 4 pin)
57gaf5c044na
620 (W : 3 pin)
621 (W : 3 pin)
623 (W : 7 pin)
622 (W : 4 pin)
250 (W : 3 pin)
251 (W : 11 pin)
57gaf5c046na
570
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 19. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
J. L4 inverter
L. Index board
51 (BN : 5 pin)
57gaf5c055na
571
19. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
M. CCD board
bizhub PRO 950
170 (W : 50 pin)
57gaf5c056na
P. NVRAM board
141 (W : 40 pin)
572
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 19. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
Q. IC board
1301 (N.C)
2101 (W : 8pin)
2603 (W : 4 pin)
2201 (W : 4pin)
2301 (BK : 7 pin)
2303 (W : 4 pin)
a0y5f5c016ca
573
19. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
454 (W : 4 pin)
a0y5f5c018ca
453 (W : 7 pin)
a0y5f5c019ca
574
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 19. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
V. Operation board /1
a03uf5c045ca
W. Operation board /2
712 (W : 6 pin)
a03uf5c046ca
X. Operation board /3
702(W:41pin)
701(W:4pin)
700(W:40pin)
708(W:4pin)
703(W:28pin)
a03uf5c047ca
575
19. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Y. OB inverter
bizhub PRO 950
576
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 19. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
19.2 DF-616
3 (W : 7 pin)
6 (W : 6 pin) 8 (GY : 24 pin)
2 (W : 8 pin) J2 (N.C.)
9 (W : 5 pin)
1 (W : 4 pin)
10 (W : 6 pin)
14 (W : 6 pin)
11 (W : 6 pin)
B. Tray board
12 (W : 9 pin)
11 (W : 6 pin)
13 (W : 3 pin)
15saf5c007na
577
19. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
19.3 LU-407/408
bizhub PRO 950
A. LU drive board
700 (W : 4 pin)
578
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 19. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
19.4 FS-528/611
1 (GR : 12 pin)
7 (W : 6 pin)
2 (W : 14 pin)
6 (W : 5 pin)
14 (W : 4 pin)
FS-611 only
SW1
ON
1 2 3 4
5 (BN : 30 pin)
6 (W : 30 pin)
10 (W : 8 pin)
8 (BN : 34 pin)
1 (BN : 40 pin)
579
19. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
5 (BN : 30 pin)
6 (W : 30 pin)
10 (W : 8 pin)
9 (W : 2 pin)
1 (BN : 40 pin)
7 (W : 28 pin)
3 (BN : 28 pin)
2 (BN : 22 pin)
15sjf5c006na
580
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 19. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
19.5 PI-506
58 (GY : 12 pin)
52 (GY : 38 pin)
54 (W : 8 pin)
15jff5c002na
B. PI operation board
1 (GY : 12 pin)
15jff5c003na
581
19. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
19.6 PK-504/505
bizhub PRO 950
25 (W : 7 pin)
15kjf5c003na
582
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 19. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
19.7 ZU-607
20 (24 pin)
5 (W : 24 pin)
1 2 3 4
11 (W : 4pin)
2:ON
ON
3:OFF
2 (W : 4 pin)
4:OFF
1 (W : 3 pin)
15kvf5c004nc
583
19. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
19.8 TU-502
bizhub PRO 950
403 (W : 5 pin)
401 (GY : 40 pin)
405 (W : 4 pin)
408 (W : 3 pin)
407 (W : 2 pin)
409 (W : 3 pin)
15smf5c004na
584
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 19. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
19.9 GP-501/MK-724
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
N.C.
81/2 / A4
Jumper connector *1
*1 Only for A4 base. On A4 base unit, jumper shorts 2 pins to designate A4 paper size to processor.
585 1
19. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
3 (BK : 6 pin)
4 (BK : 7 pin)
20 (N.C) 22 (N.C)
a1ayf5c002ca
1 586
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 20. RELAY CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
122 (BK : 2pin) 121 (BK : 4pin) 758 (W : 4pin) 631 (BK : 5pin) 601 (BK : 8pin)
172 (BK : 9pin) 173 (BK : 12pin) 470 (BK : 9pin) 160 (W : 6pin) 361 (BN : 10pin)
759 (W : 8pin) 472 (BK : 6pin) 487 (BK : 4pin) 60 (BK : 4pin) 360 (W : 2pin)
a0y5f5c020ca
587 1
20. RELAY CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
158 (BK : 6pin) 259 (W : 2pin) 88 (BK : 2pin) 170 (BK : 6pin) 682 (W : 2pin)
a0y5f5c021ca
1 588
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 20. RELAY CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
13 (W : 4pin) 18 (W : 3pin)
14 (W : 2pin)
305 (BK : 6pin) 51 (W : 1pin) 750 (W : 2pin)
17 (W : 2pin) 9 (W : 2pin)
a0y5f5c022ca
589 1
20. RELAY CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
D. Top side
bizhub PRO 950
21 (W : 2pin)
a0y5f5c023ca
1 590
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 20. RELAY CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
E. Right side
186 (W : 6pin)
591 1
20. RELAY CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
F. Left side
bizhub PRO 950
a0y5f5c025ca
1 592
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 20. RELAY CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
a0y5f5c026ca
593 1
20. RELAY CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
356 (W : 9pin)
1 594
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 20. RELAY CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
595 1
20. RELAY CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
J. Registration section
bizhub PRO 950
599 (W : 3pin)
a0y5f5c029ca
1 596
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 20. RELAY CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
K. Duplex section
730 (BK : 6pin) 542 (BK : 9pin) 545 (BK : 3pin) 568 (BK : 10pin)
541 (W : 2pin) 547 (BK : 10pin)
577 (W : 3pin)
616 (W : 3pin) 553 (W : 3pin) 599 (BK : 3pin) 547 (W : 3pin) 575 (BK : 3pin)
a0y5f5c030ca
597 1
20. RELAY CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
L. Fusing section
bizhub PRO 950
a0y5f5c031ca
1 598
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 21. TIMING CHART
Item
Scanner motor Forward
(M13) Reverse
Forward
Charge cleaning
motor (M23) Reverse
Transfer/separation Forward
cleaning motor (M18)
Reverse
Transfer/separation cleaning home
sensor (PS11)
Drum motor (M2)
Developing motor (M3)
Polygon motor (M17)
Laser drive board (LDB)
Paper lift motor /1 (M19)
Upper limit sensor /1 (PS20)
Paper lift motor /2 (M20)
Upper limit sensor /2 (PS21)
Paper lift motor /3 (M21)
Upper limit sensor /3 (PS22)
57gat2c008na
[1] Sub power switch (SW2) ON [5] Start of consumable stabilization control
[2] Initial communication between the overall [6] Start of image stabilization control (for the
control board (OACB) and the printer control drum potential correction control, the maxi-
board (PRCB) mum density adjustment control and the
[3] Shading correction starts gamma correction control)
[4] The fusing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) and [7] Warming-up completed
the fusing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) get
to the specified temperature
Note
• Each operation varies with the software DIPSW setting in the service mode and the environmental
conditions.
• The power is turned ON with DF closed.
• The power is turned ON with the tray lift plate brought down.
599
bizhub PRO 950
600
Item
21.1.2
(M6) L
Paper exit motor H
(M10) L
H
Reverse/exit L
motor (M5) F
R
H
ADU reverse L
motor (M7) F
R
ADU conveyance H
motor /1 (M8) L
Paper feed clutch /1 (CL3)
paper feed tray 1
57gaf5c800nb
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
A. Operation conditions: A4, 2 single sided originals, single sided copy (1 copy), reversed paper exit,
Item
21.1.3
(M6) L
Paper exit motor H
(M10) L
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
H
Reverse/exit L
motor (M5) F
R
H
ADU reverse L
motor (M7) F
R
ADU conveyance H
motor /1 (M8) L
Paper feed clutch /1 (CL3)
paper feed tray 1
Charging
Transfer
Separation
Developing bias
Guide plate bias
57gaf5c801nb
21. TIMING CHART
601
A. Operation conditions: A4, 2 single sided originals, double sided copy (1 copy), straight paper exit,
602
21.2.1
Item
DOWN
Tray upper limit sensor (PS315)
21.2 DF-616
R
615 mm/s
615 mm/s
F
400 mm/s
Original paper exit 250 mm/s
motor /1 (M304) 400 mm/s
R
450 mm/s
615 mm/s
Original reverse sensor (PS309)
Original exit sensor /Lt (PS307)
A. Operation conditions: A4, life size, 3 single sided originals
615 mm/s
F 400 mm/s
Original paper exit 250 mm/s
motor /2 (M305) 250 mm/s
R 400 mm/s
615 mm/s
Original reverse/exit sensor (PS313)
Original exit sensor /Rt (PS314)
Gate solenoid (SD303)
V-VALID
15saf5c800na
ON scan scan scan
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
21.2.2
Item
800 mm/s
Original feed motor F
(M302) 400 mm/s
R 550 mm/s
Original registration sensor (PS306)
615 mm/s
615 mm/s
F
400 mm/s
Original paper exit 250 mm/s
motor /1 (M304) 400 mm/s
R
450 mm/s
615 mm/s
Original reverse sensor (PS309)
Original exit sensor /Lt (PS307)
A. Operation conditions: A4, life size, 3 double sided originals
615 mm/s
F 400 mm/s
Original paper exit 250 mm/s
motor /2 (M305) 250 mm/s
R 400 mm/s
615 mm/s
Original reverse/exit sensor (PS313)
Original exit sensor /Rt (PS314)
Gate solenoid (SD303)
V-VALID
Start button Page 1 Page 1 Page 2 Page 2 Page 3 Page 3 Final paper feed is completed
15saf5c801na
ON side one scan side two side one scan side two side one scan side two scan
scan scan
21. TIMING CHART
603
bizhub PRO 950
21. TIMING CHART Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
21.3 LU-407/408
bizhub PRO 950
Loop
Pre-registration
Pre-registration
Pick-up sole-
noid (SD100)
Feed clutch
Paper feed
Item
(PS107)
(PS106)
(CL101)
(CL102)
(M101)
LU exit
sensor
sensor
clutch
motor
15ssf5c800na
604
Item
FS entrance sensor (PS4)
21.4.1
Print start signal Copy 1 Page 1 Copy 1 Page 2 Copy 1 Page 3 Copy 1 Page 51 Copy 1 Page 52 Copy 2 Page 1
Item
FS entrance sensor (PS4)
FS conveyance motor (M1)
Bypass gate solenoid (SD5)
Stacker entrance sensor (PS5)
Stacker entrance motor (M13)
Paper assist motor (M51)
Paper assist solenoid (SD51)
Alignment motor / Close
Up (M5) Open
Stapler movement motor (M11)
Stapler motor /Fr (M14)
Stapler motor /Rr (M9)
Paper exit motor (M8)
Paper exit home sensor /2 (PS100)
Paper exit belt home sensor (PS9)
Main tray paper exit sensor (PS6)
Paper exit opening solenoid (SD4)
Stacker empty sensor (PS20)
Paper exit belt 800 mm/s
motor (M400) 670 mm/s
253 mm/s
A. Operation conditions: 2 flat stitching staples, A4, 52 single-sided originals, 2 copies
15sff5c801nb
Copy 2 Page 50 Copy 2 Page 51 Copy 2 Page 52
21. TIMING CHART
605
bizhub PRO 950
bizhub PRO 950
606
21.4.2
21. TIMING CHART
Item
Item
15sjf5c800na
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
21.4.3
Item
FS entrance sensor (PS4)
FS conveyance motor (M1)
Bypass gate solenoid (SD5)
Stacker entrance sensor (PS5)
Stacker entrance motor (M13)
Paper assist motor (M51)
Paper assist solenoid (SD51)
B. TIMING CHART
Print start signal Copy 1 Page 1 Copy 1 Page 2 Copy 1 Page 9 Copy 1 Page 10 Copy 1 Page 11 Copy 2 Page 1 Copy 2 Page 2 Copy 2 Page 3 Copy 2 Page 4
Copy 1 Page 3
Item
FS entrance sensor (PS4)
FS conveyance motor (M1)
Bypass gate solenoid (SD5)
Stacker entrance sensor (PS5)
Stacker entrance motor (M13)
Paper assist motor (M51)
Pape assist solenoid (SD51)
Close Alignment motor /Up
Open (M5)
motor (M400)
253 mm/s
Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor (PS7)
UP Main tray up lift motor
DOWN (M3)
670 mm/s Paper exit roller
253 mm/s motor (M7)
15sjf5c801nb
Copy 1 Page 9 Copy 1 Page 10 Copy 1 Page 11
21. TIMING CHART
607
bizhub PRO 950
bizhub PRO 950
608
21.4.4
Item
FS entrance sensor (PS4)
FS conveyance motor (M1)
21. TIMING CHART
close
Alignment motor /Up (M5)
open
Alignment home sensor /Lw (PS24)
Alignment motor /Lw (M16)
close
open
Stapler, Clincher motor /Fr (M14, M15)
A
Stapler, Clincher motor /Rr (M9, M10)
Saddle stitching stopper home sensor (PS23)
Saddle stitching stop- down
per motor (M18) up
Folding transfer motor 400 mm/s
(M20) 80 mm/s
Folding paper exit sensor (PS25)
Folding blade motor (M19)
Folding blade home sensor (PS22)
Folding passage sensor (PS26)
Paper exit home sensor (PS12)
Paper exit motor (M8)
Side stitch stopper solenoid /Fr, /Rr (SD7, SD8)
Item
FS entrance sensor (PS4)
FS conveyance motor (M1)
Timing chart of the saddle stitching mode (FS-611)
15sjf5c802na
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Item
21.4.5
1000 mm/s
Stacker entrance motor (M13)
500 mm/s
A
Folding passage sensor (PS26)
Folding blade motor (M19)
Folding blade home sensor (PS22)
FS conveyance motor (M1)
Saddle stitching stopper motor down
(M18) up
Tri-folding gate solenoid (SD6)
Folding transfer motor (M20)
Folding paper exit sensor (PS25)
Side stitch stopper solenoid /Fr, /Rr (SD7, SD8)
Item
Paper exit belt motor (M400)
Paper exit belt home sensor (PS9)
FS entrance sensor (PS4)
Gate motor (M12)
close
Alignment motor /Up (M5)
open
close
Alignment motor /Lw (M16)
open
Stacker entrance sensor (PS5)
1000 mm/s Stacker entrance motor
500 mm/s (M13)
A
Folding passage sensor (PS26)
Folding blade motor (M19)
Folding blade home sensor (PS22)
A. Operation conditions: Tri-folding mode, A4S, 3 single-sided originals, 2 copies
15sjf5c803na
21. TIMING CHART
609
bizhub PRO 950
bizhub PRO 950
610
A.
21.5.1
21. TIMING CHART
21.5 PI-506
B. TIMING CHART
Item
15jff5c800na
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
21.6.1
B. TIMING CHART
21.6 PK-504/505
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Item
(M802) Rr
Punch motor (M801)
Punch home sensor (PS801)
15kjf5c800na
21. TIMING CHART
611
bizhub PRO 950
bizhub PRO 950
612
21.7.1
21. TIMING CHART
21.7 ZU-607
B. TIMING CHART
Item
15kvf5c800na
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
21.8.1
21.8 TU-502
B. TIMING CHART
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Item
Copy 1 Copy 2
15smf5c800na
21. TIMING CHART
613
bizhub PRO 950
bizhub PRO 950
614
21.8.2
21. TIMING CHART
B. TIMING CHART
Item
Copy 1 Copy 2
15smf5c801na
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
I
L
F
P
K
E
B
A
N
H
D
C
O
G
1
1
Plug
Outlet
Plug
2
2
1/3_DCPS2_CN13_135
1/3_DCPS2_CN13_119
M24
3
3
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
RCDB
CBR
CBR
Circuit breaker
RC-501
1/3 T1_CN12_307
4
4
Triac /2
Triac /1
1/3_AC_H_FT21_306
UNIT
TRC2
TRC1
22. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
1/3_DCPS2_CN12_51
1/3_DCPS2_CN12_53
1/3_DCPS2_CN13_126
PRCB (1/3)
1/3_DCPS2_CN13_128
SCANNER
1/3_DCPS2_CN12_59
SDB
1/3_DCPS2_CN12_60
1/3_DCPS2_CN13_58
1/3_DCPS2_CN13_129
NF1
Noise filter /1
5
5
PS5
1/3_DCPS2_CN15_201
L4
1/3_FUSING_CN442_355
1/3_FUSING_CN442_353
1/3_FUSING_CN442_510
1/3_FUSING_CN440_354
1/3_FUSING_CN440_352
1/3_DCPS2_CN15_200
L4 INVB
Exposure lamp
1/3_DCPS1_CN14_38 3/3_HTR1_15
1/3_DCPS2_CN11_79 3/3_HTR1_130
1/3_AC_N_357
1/3_AC_N_356
1/3_DCPS2_CN12_103 3/3_HTR2_16
NF2
1/3_DCPS2_CN11_86 3/3_HTR2_131
6
6
2/3_OACB_CN137_7_315
1/3_DCPS2_CN12_111 3/3_HTR3_17
Noise filter /2
FM7
3/3_LU_HT_CN753_18
3/3_LU_HT_CN753_133
1/3_DCPS2_CN12_118
T1
1/3_DCPS2_CN12_117
T2
Scanner motor
M13
Transformer /1
Transformer /2
1/3_MS2_CN81_221
7
7
1/3_PRCB_CN74_68
1/3_MS2_CN81_220
1/3_DCPS1_CN77_69
Fusing temperature
UNIT
TH1
sensor /1
FUSING
Fusing temperature
TH2
sensor /2
8
8
SW1
1/3_AC_N_CN11_307
Fusing temperature
TH3
Main power switch
sensor /3
1/3_FUSING_CN450_500
1/3_AC_H_CN11_306
M11
(US only)
TH4
sensor /4 RL1
Coil
1/3_ACDB_CN400_6
TONER SUPPLY
9
9
PS2
2/3_OACB_CN138_8
sensor Toner bottle motor 2/3_OACB_CN138_7
M15
Dehumidification heater switch
sensor RL2
Web motor
M16
10
10
Ferrite
11
11
Ferrite
1\3_DCPS2_CN82_227
(JAPAN,EU only)
TONER SUPPLY
1/3_DCPS2_CN13_132
1/3_DCPS2_CN13_124
12
12
Toner remaining
sensor
PZS
13
13
1/3_DCPS2_CN12_104
Developing motor
M3
1/3_PRCB_CN200_79
1/3_DCPS1_CN80_74 3/3_ADUDB_CN532_80
1/3_DCPS1_CN77_75
14
14
1/3_MS2_CN81_223 2/3_OACB_CN101_162
2/3_DF_CN758_82
Ferrite
3/3_LU_CN753_141
1/3_DCPS1_CN71_142 2/3_OACB_CN100_30
1/3_MS2_CN81_224 2/3_OACB_CN101_81 2/3_OACB_CN100_31
2/3_OACB_CN100_32
2/3_OACB_CN101_161 2/3_OACB_CN100_33
Drum motor 2/3_OACB_CCD_CN101_84 2/3_OACB_CN100_34
M2
2/3_OACB_CCD_CN101_85 2/3_OACB_CN100_35
1/3_DCPS1_CN77_73 1/3_PRCB_CN200_86
3/3_ADUDB_CN532_88
2/3_OACB_CN101_87
2/3_OACB_CN101_166
2/3_OACB_HDD_CN101_167
2/3_DF_CN758_90
3/3_LU_CN753_89
15
15
2/3_OACB_CN100_36
Fusing motor
2/3_OACB_CCD_CN101_92
M1
1/3_MS2_CN81_225 2/3_OACB_CN100_42
FM32
2/3_OACB_CN107_380
16
16
3/3_ADDBU_CN532_95
3/3_FS_CN758_48
Coin vendor
2/3_DF_CN758_49
3/3_ADUDB_CN532_50
3/3_FS_CN758_54
1/3_SDB_CN600_51 2/3_DF_CN755_55
1/3_SDB_CN600_53 3/3_ADUDB_CN532_56
1/3_PRCB_CN301_68
3/3_ADUDB_CN532_101
3/3_PMDB_CN172_52
1/3_PRCB_CN200_103 3/3_LU_CN753_98
Cooling fan /1
17
17
1/3_M3_CN183_104 3/3_LU_CN753_115
FM26
3/3_ADUDB_CN532_105
3/3_ADUDB_CN532_107
Cooling fan /2
3/3_ADUDB_CN532_110
FM27
1/3_PRCB_CN200_111
Power supply cooling fan /2
3/3_ADUDB_CN532_112
1/3_PRCB_CN300_117
1/3_PRCB_CN300_118
FM31 FM30
18
18
1/3_RCDB_CN360_119
Cooling
fan /4 1/3_M15_CN470_124
FM12
3/3_M4_CN306_125
1/3_SDB_CN600_126 3/3_M4_CN306_64
2/3_HV1_CN255_127
1/3_SDB_CN600_128 3/3_M4_CN306_66
Write unit
1/3_SDB_CN600_129
cooling fan /1
FM5
1/3_M15_CN470_132
2/3_Status indicator
19
19
lamp_CN160_377 1/3_SDB_CN600_58
2/3_Status indicator
lamp_CN160_378 3/3_FM9_CN172_313 Write unit
1/3_RCDB_CN360_135
3/3_FM9_CN172_312
cooling fan /2
FM8
1/3_PRCB_CN401_69
2/3_HV1_CN255_70
1/3_M1_CN181_71
3/3_PRCB_CN222_308
3/3_PRCB_CN222_333
3/3_PRCB_CN222_309
3/3_PRCB_CN222_310
3/3_PRCB_CN222_311
1/3_M1_CN181_72
1/3_PRCB_CN200_38 1/3_M2_CN158_73
3/3_FS_CNFNS_138 1/3_M3_CN183_74
3/3_FS_CN755_76
3/3_FS_CN755_77
20
20
1/3_M1_CN181_225
1/3_M2_CN180_224
1/3_M3_CN183_223
2/3_HV/1_CN255_222
1/3_PRCB_CN301_221
1/3_PRCB_CN401_220
2/3_DPSB_SENSOR_CN340_136
2/3_DPSB_SENSOR_CN340_123
1/3_RL1_24V_CN90_5 1/3_PRCB_CN201_200
key counter
2/3_OACB_CN138_152
DCPS2
DCPS1
2/3_OACB_CN138_97 2/3_OACB_CN138_151
2/3_OACB_CN138_100 2/3_OACB_CN138_155
2/3_OACB_CN138_154
2/3_OACB_CN138_153
2/3_OACB_CN138_106
21
21
ACDB
TS1
Thermostat /1
22
22
1/3_RL1_500
1/3_TRC2_CN16_353
1/3_TRC1_CN15_352
FUSING UNIT
L1
Fusing heater lamp /1
L2
MS2
MS1
Interlock switch /2
Interlock switch /1
1/3_M15_CN470_227
L3
3/3_ADUDB_CN501_226
TS2
Fusing heater lamp /3 Thermostat /2
Sheet No.
1/3_TRC2_T1_510
1/3_AC_N_CN16_357
1/3_AC_N_CN15_356
1/3_TRC2_G_CN16_355
1/3_TRC1_G_CN15_354
24
24
Relay connector
Same Sheet
DESCRIPTION
Different Sheet
Destination name
Destination No.
I
L
F
P
K
E
B
A
N
H
D
C
O
G
M
22. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
A
SW
LED
DATA
LED VR
OB2 IC A
HDD2
OKB
Backlight /2
B B
IC cooling fan
FM28
APS sensor /2
APS sensor /1
C OB3 PS62 PS63
C
1/3_L4_INVB_H/L_315
Status indicator
lamp
Ferrite
ICB
D Ferrite
D
Power
switch
SW2
Ferrite
HDD1 CCDB
PCI RB
1/3_DCPS2_CN11_90
1/3_DCPS2_CN11_82
1/3_DCPS1_CN74_55
1/3_DCPS1_CN74_49
Ferrite
1/3_DCPS1_CN74_380
1/3_DCPS1_CN74_379 Ferrite
E 1/3_ACDB_CN435_378
1/3_ACDB_CN435_377 E
1/3_DCPS1_CN72_35
1/3_DCPS1_CN72_34
1/3_DCPS1_CN72_33
1/3_DCPS1_CN72_32
1/3_DCPS1_CN72_31
1/3_DCPS1_CN72_30
NRB
1/3_DCPS1_CN73_42
1/3_DCPS1_CN73_36
F F
1/3_DCPS2_CN11_85
1/3_DCPS2_CN11_171
1/3_DCPS1_CN11_84
1/3_DCPS1_CN11_92
1/3_DCPS1_CN11_81
1/3_DCPS1_CN11_161
OACB(1/2)
1/3_DCPS1_CN11_87
1/3_DCPS1_CN11_166
1/3_DCPS1_CN11_167
1/3_DCPS1_CN11_162
G G
1/3_DCPS2_CN15_106
1/3_DCPS1_CN71_155
1/3_DCPS1_CN71_154
1/3_DCPS1_CN71_153
1/3_DCPS1_CN71_152
1/3_DCPS1_CN71_151
1/3_DCPS2_CN15_100
1/3_DCPS2_CN15_97
1/3_RL2_CN80_8
1/3_RL2_CN90_7
H H
I
Ferrite
HV1 PRCB(2/3) I
1/3_MS2_CN81_222
1/3_DCPS2_CN13_127
1/3_DCPS1_CN77_70
J J
FM19
L L
TEM/HUM
Temperature-humidity sensor
M M
FM14 FM13 FM18
Cooling fan /5
Paper exit cooling fan /Lw2
FM17 FM15
Paper exit cooling fan /Up2
TH5
Drum temperature
sensor
N N
IDCB JAMB
O O
DESCRIPTION
DPSB
Destination name
M23
PS31 PS30
Charge cleaning
Blade sensor /1
sensor /1
Positive lock receptacle
Erase lamp
motor
Relay connector
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
22. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Main body location list
bizhub PRO 950
L
F
K
E
B
P
N
H
D
C
A
O
G
1
1
1/3_DCPS1_CN76_64
1/3_DCPS1_CN76_66
1/3_DCPS2_CN13_125
M4
2
2
HV2
22.3 Main body 3/3
3
3
Dehumidification heater /1
motor /1
3/3_PS33_5V_317 3/3_PS26_5V_319 3/3_PS47_5V_321
HTR1
M19 CL3
clutch /1 Paper size
3/3_PRCB_SGND_324
sensor /Rr1
Pre-registration 3/3_PRCB_5V_317
clutch /1
CL4
Paper size
3/3_PRCB_SGND_325
sensor /Fr1
4
4
Pick-up 3/3_PRCB_SGND_326
Pre-registration
SD8
solenoid /1
1/3_T1_15 3/3_PRCB_5V_318 sensor /1
1/3_T1_130
Tray lock 3/3_PRCB_5V_319
3/3_PRCB_SGND_327 sensor /1
PS32 PS33 PS48 PS26
3/3_PRCB_5V_320
Upper limit
3/3_PRCB_SGND_328 sensor /1
3/3_PRCB_SGND_329
Paper feed
3/3_PRCB_5V_321 sensor /1
5
5
3/3_PRCB_5V_322
Handle release
3/3_PRCB_SGND_330 sensor /1
3/3_PRCB_5V_323
Remaining paper
3/3_PRCB_SGND_331 sensor /1
3/3_PRCB_SGND_332
Paper size VR/1
PS20 PS47 PS14 PS34 VR1
6
6
FM11
3/3_PS35_SGND_343 3/3_PS50_SGND_345 3/3_PS21_SGND_347 3/3_PS15_SGND_349
3/3_PS36_SGND_344 3/3_PS27_SGND_346 3/3_PS49_SGND_348 3/3_PS37_SGND_350
ADU cooling fan /1 3/3_VR2_SGND_351
FM10
TRAY2
3/3_PS15_5V_341
Paper lift
3/3_PS35_5V_335 3/3_PS50_5V_337 3/3_PS21_5V_339 3/3_PS37_5V_342
Dehumidification heater /2
PS57
3/3_PRCB_SGND_343
sensor /Rr2
Pre-registration 3/3_PRCB_5V_336
7
7
clutch /2
CL6
PS8
Pick-up 3/3_PRCB_SGND_345
Pre-registration
SD9
solenoid /2
1/3_T1_16 3/3_PRCB_5V_337 sensor /2
1/3_T1_131
Fusing fan /2
Tray lock 3/3_PRCB_5V_338
FM4
Paper empty
SD6
solenoid /2
3/3_PRCB_SGND_346 sensor /2
PS35 PS36 PS50 PS27
Fusing fan /1
3/3_PRCB_5V_339
FM1
Upper limit
3/3_PRCB_SGND_347 sensor /2
8
8
3/3_PRCB_SGND_348
Reverse/exit solenoid Paper feed
SD2
3/3_PRCB_5V_340 sensor /2
3/3_PRCB_5V_341
Handle release
3/3_PRCB_SGND_349 sensor /2
Transfer/separation 3/3_PRCB_5V_342
cleaning limit sensor Remaining paper
PS12
3/3_PRCB_SGND_350 sensor /2
3/3_PRCB_SGND_351
Transfer/separation Paper size VR/2
cleaning home sensor
PS21 PS49 PS15 PS37 VR2
PS11
9
9
PS45
3/3_PS38_SGND_368 3/3_PS52_SGND_370 3/3_PS22_SGND_372 3/3_PS16_SGND_374
3/3_PS39_SGND_369 3/3_PS28_SGND_371 3/3_PS51_SGND_373 3/3_PS40_SGND_375
Registration 3/3_VR3_SGND_376
sensor
PS44
TRAY3
3/3_PS16_5V_366
3/3_PS38_5V_360 3/3_PS52_5V_362 3/3_PS22_5V_364 3/3_PS40_5V_367
Transfer assist home Paper lift
Dehumidification heater /3
PS64
3/3_PRCB_5V_360
HTR3
10
10
3/3_PRCB_5V_361
Pre-registration Paper size s
clutch /3 3/3_PRCB_SGND_369
CL8
ensor /Fr3
Centering sensor 3/3_PRCB_SGND_370
Pre-registration
PS1
Pick-up
1/3_T1_17 3/3_PRCB_5V_362 sensor /3
SD10
solenoid /3
3/3_PRCB_5V_363
PRCB(3/3)
SD7
solenoid /3
3/3_PRCB_5V_364
1/3_T1_132 Upper limit
3/3_PRCB_SGND_372 sensor /3
11
11
SD3
Paper feed
3/3_PRCB_5V_365 sensor /3
1/3_MS2_CN80_226
1/3_DCPS2_CN11_88
1/3_DCPS2_CN11_80
1/3_DCPS2_CN21_95
1/3_DCPS1_CN74_56
1/3_DCPS1_CN74_50
1/3_DCPS2_CN12_112
1/3_DCPS2_CN12_110
1/3_DCPS2_CN12_105
1/3_DCPS2_CN12_107
1/3_DCPS2_CN12_101
3/3_PRCB_5V_366
Handle release
3/3_PRCB_SGND_374 sensor /3
3/3_PRCB_5V_367
Remaining paper
3/3_PRCB_SGND_375 sensor /3
ADUDB
3/3_PRCB_SGND_376
Paper size VR/3
PS22 PS51 PS16 PS40 VR3
12
12
13
13
PS10
ADU reverse
sensor /2
PS13
ADU conveyance Paper size sensor /Fr4
PS9
sensor
14
14
ADU deceleration
sensor Paper size VR/Bypass
PS59
PS55 PS56 VR4
ADU pre-registration
sensor
PS60
ADU reverse Paper empty sensor /Bypass
sensor /1
PS58
15
15
PS46
Upper limit sensor /Bypass
PS29 PS43 PS23
FM23
16
16
Transfer exposure
lamp
EL2
Loop sensor
1/3_CN173_2_311
1/3_CN173_3_310
Door open/close sensor /3
1/3_CN173_9_308
PS54 PS18 PS53 PS19 PS17
CL10
Registration motor
M12
Polygon motor
PMDB
M17
19
19
1/3_DCPS1_CN75_62
1/3_DCPS1_CN75_63
1/3_DCPS1_CN74_52
1/3_ACDB_CN420_313
20
20
Transfer motor
M9
Polygon cooling fan
LDB
21
21
LU-407/408
1/3_T2_CN750_133
1/3_T2_CN750_18
1/3_DCPS1_CN74_115
1/3_DCPS2_CN11_89
1/3_DCPS2_CN11_141
OACB (2/2)
1/3_DCPS1_CN74_98
Reverse/exit motor
M5
Loop motor
M6
22
22
FS-528/611
23
23
1/3_DCPS1_CN74_48
1/3_DCPS2_CN14_138
Door open/close sensor /2 1/3_DCPS2_CN14_139
1/3_DCPS1_CN74_54
PS25
1/3_DCPS1_CN77_76
1/3_DCPS1_CN77_77
Relay connector
Same Sheet
24
24
DESCRIPTION
Different Sheet
Destination name
Destination No.
I
L
F
K
E
B
P
N
H
D
C
A
O
G
M
22. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
2/3_OACB_CN138_8
2/3_OACB_CN138_7
1/3_ACDB_CN400_6
1/3_ACDB_CN400_5
Main power switch
A SW1 A
Sub relay
Main relay
RL2
B
RL1
B
Plug
1
Circuit breaker Noise filter /1 Noise filter /2
Plug 2
NF2
CBR NF1
CBR
1/3_AC_H_CN11_306
1/3_FUSING_CN450_500
C 1/3_AC_N_356 C
1/3_AC_N_357
Coil 5
4
Transformer /2 6
T2
TONER SUPPLY
Toner remaining
TONER SUPPLY (JAPAN,EU only)
sensor
Toner bottle motor
Toner supply motor
PZS
E E
3/3_LU_HT_CN753_18
3/3_LU_HT_CN753_133
PZS
3/3_HTR1_130
3/3_HTR2_131
3/3_HTR3_132
3/3_HTR1_15
3/3_HTR2_16
3/3_HTR3_17
M11 M15
F F
Ferrite
Ferrite
G G
H H
1\3_DCPS2_CN82_227
1/3_DCPS2_CN13_132
1/3_DCPS2_CN13_124
10 9 7
18 17 16 15 14 13
12 11 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
22. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Main body location list
bizhub PRO 950
H
D
C
A
13
13
2
1
6
4
22.5 Main body 1/3-2
5
3
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
1/3_PRCB_CN200_79
3/3_ADUDB_CN532_80
14
14
2/3_OACB_CN101_162
2/3_DF_CN758_82
3/3_LU_CN753_141
1/3_DCPS1_CN71_142 2/3_OACB_CN100_30
2/3_OACB_CN101_81 2/3_OACB_CN100_31
2/3_OACB_CN100_32
2/3_OACB_CN101_161 2/3_OACB_CN100_33
2/3_OACB_CCD_CN101_84 2/3_OACB_CN100_34
2/3_OACB_CCD_CN101_85 2/3_OACB_CN100_35
1/3_PRCB_CN200_86
3/3_ADUDB_CN532_88
2/3_OACB_CN101_87
2/3_OACB_CN101_166
2/3_OACB_HDD_CN101_167
2/3_DF_CN758_90
3/3_LU_CN753_89
15
15
2/3_OACB_CN100_36
2/3_OACB_CCD_CN101_92
2/3_OACB_CCD_CN101_171 2/3_OACB_CN107_379
Power supply cooling fan /3
2/3_OACB_CN100_42
FM32
2/3_OACB_CN107_380
16
16
3/3_ADDBU_CN532_95
3/3_FS_CN758_48
2/3_DF_CN758_49
3/3_ADUDB_CN532_50
3/3_FS_CN758_54
1/3_SDB_CN600_51 2/3_DF_CN755_55
1/3_SDB_CN600_53 3/3_ADUDB_CN532_56
1/3_PRCB_CN301_68
3/3_ADUDB_CN532_101
3/3_PMDB_CN172_52
1/3_PRCB_CN200_103 3/3_LU_CN753_98
17
17
1/3_M3_CN183_104 3/3_LU_CN753_115
3/3_ADUDB_CN532_105
3/3_ADUDB_CN532_107
3/3_ADUDB_CN532_110
1/3_PRCB_CN200_111
Power supply cooling fan /2
3/3_ADUDB_CN532_112
1/3_SDB_CN600_59
1/3_SDB_CN600_60
1/3_PRCB_CN300_117
1/3_PRCB_CN300_118
FM31 FM30
18
18
1/3_M15_CN470_124
3/3_M4_CN306_125
1/3_SDB_CN600_126 3/3_M4_CN306_64
2/3_HV1_CN255_127
1/3_SDB_CN600_128 3/3_M4_CN306_66
1/3_SDB_CN600_129
1/3_M15_CN470_132
1/3_SDB_CN600_58
19
19
1/3_RCDB_CN360_135
1/3_PRCB_CN401_69
2/3_HV1_CN255_70
1/3_M1_CN181_71
1/3_M1_CN181_72
19
1/3_PRCB_CN200_38 1/3_M2_CN158_73
20
3/3_FS_CNFNS_138 1/3_M3_CN183_74
21
3/3_FS_CNFNS_139 1/3_M3_CN183_75
22
3/3_FS_CN755_76
23
3/3_FS_CN755_77
24
20
20
1/3_M1_CN181_225
1/3_M2_CN180_224
1/3_M3_CN183_223
2/3_HV/1_CN255_222
1/3_PRCB_CN301_221
1/3_PRCB_CN401_220
2/3_DPSB_SENSOR_CN340_136
2/3_DPSB_SENSOR_CN340_123
1/3_PRCB_CN201_200
1/3_PRCB_CN201_201 1/3_DCPS2_CN11_142
2/3_OACB_CN138_152
DCPS2
DCPS1
2/3_OACB_CN138_97 2/3_OACB_CN138_151
2/3_OACB_CN138_100 2/3_OACB_CN138_155
2/3_OACB_CN138_154
2/3_OACB_CN138_153
2/3_OACB_CN138_106
21
21
22
22
MS2
MS1
23
23
Interlock switch /2
Interlock switch /1
1/3_M15_CN470_227
3/3_ADUDB_CN501_226
24
24
F
E
B
H
D
C
A
G
22. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
L
K
P
N
O
M
1
1
22.6 Main body 1/3-3
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
2
2
1/3_DCPS2_CN13_135
1/3_DCPS2_CN13_119
3
3
RCDB
RC-501
4
4
UNIT
1/3_DCPS2_CN12_51
1/3_DCPS2_CN12_53
1/3_DCPS2_CN13_126
PRCB (1/8)
1/3_DCPS2_CN13_128
SCANNER
1/3_DCPS2_CN12_59
SDB
1/3_DCPS2_CN12_60
1/3_DCPS2_CN13_58
1/3_DCPS2_CN13_129
5
5
PS5
1/3_DCPS2_CN15_201
L4
1/3_DCPS2_CN15_200
L4 INVB
Exposure lamp
1/3_DCPS1_CN14_38
1/3_DCPS2_CN11_79
1/3_DCPS2_CN12_103
1/3_DCPS2_CN11_86
6
6
2/3_OACB_CN137_7_315
1/3_DCPS2_CN12_111
1/3_DCPS2_CN12_118
1/3_DCPS2_CN12_117
Scanner motor
M13
1/3_MS2_CN81_221
7
7
1/3_PRCB_CN74_68
1/3_MS2_CN81_220
1/3_DCPS1_CN77_69
Fusing temperature
UNIT
TH1
sensor /1
FUSING
Fusing temperature
TH2
sensor /2
8
8
Fusing temperature
TH3
sensor /3
Fusing temperature
TH4
sensor /4
9
9
Fusing exit
PS2
sensor
Fusing jam
PS3
sensor
Web motor
M16
10
10
18
17
16
15
14
11
11
13
12
12
L
K
P
N
O
M
22. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
L
K
P
N
O
M
7
8
9
10
11
13
13
12
22.7 Main body 1/3-4
1/3_DCPS2_CN12_104
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Developing motor
M3
1/3_DCPS1_CN80_74
1/3_DCPS1_CN77_75
14
14
1/3_MS2_CN81_223
Ferrite
1/3_MS2_CN81_224
Drum motor
M2
1/3_DCPS1_CN77_73
PRCB (2/8)
15
15
Fusing motor
M1
1/3_DCPS1_CN77_71
1/3_DCPS1_CN77_72
1/3_MS2_CN81_225
16
16
Coin vendor
Cooling fan /1
17
17
FM26
Cooling fan /2
FM27
Cooling
18
18
fan /3
FM6
Cooling
fan /4
FM12
Write unit
cooling fan /1
FM5
2/3_Status indicator
lamp_CN160_377
19
19
2/3_Status indicator
lamp_CN160_378 3/3_FM9_CN172_313 Write unit
3/3_FM9_CN172_312
cooling fan /2
FM8
3/3_PRCB_CN222_308
3/3_PRCB_CN222_333
3/3_PRCB_CN222_309
3/3_PRCB_CN222_310
3/3_PRCB_CN222_311
19
20
21
Total counter
TCT
22
23
24
20
20
1/3_RL1_24V_CN90_5
1/3_RL1_PGND_CN90_6
KCT
key counter
21
21
ACDB
TS1
Thermostat /1
22
22
1/3_RL1_500
1/3_TRC2_CN16_353
1/3_TRC1_CN15_352
FUSING UNIT
L1
Fusing heater lamp /1
L2
Fusing heater lamp /2
23
23
L3 TS2
Fusing heater lamp /3 Thermostat /2
Sheet No.
1/3_TRC2_T1_510
1/3_AC_N_CN16_357
1/3_AC_N_CN15_356
1/3_TRC2_G_CN16_355
1/3_TRC1_G_CN15_354
24
24
Relay connector
Same Sheet
DESCRIPTION
Different Sheet
Destination name
Destination No.
I
L
K
P
N
O
M
22. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
A
SW
LED
DATA
LED VR
OB2 A
OKB
Backlight /2
B B
C OB3 C
Ferrite
D D
Power
switch
SW2
Ferrite
HDD1 CCDB
Ferrite
1/3_DCPS1_CN74_380
1/3_DCPS1_CN74_379 Ferrite
E E
1/3_DCPS1_CN72_35
1/3_DCPS1_CN72_34
1/3_DCPS1_CN72_33
1/3_DCPS1_CN72_32
1/3_DCPS1_CN72_31
1/3_DCPS1_CN72_30
NRB
1/3_DCPS1_CN73_42
1/3_DCPS1_CN73_36
F F
1/3_DCPS2_CN11_85
1/3_DCPS2_CN11_171
1/3_DCPS1_CN11_84
1/3_DCPS1_CN11_92
1/3_DCPS1_CN11_81
1/3_DCPS1_CN11_161
OACB(1/3)
1/3_DCPS1_CN11_87
1/3_DCPS1_CN11_166
1/3_DCPS1_CN11_167
1/3_DCPS1_CN11_162
G G
1/3_DCPS2_CN15_106
1/3_DCPS1_CN71_155
1/3_DCPS1_CN71_154
1/3_DCPS1_CN71_153
1/3_DCPS1_CN71_152
1/3_DCPS1_CN71_151
1/3_DCPS2_CN15_100
1/3_DCPS2_CN15_97
1/3_RL2_CN80_8
1/3_RL2_CN90_7
H H
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
22. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Main body location list
bizhub PRO 950
A IC A
HDD2
DF-616
B B
IC cooling fan
FM28
APS sensor /1
APS sensor /2
C C
PS62 PS63
1/3_L4_INVB_H/L_315
Status indicator
lamp
ICB
D Ferrite
D
PCI RB
1/3_DCPS2_CN11_90
1/3_DCPS2_CN11_82
1/3_DCPS1_CN74_55
1/3_DCPS1_CN74_49
E 1/3_ACDB_CN435_378
1/3_ACDB_CN435_377 E
F
OACB (2/3) F
G G
H 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42
H
25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
22. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Main body location list
bizhub PRO 950
I HV1
PRCB (3/8)
I
Ferrite
1/3_MS2_CN81_222
1/3_DCPS2_CN13_127
1/3_DCPS1_CN77_70
J J
FM19
L L
TEM/HUM
Temperature-humidity sensor
M M
FM14 FM13 FM18
Cooling fan /5
Paper exit cooling fan /Lw2
O O
P P
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
22. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Main body location list
bizhub PRO 950
25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43
PRCB(2/3)
I
J J
K 1/3_DCPS2_CN343_123
1/3_DCPS2_CN343_136 K
L L
M M
TH5
Drum temperature
sensor
N N
IDCB JAMB
O O
DESCRIPTION
DPSB
Destination name
Drum claw solenoid
Same Sheet
PS42 PS41
Charge cleaning limit sensor
Different Sheet
M23
P PS31 PS30
Charge cleaning
Blade sensor /1
sensor /1
Relay connector
motor
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
22. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Main body location list
bizhub PRO 950
C
A
H
D
1
1
22.12 Main body 3/3-1
1/3_DCPS1_CN76_64
1/3_DCPS1_CN76_66
1/3_DCPS2_CN13_125
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
M4
2
2
PRCB (5/8)
3
3
Dehumidification heater /1
motor /1
3/3_PS33_5V_317 3/3_PS26_5V_319 3/3_PS47_5V_321
HTR1
M19 CL3
clutch /1 Paper size
3/3_PRCB_SGND_324
sensor /Rr1
Pre-registration 3/3_PRCB_5V_317
clutch /1
CL4
Paper size
3/3_PRCB_SGND_325
sensor /Fr1
4
4
Pick-up 3/3_PRCB_SGND_326
Pre-registration
SD8
solenoid /1
1/3_T1_15 3/3_PRCB_5V_318 sensor /1
1/3_T1_130
Tray lock 3/3_PRCB_5V_319
3/3_PRCB_SGND_327 sensor /1
PS32 PS33 PS48 PS26
3/3_PRCB_5V_320
Upper limit
3/3_PRCB_SGND_328 sensor /1
3/3_PRCB_SGND_329
Paper feed
3/3_PRCB_5V_321 sensor /1
5
5
3/3_PRCB_5V_322
Handle release
3/3_PRCB_SGND_330 sensor /1
3/3_PRCB_5V_323
Remaining paper
3/3_PRCB_SGND_331 sensor /1
3/3_PRCB_SGND_332
Paper size VR/1
PS20 PS47 PS14 PS34 VR1
6
6
3/3_PS15_5V_341
Paper lift
3/3_PS35_5V_335 3/3_PS50_5V_337 3/3_PS21_5V_339 3/3_PS37_5V_342
Dehumidification heater /2
7
7
clutch /2
CL6
Paper size
3/3_PRCB_SGND_344
sensor /Fr2
Pick-up 3/3_PRCB_SGND_345
Pre-registration
SD9
solenoid /2
1/3_T1_16 3/3_PRCB_5V_337 sensor /2
1/3_T1_131
solenoid /2
3/3_PRCB_SGND_346 sensor /2
PS35 PS36 PS50 PS27
3/3_PRCB_5V_339
Upper limit
3/3_PRCB_SGND_347 sensor /2
8
8
3/3_PRCB_SGND_348
Paper feed
3/3_PRCB_5V_340 sensor /2
3/3_PRCB_5V_341
Handle release
3/3_PRCB_SGND_349 sensor /2
3/3_PRCB_5V_342
Remaining paper
3/3_PRCB_SGND_350 sensor /2
3/3_PRCB_SGND_351
Paper size VR/2
PS21 PS49 PS15 PS37 VR2
9
9
3/3_PS16_5V_366
3/3_PS38_5V_360 3/3_PS52_5V_362 3/3_PS22_5V_364 3/3_PS40_5V_367
Paper lift
Dehumidification heater /3
3/3_PRCB_5V_361
Pre-registration Paper size s
clutch /3 3/3_PRCB_SGND_369
CL8
ensor /Fr3
3/3_PRCB_SGND_370
Pick-up Pre-registration
1/3_T1_17 3/3_PRCB_5V_362 sensor /3
SD10
solenoid /3
3/3_PRCB_5V_363
SD7
solenoid /3
3/3_PRCB_5V_364
1/3_T1_132 Upper limit
3/3_PRCB_SGND_372 sensor /3
11
11
3/3_PRCB_SGND_373
Paper feed
3/3_PRCB_5V_365 sensor /3
3/3_PRCB_5V_366
Handle release
3/3_PRCB_SGND_374 sensor /3
3/3_PRCB_5V_367
Remaining paper
3/3_PRCB_SGND_375 sensor /3
3/3_PRCB_SGND_376
Paper size VR/3
PS22 PS51 PS16 PS40 VR3
12
12
F
E
B
C
A
H
D
22. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
H
D
C
A
13
13
22.13 Main body 3/3-2
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
14
14
BY-PASS
PRCB (6/8)
Paper size VR/Bypass
15
15
16
16
Loop sensor
17
17
18
18
CL10
Polygon motor
PMDB
M17
1/3_DCPS1_CN75_62
19
19
1/3_DCPS1_CN75_63
1/3_DCPS1_CN74_52
1/3_ACDB_CN420_313
1/3_ACDB_CN420_312
20
20
FM9
Polygon cooling fan
LDB
21
21
LU-407/408
1/3_T2_CN750_133
1/3_T2_CN750_18
1/3_DCPS1_CN74_115
1/3_DCPS2_CN11_89
1/3_DCPS2_CN11_141
OACB (3/3)
1/3_DCPS1_CN74_98
22
22
INDEXB
WRITING
FS-528/611
23
23
1/3_DCPS1_CN74_48
1/3_DCPS2_CN14_138
1/3_DCPS2_CN14_139
1/3_DCPS1_CN74_54
1/3_DCPS1_CN77_76
1/3_DCPS1_CN77_77
24
24
F
E
B
H
D
C
A
G
22. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
PRCB (7/8)
I
1/3_DCPS1_CN74_50
1/3_DCPS2_CN12_101
J
1/3_DCPS2_CN11_80
1/3_DCPS2_CN12_107
1/3_DCPS2_CN11_88
J
1/3_DCPS2_CN12_110
1/3_DCPS2_CN12_105
1/3_DCPS2_CN12_112
1/3_DCPS1_CN74_56
1/3_MS2_CN80_226
1/3_DCPS2_CN21_95
K K
L
HV2 L
ADUDB (1/2)
M M
N N
O FM11 FM10 O
ADU cooling fan /2
SD2 SD3
Reverse/exit solenoid
Fusing solenoid
PS57 PS8
FM4 FM1
Reverse/exit sensor
PS12 PS11
Fusing fan /2
Fusing fan /1
PS45 PS64
PS1
Centering sensor
PS44
Registration
sensor
sensor
sensor
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
22. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
Main body location list
bizhub PRO 950
L
K
P
N
O
M
13
13
PS10
ADU reverse
sensor /2
22.15 Main body 3/3-4
PS13
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
ADU conveyance
PS9
sensor
14
14
ADU deceleration
sensor
PS59
PRCB(8/8)
ADU pre-registration
sensor
PS60
ADU reverse
sensor /1
PS58
15
15
PS46
ADU cooling fan /4
FM23
16
16
SD1
Transfer exposure
lamp
EL2
Transfer assist motor
M25
17
17
Transfer/separation
cleaning motor
M18
ADU cooling fan /5
18
18
FM25
Registration motor
M12
19
19
20
20
Transfer motor
M9
21
21
Reverse/exit motor
M5
Loop motor
M6
ADUDB(2/2)
22
22
23
23
Relay connector
Same Sheet
24
24
DESCRIPTION
Different Sheet
Destination name
Destination No.
I
L
K
P
N
O
M
22. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
22.16 DF
A A
To Main body
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
22. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
bizhub PRO 950
H
D
C
A
G
22.17 LU
1
1
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
2
2
Dehumidification
heater
761-1 753-5 750-1
3
3
HTR 101
761-2 753-6 750-2 Transformer/2
T2
753-4
700-2 P_GND 12-19 PGND
753-1
700-1 24V 12-2 24V
753-3
700-4 S-GND 11-11 SGND
753-2
700-3 5V 11-14 5V
DCPS2
745-1
CN722-3 5V
Lower limit sensor 745-2
CN722-2 DW_PS
745-3
CN722-1 S_GND 751-1-10
710-10 RXD 217-1 IO_DTXD
780-1 751-2-9
CN722-6 5V 710-9 5V 217-2 5V2
780-2 751-3-8
Remaining paper sensor/1 CN722-5 ZAN_PS1 710-8 CLK_DN 217-3 IO_DCLK
780-3 751-4-7
CN722-4 S_GND 710-7 S_GND 217-4 SGND
751-5-6
781-1 710-6 LATCH_DN 217-5 LCT_LATCH
CN722-9 5V 751-6-5
781-2 710-5 CLK_UP 217-6 IO_UCLK
Remaining paper sensor/2 CN722-8 ZAN_PS2 751-7-4
781-3 710-4 ERR 217-7 ERR_OUT4
PRCB
4
4
749-2-1
CN723-1 UPDWM_D1
749-1-2
5
5
CN721-1 5V
740-2 773-7-4
LU exit sensor CN721-2 CONV_PS
740-1 773-1-10
LUDB
Paper lift motor
CN721-8 S_GND
715-1
741-3
741-2 773-6-5
Main body
748-1 773-2-9
CN721-7 DW_SW
6
6
746-1
CN721-9 5V
Upper door open/close sensor 746-2
CN721-10 UPOP_PS
746-3
CN721-11 S_GND
765-1-2
CN721-12 24V
Paper feed clutch 765-2-1
CN721-13 CONVMC_CONT
766-1-2
CN721-14 24V
Pre-registration clutch 766-2-1
CN721-15 PREMC_CONT
PS106 PS107 PS108 PS109 PS110 SW100 PS100 CL101 CL102
767-1-2 773-10-1
CN721-16 24V
Pick-up solenoid 767-2-1 773-9-2
CN721-17 PICSD_CONT
SD100
771-1
774-2
Crimp
Symbol
Connector
9
9
Relay connector
I Faston
F
E
B
H
D
C
A
G
22. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
H
D
C
A
G
CN106-11
CN12-A1 M7/SD 24V
CN170-1 CN1-A1 24V CN4-A1 24V CN106-10
Folding blade CN4-A3 5V CN12-A2 M7/SD 24V
CN170-2 CN1-A2 24V CN4-A2 24V CN106-9
22.18 FS
M7
Saddle stiching CN171-1 3 CN190-1 CN1-A6 PGND CN4-A6 PGND CN106-5
CN4-A6 5V CN12-A7 M7 F/R
CN171-2 2 CN190-2 CN1-A7 PGND CN4-A7 PGND CN106-4
stopper home PS23 CN4-A5 PS23IN CN12-A8 M7 CLK
CN171-3 1 CN190-3 CN1-A8 PGND CN4-A8 PGND CN106-3
CN4-A4 GND CN12-A9 M7 S/S
sensor CN1-A9 PGND CN4-A9 PGND CN106-2
CN1-A10 M13CLK CN4-A10M13CLK CN12-A10 M7 S.GND
CN106-1
CN172-1 3 CN191-4 CN1-A11 M13RESET CN4-A11 M13RESET CN12-A11 M7 5V
Alignment home CN4-A9 5V
CN172-2 2 CN191-5 CN1-A12 SD51CONT CN4-A12 SD51CONT 3 1 CN131-3
PS24 CN4-A8 PS24IN CN12-A12 PS4 S.GND
CN172-3 1 CN191-6 CN1-A13 M4DRVA CN4-A13 M4DRVA 2 2 CN131-2
sensor /Lw CN4-A7 GND
1
CN12-A13 PS4 SIG
1
M16
CN150-5-2 CN7-A5 DRVB CN2-A3 PS9IN CN5-A3 PS9IN CN143-3
CN12-B16 PS18 S.GND
CN150-6-1 CN7-A6 DRVB CN2-A4 PS11IN CN5-A4 PS11IN CN143-2
CN12-B17 PS18 SIG PS18 Shift roller home sensor
CN2-A5 PS13IN CN5-A5 PS13IN CN143-1
2
2
CN151-2
CN12-B18 PS18 5V
CN7-A7 24V CN2-A6 PS14IN CN5-A6 PS14IN
CN151-5 CN2-A7 PS20IN CN5-A7 PS20IN CN111
CN7-A8 24V 6 1 BCOM
Saddle stiching CN151-4 CN7-A9 DRVA CN2-A8 F_CHP CN5-A8 F_CHP CN1-A1 HB/PM 24V
CN151-6 CN2-A9 R_CHP CN5-A9 R_CHP 5 2 ACOM
CN7-A10DRVA CN1-A2 HB/PM 24V
M18
stopper motor CN151-3 CN2-A10 M51F/R CN5-A10 M51F/R 1 6A
CN7-A11 DRVB CN1-A3 M12 DRVA Gate motor
CN151-1 3 4 A/
M12
M19
motor CN2-B5 F_LST CN5-B5 F_LST CN101-2 Shift roller motor
M2
Folding transfer CN153-5 CN2-B11 FAN_LD CN5-B11 FAN_LD (R_CD) CN1-B4 M8 DRV
CN7-B6 M20F/R
CN153-10
M20
motor CN7-B7 24V CN122
CN153-11 CN7-B8 24V 2 1
CN153-8 CN1-B5 SD4/5 24V
CN7-B9 P.GND CN1-B6 SD4 DRV 1 2 SD4 Paper exit opening solenoid
CN153-9 CN7-B10 P.GND
CN153-2 CN7-B11 S.GND
CN119
CN160-1-2 CN11-1 M21 OUT1A 4 1
Tri-folding gate CN7-B13 24V 2 3
CN160-2-1 CN11-2 M21 OUT1B
CN7-B14 SD6CONT
SD6
solenoid CN11-3 M21 OUT2A 1 4 Sub tray paper exit motor
M21
RB
CN146-1 CN100-2
A
Side stitch stopper CN8-1 HB/PM 24V
SD7 CN146-2 CN100-5
B
solenoid /Fr CN8-2 HB/PM 24V
CN100-1
CN8-3 M1 DRVA
3
3
FS conveyance motor
M1
CN100-3
CN8-4 M1 DRVA/
CN3-A1 NC CN9-A1 SUBIN5PI (NC) CN100-4
CN147-1 CN8-5 M1 DRVB
Side stitch stopper CN3-A2 SD6CONT CN9-A2 SD6CONT CN100-6
C
SD8 CN147-2 CN3-A3 PS22IN CN9-A3 PS22IN
CN8-6 M1 DRVB/
D
solenoid /Rr CN109-1
FS-611 only
CN3-A4 PS23IN CN9-A4 PS23IN CN200-11 5V
CN3-A5 PS24IN CN9-A5 PS24IN CN109-2
CN200-10 SGND
CN154-1-6 CN3-A6 PS25IN CN9-A6 PS25IN CN109-3
CN5-A1 24V CN200-9 M400 CONT
CN154-2-5 CN3-A7 PS26IN CN9-A7 PS26IN CN109-4
CN5-A2 24V CN200-8 M400 CLK
Clincher rotation CN154-5-2 CN3-A8 PS29IN CN9-A8 PS29IN CN109-5
CN5-A3 DRVA CN200-7 M400 F/R
CN154-6-1 CN3-A9 PS30IN CN9-A9 PS30IN CN109-6
M4
CN5-A4 DRVA CN200-6 M400 LD Paper exit belt motor
motor CN154-3-4 CN3-A10 SGND CN9-A10 BMSET CN109-7
CN5-A5 DRVB
M400
M15
CN178-1 CN5-B11 M15DRV2 CN3-B10 M20BLK CN9-B10 M20CONT (BLK) CN106-9
Clincher motor /Fr CN2-3 PGND
TRAY
4
4
CN5-B14 M10DRV2 CN14- 3 SD8 24V CN130-3 PS 3 Main tray lower limit sensor
M10
CN179-1 1 4 CN2-12 PS3 GND
D
M9
CN8-A3 M9DRV2 CN6-A6 DRVB 1 6
CN180-9 CN22- 8 FM2 GND
CN8-A4 M9DRV2
CN180-6 CN8-A5 5V
CN133-1
FSCB
M6
CN8-A15 DRVA CN16- 6
CN156-3-4
CN8-A16 DRVB CN491-14 CN491-2
CN156-4-3 CN43- 1 M106CONT CN401-A14 M106CONT
CN8-A17 DRVB CN16-9 CN491-15 CN491-1
CN43- 2 M106F/R CN401-A15 M106F/R
CN198-1-3 CN186-1 CN16-8 CN492-2 CN492-13
CN6-B3 5V Stacker CN43- 3 TU-OUT1-1 CN401-A17 TU-OUT1-1
CN198-2-2 CN186-2 CN16-7 CN492-3 CN492-12
CN6-B2 PS5IN PS 5 CN43- 4 TU-OUT1-2 CN401-A18 TU-OUT1-2
CN181-11 CN198-3-1 CN186-3 CN43- 5 N.C. CN493-11 CN493-11
CN8-B1 M14DRV1 CN6-B1 GND entrance sensor CN401-B20 N.C.
CN181-12 CN43- 6 N.C(SUBOUT4) CN493-10 CN493-10
CN8-B2 M14DRV1 CN401-B19 SUBOUT4
CN21- 1 CN492-7 CN492-8
5
5
M14
CN181-9 CN21- 2 CN43- 8
CN8-B4 M14DRV2 CN199-1-4 CN187-1 Stapler CN401-A20
CN181-6 CN8-B5 5V CN6-B6 5V
CN199-2-3 CN187-2 CN21- 3 CN42- 1 CN401-B15
F_LS CN181-3 CN8-B6 F_LS CN6-B5 PS11IN PS11 movement CN493-5 CN493-5
Stapler motor /Fr CN199-3-2 CN187-3 CN21- 4 CN42- 2 5V CN401-B14 5V
F_DHP CN181-5 CN8-B7 F_DHP-IN CN6-B4 GND CN493-7 CN493-7
CN181-2 CN199-4-1 home sensor CN42- 3 S.GND CN401-B16 S.GND
CN8-B8 F_CS CN42- 4 CN401-B17
CN181-4 CN21- 5
F_CST CN8-B9 F_CST-IN CN158-5 CN42- 5
CN181-1 CN8-B10 F_CD CN6-B10 24V
CN158-2 CN41-A1 M101CONT CN491-1 CN491-15
CN181-7 CN8-B11 S.GND CN6-B11 24V CN401-A1 M101CONT
CN158-4 Stacker entrance CN41-A2 M101CLK CN491-2 CN491-14
CN6-B12 DRVA CN401-A2 M101CLK
TUDB
open/close switch
MS1
switch
FA 1B
FA 1A
CN8-A2 M9DRV1 CN106-6 XRTS1 CN7-6 XRTS1 CN51-A4 SG CN231-A12 CN231-A8 CN52-A8 SG
CN180-2 CN231-A11 CN231-A9
M9
CN8-A5 5V CN33-A1 CA1 CN51-A7 MPI M F/R CN231-A9 CN231-A11 CN52-A11 MPI_M_FR
Stapler motor /Rr R_LS CN188-4 CN8-A6 R_LS CN231-A8 CN231-A12
CN188-2 CN33-A2 CA3 CN51-A8 MPI SD CONT CN52-A12 MPI_SD_CONT
R_DHP CN8-A7 R_DHP-IN CN33-A3 CA5 CN51-A9 MPI MC CONT CN231-A7 CN231-A13 CN52-A13 MPI_MC_CONT
CN188-6 CN8-A8 R_CS CN231-A6 CN231-A14
CN188-7 CN33-A4 CA7 CN51-A10 M203 P/S CN52-A14 M203 P/S
CN8-A9 R_CST-IN CN33-A5 CA9 CN51-A11 M203 CLK CN231-A5 CN231-A15 CN52-A15 M203 CLK
CN188-3 NC CN8-A10 R_CD CN231-A4 CN231-A16
CN188-5 NC CN33-A6 CA11 CN51-A12 M203 H/L CN52-A16 M203 H/L
CN8-A11 S.GND CN33-A7 CA13 CN231-A3 CN231-A17
CN51-A13 M203 LD CN52-A17 M203 LD
CN181-1 CN33-A8 CA15 CN51-A14 M203 F/R CN231-A2 CN231-A18 CN52-A18 M203 F/R
CN8-B1 M14DRV1 CN231-A1 CN231-A19
CN8-B2 M14DRV1 CN33-A9 CA17 CN51-A15 NC CN52-A19 5V
CN181-2 CN8-B3 M14DRV2 CN33-A10 GND CN231-B19 CN231-B1
M14
H
D
C
A
G
22. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
H
D
C
G
22.19 PI
1
1
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
2
2
PI INTERLOCK MS
MS201
CN200-1
CN57-1 5V
CN57-2 NC
CN200-3
CN57-3 M203 P/S
CN200-4
CN57-4 M203 CLK
CN200-5
CN231-A19 CN231-A1 CN57-5 M203 F/R
CN52-1 24V CN52-A1 24V CN200-6
CN231-A18 CN231-A2 CN57-6 M203 LD M203 PI CONVEYANCE MOTOR
CN52-2 24V CN52-A2 24V
CN231-A17 CN231-A3 CN57-7 NC
CN52-5 PG CN52-A3 PG CN200-8
CN231-A16 CN231-A4 CN57-8 PG
CN52-6 PG CN52-A4 PG CN200-9
CN231-A15 CN231-A5 CN57-9 PG
CN52-3 5V CN52-A5 5V CN200-10
CN231-A14 CN231-A6 CN57-10 24V
CN51-A1 5V CN52-A6 5V CN200-11
CN231-A13 CN231-A7 CN57-11 24V
CN52-4 SG CN52-A7 SG
CN51-A16 SG CN231-A12 CN231-A8
CN52-A8 SG
CN231-A11 CN231-A9
3
3
FNSCB
CN51-B1 MPI_S_IN1_1 CN231-B19 CN231-B1
CN251-1
CN52-B1 MPI_S_IN1_1 CN55-A1 PS201 5V
CN51-B2 MPI_S_IN1_2 CN231-B18 CN231-B2
CN203-2
CN52-B2 MPI_S_IN1_2 CN55-A9 PS201 IN
CN51-B3 MPI_S_IN2_1 CN231-B17 CN231-B3
CN251-3
PS201 PI PASSAGE SENSOR/Up
CN52-B3 MPI_S_IN2_1 CN55-B5 PS201 SG
CN51-B4 MPI_S_IN2_2 CN231-B16 CN231-B4
CN52-B4 MPI_S_IN2_2
CN51-B5 MPI_S_OUT1_1 CN231-B15 CN231-B5
CN52-B5 MPI_S_OUT1_1
CN51-B6 MPI S_OUT1_2 CN231-B14 CN231-B6 CN235-1 CN235-15 CN252-1
CN52-B6 MPI_S_OUT1_2 CN55-A2 PS202 5V
CN51-B7 MPI_S_OUT2_1 CN231-B13 CN231-B7 CN235-6 CN235-10 CN252-2
CN52-B7 MPI_S_OUT2_1 CN55-A10 PS202 IN PS202 NO SHEET SENSOR/Up
CN51-B8 MPI_S_OUT2_2 CN231-B12 CN231-B8 CN235-11 CN235-5 CN252-3
CN52-B8 MPI_S_OUT2_2 CN55-B6 PS202 SG
CN51-B9 MPI_OBOUT1_1 CN231-B11 CN231-B9
CN52-B9 MPI_OBOUT1_1
CN51-B10 MPI_OBOUT1_2 CN231-B10 CN231-B10 CN235-2 CN235-14 CN253-1
4
4
CN55-A6 NC
CN55-B2 NC
CN55-B10 NC
CN235-5 CN235-11 CN291-1
CN55-A7 VR201 5V
CN235-10 CN235-6 CN291-2
CN55-B3 VR201 IN VR201 SHEET SIZE VR/Up
CN235-15 CN235-1 CN291-3
CN55-B11 VR201 SG
CN55-B2 NC
CN55-B4 NC
CN55-B12 NC
5
5
CN256-1
CN53-A1 PS206 5V
CN256-2
CN53-A11 PS206 IN PS206 PI PASSAGE SENSOR/Lw
CN256-3
CN53-B 6 PS206 SG
CN237-1 CN237-3 CN259-1
CN53-A4 PS209 5V
CN237-2 CN237-2 CN259-2
CN53-A14 PS209 IN PS209 TRAY UPPER LIMIT SENSOR/Lw
CN237-3 CN237-1 CN259-3
CN53-B9 PS209 SG
6
6
CN53-A6 PS211 NC
CN53-B1 PS211 NC
CN53-B11 PS211 NC
CN53-A8 PS213 NC
CN53-B3 PS213 NC
CN53-B13 PS213 NC
7
7
CN53-A10 NC
CN53-B5 NC
CN53-B15 NC
CN232-1 CN299-1
CN58-1 5V
CN232-2 CN299-2
CN58-2 LED1
CN232-3 CN299-3
CN58-3 LED2
CN232-4 CN299-4
CN58-4 LED3
CN232-5 CN299-5
CN58-5 LED4
CN232-6 CN299-6
CN58-6 LED5
CN232-7 CN299-7
CN58-7 LED6
PIOB
CN232-8 CN299-8
CN58-8 LED7
CN232-9 CN299-9
CN58-9 SW201 IN
CN232-10 CN299-10
CN58-10 SW202 IN
CN232-11 CN299-11
CN58-11 SW203 IN
CN232-12 CN299-12
CN58-12 SG
8
8
Crimp
Symbol
Connector
9
9
Relay connector
Faston
I
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G
22. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
H
D
C
G
22.20 PK-504
1
1
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
2
2
3
3
CN62-A 1 5V CN63-A 1 5V
CN62-A 2 5V CN63-A 2 5V
CN62-A 3 CN63-A 3 OUT-1
CN62-A 4 CN63-A 4 OUT-2
CN62-A 5 CN63-A 5 OUT-3
CN62-A 6 CN63-A 6 OUT-4
CN62-A 7 CN63-A 7 OUT-5 CN551-1
CN65-1 M801 DRV1
CN62-A 8 CN63-A 8 OUT-6 CN551-2 M801 PUNCH MOTOR
CN65-2 M801 DRV2
CN62-A 9 CN63-A 9 OUT-7
CN62-A10 CN63-A10 OUT-8
CN62-A11 CN63-A11 OUT-9
CN62-A12 CN63-A12 OUT-10
CN62-A13 N.C. CN63-A13 N.C.
CN62-A14 CN63-A14 PS801
CN62-A15 N.C. CN63-A15 N.C.
CN62-A16 N.C. CN63-A16 N.C.
CN62-A17 CN63-A17 PS802 IN
CN62-A18 CN63-A18 PS804 IN
CN62-A19 N.C. CN63-A19 N.C.
CN62-A20 N.C. CN63-A20 N.C.
CN62-B 1 N.C. CN63-B 1 N.C.
CN62-B 2 N.C. CN63-B 2 N.C.
CN62-B 3 PKSET2 CN63-B 3 PKSET2
CN62-B 4 PKSET CN63-B 4 PKSET
CN62-B 5 SIG_1 CN63-B 5
4
4
FNSCB
CN65-3 PS801 5V
CN62-B 7 SIG_3 CN63-B 7 CN501-2
CN65-4 PS801 IN PS801 PUNCH HOME SENSOR
CN62-B 8 SIG_4 CN63-B 8 CN501-3
CN65-5 PS801 SG
CN62-B 9 SIG_5 CN63-B 9
CN62-B10 SIG_6 CN63-B10
CN62-B11 SIG_7 CN63-B11
CN62-B12 SIG_8 CN63-B12
CN62-B13 SIG_9 CN63-B13
CN62-B14 SIG_10 CN63-B14
CN62-B15 M801CONT CN63-B15
CN62-B16 M801F/R CN63-B16
CN62-B17 N.C. CN63-B17 N.C.
CN62-B18 N.C. CN63-B18 N.C.
CN62-B19 SG CN63-B19 SG
CN62-B20 SG CN63-B20 SG
5
5
CN504-1
CN66-2 PS804 5V PUNCH SCRAPS
CN504-2
CN66-5 PS804 IN PS804
CN504-3 BOX SET SENSOR
CN66-8 PS804 SG
CN66-3 5V NC
CN66-6 IN NC
CN66-9 SG NC
CN531-3 CN531-1 CN502-1
CN66-1 PS802 5V PUNCH SCRAPS
CN531-2 CN531-2 CN502-2
CN66-4 PS802 IN PS802
CN531-1 CN531-3 CN502-3 FULL SENSOR
CN66-7 PS802 SG
PDB
6
6
CN158-3
CN69-1 24V
CN158-9
CN69-2 24V
CN158-1
CN69-3 M802 DRVA
CN158-5 M802 PUNCH SHIFT MOTOR
CN69-4 M802 DRVA
CN158-7
CN69-5 M802 DRVB
CN158-11
CN69-6 M802 DRVB
CN505-1
CN67-1 PS803 5V
CN505-2
CN67-2 PS803 IN PS803 PUNCH SHIFT HP SENSOR
7
7
CN505-3
CN67-3 PS803 SG
8
8
Crimp
Symbol
Connector
9
9
Relay connector
I Faston
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G
22. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
H
D
C
G
22.21 PK-505
1
1
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
2
2
3
3
CN62-A 1 5V CN63-A 1 5V
CN62-A 2 5V CN63-A 2 5V
CN62-A 3 OUT-1 CN63-A 3 OUT-1
CN62-A 4 OUT-2 CN63-A 4 OUT-2
CN62-A 5 OUT-3 CN63-A 5 OUT-3
CN62-A 6 OUT-4 CN63-A 6 OUT-4
CN62-A 7 OUT-5 CN63-A 7 OUT-5
CN62-A 8 OUT-6 CN63-A 8 OUT-6
CN62-A 9 OUT-7 CN63-A 9 OUT-7 CN551-1-2
CN65-1 M301 DRV1
CN62-A10 OUT-8 CN63-A10 OUT-8
CN65-2 N.C. CN551-2-1 M301 PUNCH MOTOR
CN62-A11 OUT-9 CN63-A11 OUT-9
CN65-3 M301 DRV2
CN62-A12 OUT-10 CN63-A12 OUT-10
CN62-A13 N.C. CN63-A13 N.C.
CN62-A14 PS301 CN63-A14 PS301
4
4
FNSCB
CN62-B 6 SIG_2 CN63-B 6 SIG_2
CN62-B 7 SIG_3 CN63-B 7 SIG_3 CN502-1
CN67-3 5V
CN62-B 8 SIG_4 CN63-B 8 SIG_4 CN502-2 PUNCH SCRAPS
CN67-2 SUBIN1 PS302
CN62-B 9 SIG_5 CN63-B 9 SIG_5 CN502-3 FULL SENSOR
CN67-1 SG
CN62-B10 SIG_6 CN63-B10 SIG_6
CN62-B11 SIG_7 CN63-B11 SIG_7
CN62-B12 SIG_8 CN63-B12 SIG_8
CN62-B13 SIG_9 CN63-B13 SIG_9
CN62-B14 SIG_10 CN63-B14 SIG_10
CN62-B15 M301CONT CN63-B15 N.C.
CN62-B16 M301F/R CN63-B16 N.C.
CN62-B17 N.C. CN63-B17 N.C.
5
5
CN503-1
PDB
CN66-6 PS304 5V
6
6
CN505-1
CN66-3 PS302 5V
CN505-2 PUNCH SHIFT HP SENSOR
CN66-2 PS302 IN PS303
CN505-3
CN66-1 PS302 SG
CN552-3
CN69-1 24V CN552-9
CN69-2 24V CN552-1
CN69-3 DRVA CN552-5 M302 PUNCH SHIFT MOTOR
CN69-4 DRVA CN552-7
CN69-5 DRVB CN552-11
CN69-6 DRVB
7
7
CN67-12 PS303 5V
CN67-11 PS303 IN
CN67-10 PS303 SG
8
8
Crimp
Symbol
Connector
9
9
Relay connector
Faston
I
F
E
B
A
H
D
C
G
22. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
H
D
C
A
G
22.22 ZU
CN53- 3/1
AC CODE
CN7- 9 M10-24V
CN53- 1/3
CN7- 10 M10-DRV Conveyance motor cooling fan
CN53- 2/2
CN3- 8 M10-EM
M10
1
1
CN7- 11 24VDRV
CN7- 12 DRVSPR
CN32- 4 CN42- 1
CN5- B1 M2 24V
CN32- 5 CN42- 6
CN5- B2 M2 A
CN32- 6 CN42- 4
CN5- B3 M2 A
CN32-13 CN42- 2 1st stopper motor
CN5- B4 M2 24V
M2
CN32-14 CN42- 5
CN5- B5 M2 B
CN32-15 CN42- 3
CN5- B6 M2 B
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
AC INRET
CN5- B8 M3 A
FT2
FT3
FT1
CN32- 9 CN74- 3/11 CN43- 6
CN5- B9 M3 A
CN32-16 CN74- 4/10 CN43- 2 2nd stopper motor
CN5-B10 M3 24V
M3
CN32-17 CN74- 5/9 CN43- 3
CN5-B11 M3 B
CN32-18 CN74- 6/8 CN43- 1
CN6-B12 M3 B
RT1 CN30- 1 CN46- 5
CN8- 1 M6 24V
CN30- 2 CN46- 4
CN5- 6 M6 B-
CN30- 3 CN46- 6
FT5
FT4
CN8- 5 M6 B
CN30- 4 CN46- 2 Conveyance motor
CN8- 4 M6 24V
M6
CN30- 5 CN46- 3
CN8- 3 M6 A-
CN30- 6 CN46- 1
CN8- 2 M6 A
CBR2
CBR1
CN32- 1 CN41- 1
CN5- A7 M1 24V
CN32- 2 CN41- 3
CN5-A12 M1 B-
FT7
FT6
CN32- 3 CN41- 4
2
2
CN5-A11 M1 B
CN32-10 CN41- 2 Registration motor
CN5-A10 M1 24V
Circuit breaker/2
Circuit breaker/1
M1
CN32-11 CN41- 5
CN5- A9 M1 A-
CN32-12 CN41- 6
CN5- A8 M1 A
CN45- 5
CN5- A1 M5 24V
CN45- 4
FT9
FT8
CN5- A2 M5 A
CN45- 6
CN5- A3 M5 A
4
3
CN45- 2 Punch shift motor
CN5- A4 M5 24V
M5
CN45- 3
CN5- A5 M5 B
CN45- 1
NF
CN5- A6 M5 B
2
1
Noise filter
FT11
FT10
CN47- 1
CN7- 7 M7-24V
CN47- 2 Punch scraps conveyance motor
CN7- 8 M7-DRV
M7
RT4 RT5
Power relay/1
RL/1
FT13
FT12
FT16
A
C
FT17
CN39- 9/6 CN52- 2
CN7- 5 MC1-24V
CN39-10/5 CN52- 1 Punch clutch
CN7- 6 MC1-DRV
3
3
FT18
CL1
B
D
FT19
FT15
FT14
CN39-11/4 CN44- 2
CN11- 1 M4-24V
CN39-12/3 CN44- 1 Punch motor
CN11- 4 M4-DRV
M4
RL/2
PGC7
CN39-1/14
FT22
FT21
CN3- 1 5VDC CN25- 1 5V
CN39-2/13
CN3- 2 PSS-IN1 CN25- 2 PSS-IN1
Power relay/2
CN39-3/12
CN3- 3 PSS-IN2 CN25- 3 PSS-IN2
CN39-4/11
CN3- 4 PSS-IN3 CN25- 4 PSS-IN3
MS1
CN39-5/10
CN3- 5 PSS-IN4 CN25- 5 PSS-IN4
CN39-6/9
CN3- 6 PSS-IN5 CN25- 6 PSS-IN5
Door switch
CN39-7/8
PESB
FT24
FT23
CN3- 7 GND CN25- 7 GND
PGC8
CN65- 1
CN39-8/7 CN65- 2
CN4- 8 P-HP2-IN
CN78- 1
CN65- 3 PS6 Punch home sensor
Coil
4
4
ZUCB
RT3
CN78- 2
CN39- 14/1 RT4
RT2
CN36-13/1 CN50- 1
CN7- 1 SD1-DRV1 CN36-12/2 CN50- 2 Gate solenoid/Lw
CN7- 2 SD1-DRV2 SD1
FG
RT7
RT6
RT8
CN36-11/3 CN51- 1
CN7- 3 SD2-DRV1
L : HOT
+V:24V
RT10 CN2-1 24VDC
+V:24V
CN2-2 24VDC CN62- 1
RT13
CN36-4/10 CN62- 2
CN4- 5 S-HP1-IN 1st stopper home sensor
5
5
CN62- 3 PS3
-V:P.G
RT11 CN2-3 24VGND
RT12
CN36-5/9 CN74-11/3 CN63- 2
CN4- 6 S-HP2-IN 2nd stopper home sensor
CN74-12/2 CN63- 3 PS4
PGC9
CN4- 3 5V CN36-7/7 PGC5 CN74- 9/5 CN61- 3
CN4- 4 PSS-IN CN36-6/8 CN74- 8/6 CN61- 2
CN36-2/12 CN74- 7/7 CN61- 1 PS1 Passage sensor
CN4- 14 GND
PGC6
PGC10
CN68- 1
CN4- 11 EXT-PS CN36-1/13 CN74-13/1 CN68- 2
CN68- 3 PS9 Exit sensor
motor
CN67- 3
CN4- 9 P-FULLIN CN67- 2
CN67- 1 PS8 Punch scraps full sensor
Punch switchover CN33- 3/2 CN31-2/3
CN33- 4/1 CN31-1/4
CN12-1 MS2-CONT
switch CN12-2 MS2-GND
PGC3
CN4- 1 5V CN66- 1
MS2 CN4- 10 BOX-IN CN66- 2
CN66- 3 PS7 Punch scraps box set sensor
CN4- 13 GND
PGC4
CN64- 1
CN4- 7 P-HP1-IN CN64- 2
CN64- 3 PS5 Punch shift home sensor
CN20
CN106-1 MTXDOUT CN97-6/1 CN6- 8 M-RXD-IN
CN6- 9 SGND CN21
CN106-2 SGND CN97-5/2
CN106-3 XCTSIN CN97-4/3 CN6-10 P-RTS1-OUT
CN106-4 MRXDIN CN97-3/4 CN6-11 M-TXD-OUT
CN6-12 SGND
7
7
CN 9- 7 F-TXD-OUT CN90-12
CN 9- 2 SGND CN90-11
CN 9- 9 P-REQ-OUT CN90-10
CN 9- 4 SGND CN90- 9
CN 9- 11 F-ACK-IN CN90- 8
CN 9- 6 SGND CN90- 7
CN 9- 1 F-RXD-IN CN90- 6
CN 9- 8 SGND CN90- 5
CN 9- 3 F-REQ-IN CN90- 4
CN 9- 10 SGND CN90- 3
CN 9- 5 P-ACK-OUT CN90- 2
CN 9- 12 SGND CN90- 1
CN 9- 13
CN95- 1 CN10- 1 M-RXD-IN
8
8
CN10- 5 M-ACK-OUT
CN95- 6 CN10- 6 SGND
MAIN BODY
CN1- 1 5VDC
Symbol
CN1- 3 SGND
C
ORG
CN96- 1 CN91-1 24VDC
Connector
RED PGC1
CN96- 2 CN91-2 5VDC
BLU
CN96- 3 CN91-3 SGND
BLK PGC2
CN96- 4 CN91-4 PGND
BLK
CN96- 5 CN91-5 PGND
BLK
9
9
Relay connector
I Faston
F
E
B
H
D
C
A
G
22. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
H
D
C
A
G
22.23 TU
1
1
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
CN441
1 3 CN418-1
CN404-A8 24V
2 2 CN418-2
CN404-A1 LD
Power plug
3 1 CN418-3 Scraps removal motor
CN404-A7 GND
M108
CN402-A 1 5V CN411-1
CN402-B 1 S.G CN411-2
CN411-3
Inlet
CN402-A 3 CONT
CN402-A 4 CLK CN411-4
FT:
CN411-5
FT:
CN402-A 6 F/R
CN402-A 5 PLL CN411-6
CN411-7 NC Conveyance motor
CN402-A 2 BLK
M101
SPS-51T-187
CN411-8
2
2
SPS-51T-187
CN402-A14 P.G
FT:
CN402-A13 P.G CN411-9
FT:
CN402-A12 24V CN411-10
CN402-A11 24V CN411-11
SPS-61T-250
CBR
SPS-61T-250
CN436-1 CN451-1
FT:
FT:
CN402-B13 5V
CN402-A 7 IN CN436-2 CN451-2
CN436-3 CN451-3 PS101 Entrance sensor
CN402-B 6 GND
Circuit breaker
SPS-61T-250
SPS-61T-250
CN402-B 9 5V
FT:
FT:
B
B FT:
CN402-B10 5V CN402-B12 5V CN456-1
FT: CN456-2
SPS-01T-187 CN402-A 8 IN PS107 Scraps box sensor
CN402-B 5 GND CN456-3
SPS-01T-187
SPS-51T-187
SPS-51T-187
RL2
RL1
FT:
FT:
Relay /2
Relay /1
FT: CN435-1 CN470-1
FT:
SPS-01T-187 CN402-B11 5V
CN402-B 8 S.G
A
LED101 Scraps box full LED
SPS-51T-187
CN435-3 CN470-3
SPS-51T-187
CN402-B 4 GND
A
CN402-B 7 S.G
SPS-01T-187
CN402-A 9 IN CN437-1 CN459-1
3
3
CN402-B 3 GND
FT:SPS-61T-250
FT:SPS-61T-250
CN407 1 DRV CN412-1
CN407 2 DRV CN412-2 Blade motor
M102
Ferrite
(CN408- 1 5V) CN456-1
CN408- 2 IN CN456-2
Blade
FT:SPS-61T-250
FT:SPS-61T-250
CN406-A 3 24V CN413-2
CN406-A 4 DRVA CN413-3
CN406-A 5 DRVA CN413-4 Stopper motor
CN413-5
M103
CN406-A 6 DRVB
MS2
CN413-6
Front door
CN406-A 7 DRVB
interlock switch
CN406-A 8 24V CN414-1 Stopper
CN414-2
CN406-A 9 DRV release motor
4
4
M104
FT:SPS-61T-250
FT:SPS-61T-250
CN406-B 3 5V CN452-1
CN406-B 7 IN CN452-2
CN452-3 PS102 Conveyance sensor
CN490-1
CN405-B10 GND
CN453-1
Stopper
CN406-B 2 5V
CN406-B 6 IN CN453-2
PS103 Stopper home sensor
Coil
CN406-B 9 GND CN453-3
CN406-B 1 5V CN454-1
CN406-B 5 IN CN454-2 Stopper
CN454-3 PS104
CN406-B 8 GND release home sensor
CN490-2
CUTDEC
5V
CN403-3 5V CN455-1
L : HOT
CN455-2
5
5
Press
CN404-B 4 5V CN463-1
CN404-A 2 IN CN463-2
CN463-3 PS108 Exit sensor
CN404-B 9 GND
CN404-B 3 5V CN460-1
CN404-A 3 IN CN460-2
CN460-3 PS110 Upper limit sensor
CN404-B 8 GND
CN404-B 2 5V CN461-1
CN461-2
6
6
CN404-B 1 5V CN462-1
CN404-A 5 IN CN462-2
CN462-3 PS112 Pusher home sensor
CN404-B 6 GND
CN491-15 CN491- 1
CN401-A 1 CN41-A 1 M101_CONT
CN491-14 CN491- 2
CN401-A 2 CN41-A 2 M101_CLK
CN491-13 CN491- 3
CN401-A 3 CN41-A 3 M101_BLK
CN491-12 CN491- 4
CN401-A 4 CN41-A 4 M101_PLL
CN491-11 CN491- 5
CN401-A 5 CN41-A 5 M102_CONT
CN491-10 CN491- 6
CN401-A 6 CN41-A 6 M102_F/R
7
7
CN491- 9 CN491- 7
CN401-A 7 CN41-A 7 M103_DRVA
CN491- 8 CN491- 8
CN401-A 8 CN41-A 8 M103_DRVA/
CN491- 7 CN491- 9
CN401-A 9 CN41-A 9 M103_DRVB
CN491- 6 CN491-10
CN401-A10 CN41-A10 M103_DRVB/
CN491- 5 CN491-11
CN401-A11 CN41-A11 M104_CONT
CN491- 4 CN491-12
CN401-A12 CN41-A12 M105_CONT
CN491- 3 CN491-13
CN401-A13 CN41-A13 M101_F/R
CN492-11 CN492- 4
CN401-A19 CN41-A14 TU_SIN1-2
CN492- 9 CN492- 6
CN401-B 1 CN41-A15 IN101Y
CN493- 9 CN493- 9
CN401-B18 CN41-B 1 PS101_IN
CN492- 7 CN492- 8
CN401-B 3 CN41-B 2 PS102_IN
CN492- 6 CN492- 9
CN401-B 4 CN41-B 3 PS103_IN
CN492- 5 CN492-10
CN401-B 5 CN41-B 4 PS104_IN
CN492- 4 CN492-11
CN401-B 6 CN41-B 5 PS105_IN
CN492- 3 CN492-12
CN401-B 7 CN41-B 6 PS106_IN
CN493- 1 CN493- 1
CN401-B10 CN41-B 7 PS110_IN
CN493- 2 CN493- 2
CN401-B11 CN41-B 8 PS111_IN
CN492- 1 CN492-14
CN401-B 9 CN41-B 9 PS108_IN
CN493- 4 CN493- 4
CN401-B13 CN41-B10 CUT24VDEC
CN492-14 CN492- 1
CN401-A16 CN41-B11 M107_CONT
CN493- 3 CN493- 3
CN401-B12 CN41-B12 PS112_IN
CN492- 2 CN492-13
FS-611
CN493- 5 CN493- 5
CN401-B14 CN42- 2 5V
CN493- 7 CN493- 7
CN401-B16 CN42- 3 S.GND
CN42- 4
CN42- 5
CN491- 2 CN491-14
CN401-A14 CN43- 1 M106_CONT
CN491- 1 CN491-15
CN401-A15 CN43- 2 M106_F/R
CN492-13 CN492- 2
CN401-A17 CN43- 3 TU-OUT-1
CN492-12 CN492- 3
CN401-A18 CN43- 4 TU-OUT-2
CN493-11 CN493-11
CN401-B20 CN43- 5 NC
CN493-10 CN493-10
CN401-B19 CN43- 6 SUBOUT 4
CN492- 8 CN492- 7
Crimp
CN401-B15
CN493-12 CN493-12
CN401-B17
Connector
9
9
Relay connector
I Faston
F
E
B
H
D
C
A
G
22. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
H
D
C
A
G
YEL
YEL 6 1
YEL MP6 +24VI [24] SPARE
BLU 5 2
P7
MP5 [ 24]
BLK 4
22.24 GP/MK
NEUT [0]
ORG 3
P6
NEUT [0]
CAP
RED 2 1
NEUT [0] +24VI [24] Back Gauge
COUNTER
ROTATION
WHT 1 2
Punch Motor
BRN
P8
10 MFD/370V
CLOCKWISE
[ 115/230] [ 24] Solenoid
1
1
1
+24VI [24]
2 Punch Clutch
P9
[ 24]
1
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
+24VI [24]
2 Punch Brake
P10
[ 24]
YEL
P5
CAP
NEUT [0] +24VI [24] Divert
RED 2 2
P12
ROTATION
ORG WHT 1
10 MFD/370V
CLOCKWISE
[ 115/230]
Transport Motor
1
GND [0]
2
P24
GND [0]
GROUND
2
2
N
1
+24VI [24]
2
CN1
GND [0]
P26
1
+5V [5]
2
GND [0]
LINE FILTER
3
Main Switch
115/230VAC IN
2 4 M1PMW
NEUT [0] [ 5]
1 5
P31
P1
CN2
GND [0]
MOTOR CONTROLLER
L
7
GND [0]
8
CN3
2 RED
4 GRN
5 BLK
1 BLU
3 ORG
3
3
OV 4
3
GND [0]
OV
2
GND [0]
+24V
P3
CN2
1
+24V [24]
+24V
+24V [24]
24VDC / 200 W
Motor
CN1
POWER SUPPLY
Stepper
Entrance
NEUTRAL 3
NEUT [0] 1
2 +24VI [24]
P2
LINE 1 2
CN1
4 1
4
4
2
GND [0] 4 M2PMW
SW 1
[ 5] [ 5]
5
MOTOR CONTROLLER
GND [0]
P32
CN2
6 M2AW
Chip Tray Switch [ 5]
7
GND [0]
8
CN3
SW-N.O.
+24VI 4
[ +24VI]
3
2 RED
4 GRN
5 BLK
1 BLU
3 ORG
+24V [24]
P14
2
PUNCH CONTROLLER PCB
GND [0]
SW 1
[ 5]
Door Switch
SW-N.C.
5
5
Exit
Motor
ICTS1 6 [ 5]
Stepper
5 GND [0]
ITXD1 4 [ 5]
P36
IRTS1 3 [ 5]
UP CN2
2
GND [0]
IRXD1 1 [ 5] N.C.
FS-528/611
1
[ 5]
2 SPARE
P28
GND [0]
1
+5V [5]
2 Chip Tray
ORTS3 4 [ 5] [ 5]
P40
3 Full Sensor
IRXD3 3 [ 5] GND [0]
IRTS1 2 [ 5]
P37
ORXD1 1
UP CN4
[ 5] 1
+5V [5] LTR / A4 Only for A4 base
2
[ 5] Jumper
P41
3
GND [0] connector
6
6
10 +5V [5]
9 1
+5V [5] +5V [5]
8 2
GND [0] [ 5] SPARE
P35
7 3
GND [0] GND [0]
EXIT PS 6 [ 5]
RESERVE 5 [ 5]
P38
4 1
GND [0] +5V [5] Punch
3 2
UP, DN CN3
2 3
+5V [5] GND [0] Sensor (S9)
GP-501
1
+5V [5]
1
+5V [5]
2 Bypass
[ 5]
P33
3 Sensor (S8)
GND [0]
ITXD3 8 [ 5]
ICTS3 7 [ 5]
ITXD2 6 [ 5] 1
+5V [5]
5 2 Exit
GND [0] [ 5]
P22
IRXD2 3 [ 5]
DN CN 2&4
FNS SET 2
7
7
[ 5]
IRTS2 1 [ 5] 1
+5V [5] Stepper 2
2
[ 5] Speed
P21
3
GND [0] Sensor (S6)
[
[
[
[
[
5]
5]
5]
5]
5]
GND [0]
GND [0]
GND [0]
GND [0]
GND [0]
+5V [5]
+5V [5]
+5V [5]
+5V [5]
+5V [5]
P16
P17
P18
P19
P20
2
2
2
2
2
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
3
1
Enter
Speed
Punch
Module
Stepper 1
U-channel
Sensor (S4)
Sensor (S1)
Sensor (S2)
Sensor (S3)
Back Gauge
8
8
[ ]
DC LINE
9
9
VOLTAGE
READY HIGH
SYMBOL TABLE
PULSE SIGNAL
SIGNAL DIRECTION
RELAY CONNECTOR
CLOSED END CONNECTOR
Main body
I
F
E
B
H
D
C
A
G
22. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM
Weight 40-49g/m2 50-61g/m2 62-71g/m2 72-80g/m2 81-91g/m2 92-105g/m2 106-130g/m2 131-161g/m2 162-216g/m2 217-244g/m2 245-300g/m2
Paper type LU-407/408
Fine Hammermill Fore MP (20lb) Domtar Microprint Laser Domtar Microprint Color Hammermill Color Copy Hammermill Color Copy Cover
(Smoothness: over 50 sec) Hammermill Fore MP (24lb) Copy (28lb) Cover Photo White (120g/m2) Photo white (80lb, 216g/m2)
colors (20lb)
Line speed (mm/s) 290 290 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 290 290
Fusing temp index. -30 -30 -15 -10 -10 +5 +5 +15 +15 +15 +15
Plain Appleton NCR paper Hammermill Tidal MP (20lb) 3MCG3700 Dom. Microprint Color Copy
(Smoothness: 20 to 50sec) Xero/Form II NCR0395 Domtar Recycled Copy Xerox one step image Cover (60lb, 163g/m2)
(20lb) tansfer paper for laser Dom. Microprint Color Copy
Hammermill Great White printers 3R5811 Cover (80Ib, 216g/m2)
Copy (20lb) imagedata 125micron
Xerox Multipurpose clear color laser film
Recycled (20lb) Avery 5160
Avery 5352
Line speed (mm/s) 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 290 290 290
Fusing temp index. -20 -15 -5 Standard temp. Standard temp. +10 +10 +15 +15 +15 +15
Embossed Springhill Digital Vellum Xerox cover (65lb)
(Smoothness: 5 to 20sec) Bristol Cover (150g/m2) Weyerhaeuser Cougar
Cover (176g/m2)
Springhill Digital Index
(Fromerlly Known as Index
Pius) (90lb)
Premium Multipurpose
4024 Index stock (90lb) Disable
Disable
Springhill Digital Index (A fusing performance is not securable.)
(Fromerlly Known as Index
Pius) (110lb)
Line speed (mm/s) 460 460 460 460 290 290 290 290
Fusing temp index. Standard temp. +5 +5 +5 +10 +10 +20 +20
1. Line speed and fusing temperature are decided by setting the paper type and paper weight.
2. Smoothness is a value measured by the Beck smoothness testing machine stipulated in the ISO 5627:1995, and the smaller the value, the coarser the paper grain. When the paper is not listed in this table and the setting condition of which
can not be found, obtain the smoothness from the paper manufacturer and select the type of paper according to the value of smoothness.
Note
• When using high quality printing paper, be sure to select a setting direction in which there occurs less amount of curling after printing.
• Marked with *: Paper the classification of which of smoothness or weight has been changed from the viewpoint of performance.
23. PAPER SETTING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
23.2 Relationship between the optimum value and the control of each of setting items by paper brand (U.S.A. paper) (for fusing soft roller)
bizhub PRO 950
Note
• This table lists the optimum setting values by paper brands checked for paper through by Konica Minolta. For other brands, it is scheduled that information is provided in due course upon completion of the paper through check.
Weight 40-49g/m2 50-61g/m2 62-71g/m2 72-80g/m2 81-91g/m2 92-105g/m2 106-130g/m2 131-161g/m2 162-216g/m2 217-244g/m2 245-300g/m2
Paper type LU-407/408
Fine Hammermill Fore MP (20lb) Domtar Microprint Laser Domtar Microprint Color Hammermill Color Copy Hammermill Color Copy Cover
(Smoothness: over 50 sec) Hammermill Fore MP (24lb) Copy (28lb) Cover Photo White (120g/m2) Photo white (80lb, 216g/m2)
colors (20lb)
Line speed (mm/s) 290 290 460 460 460 460 460 290 290 290 290
Fusing temp index. -15 -15 Standard temp. +5 +5 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10
Plain Appleton NCR paper Hammermill Tidal MP (20lb) 3MCG3700 Dom. Microprint Color Copy
(Smoothness: 20 to 50sec) Xero/Form II NCR0395 Domtar Recycled Copy Xerox one step image Cover (60lb, 163g/m2)
(20lb) tansfer paper for laser Dom. Microprint Color Copy
Hammermill Great White printers 3R5811 Cover (80Ib, 216g/m2)
Copy (20lb) imagedata 125micron
Xerox Multipurpose clear color laser film
Recycled (20lb) Avery 5160
Avery 5352
Line speed (mm/s) 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 290 290 290 290
Fusing temp index. -15 -5 +5 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10
Embossed Xerox cover (65lb) Springhill Digital Vellum
(Smoothness: 5 to 20sec) Weyerhaeuse Cougar Bristol Cover (150g/m2)
Opaque Cover (65lb)
Disable
Disable
(A fusing performance is not securable.)
Line speed (mm/s) 460 290 290 290 290 290 290
Fusing temp index. +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10
1. Line speed and fusing temperature are decided by setting the paper type and paper weight.
2. Smoothness is a value measured by the Beck smoothness testing machine stipulated in the ISO 5627:1995, and the smaller the value, the coarser the paper grain. When the paper is not listed in this table and the setting condition of which
can not be found, obtain the smoothness from the paper manufacturer and select the type of paper according to the value of smoothness.
Note
• When using high quality printing paper, be sure to select a setting direction in which there occurs less amount of curling after printing.
• Marked with *: Paper the classification of which of smoothness or weight has been changed from the viewpoint of performance.
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 23. PAPER SETTING
23.3 Relationship between the optimum value and the control of each of setting items by paper brand (European paper) (for fusing hard roller)
Weight 4 0-49g/m2 50-61g/m2 62-71g/m2 72-80g/m2 81-91g/m2 92-105g/m2 106-130g/m2 131-161g/m2 162-216g/m2 217-244g/m2 245-300g/m2
Paper type LU-407/408
Fine Clairmail (60g/m2) Mondi Color copy (90g/m2) Stora Enso 4CC (100g/m2) Mondi Color Copy (200g/m2) Stora Enso 4CC 220g Mondi IQ selection
(Smoothness: over 50 sec) Konca Minolta Color+ Smooth (280g/m2)
(90g/m2) Stora Enso 4CC (280g/m2)
Clairefontaine DCP (90g/m2)
Line speed (mm/s) 290 290 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 290 290
Fusing temp index. -30 -30 -15 -10 -10 +5 +5 +15 +15 +15 +15
Plain Mondi Maestro supreme Profi (80g/m2) Stora Enso Berga Image M-Real Data Laser (100g/ Howard Smith Replica Stora Enso Berga Cream
(Smoothness: 20 to (60g/m2) Original (80g/m2) (90g/m2) m2) (135g/m2) (250g/m2)
50sec) NAUTILUS SuperWhite Stora Enso Berga Supe- konicaminolta divider Xerox Digital Colortech+
(80g/m2) rior (100g/m2) Cards (160g/m2) (280g/m2)
Mondi Maestro Triotec Avery L7169 Mondi Maestro supreme
TCF (80g/m2) Avery L7160 (280g/m2)
Stora Enso MultiCopy
Original Off-White (75g/m2)
Favini Flying Colors
(Cream) (80g/m2)
Xerox Premium Digital
Carbonless Paper
3R99086
Line speed (mm/s) 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 290 290 290
Fusing temp index. -20 -15 -5 Standard temp. Standard temp. +10 +10 +15 +15 +15 +15
Embossed BIO TOP 3 extra (80g/m2)
(Smoothness: 5 to 20sec)
Disable
Disable
(A fusing performance is not securable.)
Line speed (mm/s) 460 460 460 460 290 290 290 290
Fusing temp index. Standard temp. +5 +5 +5 +10 +10 +20 +20
1. Line speed and fusing temperature are decided by setting the paper type and paper weight.
2. Smoothness is a value measured by the Beck smoothness testing machine stipulated in the ISO 5627:1995, and the smaller the value, the coarser the paper grain. When the paper is not listed in this table and the setting condition of which
can not be found, obtain the smoothness from the paper manufacturer and select the type of paper according to the value of smoothness.
Note
• When using high quality printing paper, be sure to select a setting direction in which there occurs less amount of curling after printing.
• Marked with *: Paper the classification of which of smoothness or weight has been changed from the viewpoint of performance.
23. PAPER SETTING Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009
23.4 Relationship between the optimum value and the control of each of setting items by paper brand (European paper) (for fusing soft roller)
bizhub PRO 950
Note
• This table lists the optimum setting values by paper brands checked for paper through by Konica Minolta. For other brands, it is scheduled that information is provided in due course upon completion of the paper through check.
Weight 40-49g/m2 50-61g/m2 62-71g/m2 72-80g/m2 81-91g/m2 92-105g/m2 106-130g/m2 131-161g/m2 162-216g/m2 217-244g/m2 245-300g/m2
Paper type LU-407/408
Fine Clairmail (60g/m2) Mondi Color copy (90g/m2) Stora Enso 4CC (100g/m2) Mondi Color Copy (200g/m2) Stora Enso 4CC 220g Mondi IQ selection
(Smoothness: over 50 sec) Konica Minolta Color+ Smooth (280g/m2)
(90g/m2) Stora Enso 4CC (280g/m2)
Clairefontaine DCP (90g/m2)
Line speed (mm/s) 290 290 460 460 460 460 460 290 290 290 290
Fusing temp index. -15 -15 Standard temp. +5 +5 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10
Plain Mondi Maestro supreme Profi (80g/m2) Stora Enso Berga Image M-Real Data Laser (100g/ Howard Smith Replica Stora Enso Berga Cream
(Smoothness: 20 to (60g/m2) Original (80g/m2) (90g/m2) m2) (135g/m2) (250g/m2)
50sec) NAUTILUS SuperWhite Stora Enso Berga Supe- konicaminolta divider Xerox Digital Colortech+
(80g/m2) rior (100g/m2) Cards (160g/m2) (280g/m2)
Mondi Maestro Triotec Avery L7169 Mondi Maestro supreme
TCF (80g/m2) Avery L7160 (280g/m2)
Stora Enso MultiCopy
Original Off-White (75g/m2)
Favini Flying Colors
(Cream) (80g/m2)
Xerox Premium Digital
Carbonless Paper
3R99086
Line speed (mm/s) 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 290 290 290 290
Fusing temp index. -15 -5 +5 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10
Embossed BIO TOP 3 extra (80g/m2)
(Smoothness: 5 to 20sec)
Disable
Disable
(A fusing performance is not securable.)
Line speed (mm/s) 460 290 290 290 290 290 290
Fusing temp index. +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10
1. Line speed and fusing temperature are decided by setting the paper type and paper weight.
2. Smoothness is a value measured by the Beck smoothness testing machine stipulated in the ISO 5627:1995, and the smaller the value, the coarser the paper grain. When the paper is not listed in this table and the setting condition of which
can not be found, obtain the smoothness from the paper manufacturer and select the type of paper according to the value of smoothness.
Note
• When using high quality printing paper, be sure to select a setting direction in which there occurs less amount of curling after printing.
• Marked with *: Paper the classification of which of smoothness or weight has been changed from the viewpoint of performance.
Field Service Ver.2.0 Sep. 2009 23. PAPER SETTING
Blank page
© 2009 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
Printed in Japan
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid
CCA0Y5-M-FE2-0000
disclosure of confidential information.